MGCplus AB22A/AB32
Transcription
MGCplus AB22A/AB32
Operating Manual Amplifier system MGCplus with display and control panel AB22A/AB32 B0534-18.0 en sdjki 3 Contents A Introduction 1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 2 Notes on the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8 3 System description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10 4 MGCplus housing versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 5 Structure of the MGCplus device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 6 Insert communications processor CP22/CP42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17 7 Modules in the MGCsplit system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20 7.1 Measurement module, enclosure 1−SH400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21 7.2 Measurement module, enclosure 1−SH650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22 7.3 Processor modules 1−SH400CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23 7.4 LED display for modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 7.5 Connecting to MGCplus systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27 7.6 Enclosure dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32 8 Conditions on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35 9 Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 4 B Connecting 1 Connection: desktop housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 1.1 Mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 1.2 Battery connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 1.3 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 2 Connecting the ABX22A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 3 Shielding design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 4 Connecting transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12 4.1 Connecting separate TEDS modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 4.2 Strain gage full bridges, inductive full bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14 4.3 SG full bridges with AP810/AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 4.4 Strain gage half bridges, inductive half bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16 4.5 LVDT-Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17 4.6 SG half bridges with AP810/AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18 4.7 Connecting a single strain gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19 4.7.1 Compensating resistor external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19 4.7.2 Compensating resistor external with AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20 4.7.3 Single strain gage with AP14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21 4.7.4 Single strain gage with AP814Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22 4.7.5 Single strain gage with AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23 4.7.6 SG systems and rosettes on AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24 Torque flange T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26 4.8.1 Torque measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26 AP460i Pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28 4.8 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 5 Rotation speed measurement (symmetrical signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.3 B-29 Rotation speed measurement (symmetrical signals) with reference signal . . . . . . . . B-31 Torque transducers (T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-33 4.9.1 Torque measurement (square-wave excitation voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-33 4.9.2 Rotation speed measurement (asymmetrical signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-35 Torque transducers (T1A, T4A/WA-S3, T5, TB1A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37 4.10.1 Torque measurement (slip ring or direct cable connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37 4.10.2 Rotation speed and angle of rotation measurement (T4WA-S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38 4.10.3 Rotation speed measurement with inductive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41 4.11 Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42 4.12 DC voltage sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44 4.13 DC power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48 4.14 Resistors, Pt10, 100, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-49 4.15 Frequency measurement without a direction of rotation signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-51 4.16 Frequency measurement with direction of rotation signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52 4.17 Impulse counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53 4.18 Active and passive piezoelectric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-55 4.19 Piezoresistive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-56 4.20 Potentiometric transducers (single−channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-57 4.21 Potentiometric transducers (Multi−channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-58 4.22 Connection via distributor board VT814i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-59 4.23 Connection via distributor board VT810/815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-60 Connecting the MGCsplit modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-62 4.9 4.10 5 4.8.2 5.1 Split-line-cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-62 5.2 Power supply units NT650/NT651 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-63 5.3 Amplifier modules and connection boards in the 1−SH400 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-73 5.3.1 Amplifier modules that can be connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-73 5.3.2 Connection boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-74 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 6 5.4 6 Connecting the MGCsplit modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-75 5.5 Inputs/outputs for measurement modules SH400/SH650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-76 5.6 AP409 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-77 5.7 AP401 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-78 5.8 AP815i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-79 5.9 AP460i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-80 5.10 AP13i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81 5.11 AP17 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-85 5.12 AP71 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-89 5.13 AP78 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90 5.14 AP75 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-93 Connecting CANHEAD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96 6.1 ML74 communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-97 6.2 AP74 connection board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-98 7 Connecting the computer, PLC and printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-99 8 Connecting a shunt resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-100 9 Inputs, Outputs and remotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101 9.1 Inputs and Outputs CP22/CP42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101 9.2 Analogue output on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-104 9.3 Connection boards AP01i...AP18i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-105 9.3.1 Pin assignment AP01i/03i/05/08/09/11i/14/17/18i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-106 AP02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-111 AP07/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113 AP13i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-116 AP77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-119 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 7 9.3.2 Installing the EM001 final stage module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-120 AP07/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-121 AP08/14/17/18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-122 AP09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-124 C Commissioning 1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Devices in the desktop housing and rack frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 C-4 D Functions and symbols on the AB22A/AB32 1 2 3 Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 1.1 AB22A control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 1.2 AB32 control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 2.1 The first display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 2.2 Display in measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 2.3 Messages on the AB22A/AB32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 AB22A/AB32 in set-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11 3.1 Calling up menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 3.2 Quitting menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14 3.3 Channel selection in measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15 3.4 Channel selection in set-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 8 3.5 Saving the set-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17 3.6 Selection menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 3.7 Elements in the set-up window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19 E Measure 1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3 2 Basic measurement channel set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4 2.1 3 Adaptation to the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6 2.1.1 Extended functions of the ML38B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7 2.2 TEDS transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9 2.3 Signal conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13 2.4 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16 2.5 Analogue outputs (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17 Adaptation to the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 SG transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20 3.1.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21 3.1.2 Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24 Strain gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-27 3.2.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29 Inductive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31 3.3.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32 3.3.2 Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-34 Torque transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37 3.4.1 Direct input of torque characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 3.4.2 Measuring with the built-in shunt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 9 3.5 Adapting the rotation-speed channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-45 Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-49 3.6.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 Current and voltage measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-52 3.7.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-53 Resistance temperature detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-55 3.8.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-56 Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58 3.9.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-59 Impulse counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-61 3.10.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-62 Piezoelectric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-66 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 4 4.1 Connecting and measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-68 4.1.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-70 4.1.2 Setting up the zero point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-72 4.1.3 Special case: initial charge is known . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-73 Drift balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-74 Current-fed piezoelectric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-75 4.2 5 5.1 6 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-76 Piezoresistive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-78 6.1 7 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-79 6.1.1 Measuring transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-81 Potentiometric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-83 7.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-84 7.1.1 E-86 Measuring transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 10 F Additional functions 1 2 Remote (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 1.1 Switching on remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 1.2 Assigning remote contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4 Limit switches (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6 2.1 Activate limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7 2.2 Setting up limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8 2.3 Selection keys in the menu Limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11 3 Combine limit switches (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12 4 Adjusting peak values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-15 4.1 Peak value stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-15 4.2 Combine peak value stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-16 4.3 Controlling the peak value store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-18 4.4 ”Peak value” operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-19 4.5 ”Current value” operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-20 4.6 ”Envelope curve” operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21 4.7 Clear peak value store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-22 5 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-23 6 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-24 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 11 G Display 1 2 3 Display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3 1.1 Select set-up window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4 1.2 Set-up window Display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 1.3 Set-up window components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6 1.3.1 Numerical display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7 1.3.2 Graphic display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-17 1.4 Status limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-21 1.5 Status data acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-22 F-keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-23 2.1 F-keys in measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-23 2.2 F-keys in set-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-26 Channel names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-27 H System 1 2 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3 1.1 Define new user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4 1.2 Enable password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-5 1.3 Set operator access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6 1.4 Delete user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-7 1.5 Change password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-8 Save/Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-9 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 12 3 Recording measurement series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 H-14 Setting the measurement series parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-15 4 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-32 5 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-37 6 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-38 7 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-39 I Menu structure J Specifications 1 Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3 1.1 General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3 1.2 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML01B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-5 1.3 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML10B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-8 1.4 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML30B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-11 1.5 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML35B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-13 1.6 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML38B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-15 1.7 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML50B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-17 1.8 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML55B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-19 1.9 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML55BS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-21 1.10 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML60B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-24 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 13 2 Connection boards for one-channel amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-26 3 Multi-channel amplifier module ML455 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-34 4 Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-36 5 Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML801B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-41 Multi−channel amplifier connection boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-51 Multi−channel amplifier connection boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-52 6 Programmable plug−in module ML70B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-53 7 Communication module ML71B/ML71BS6 with AP71 (CANbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-56 8 Communication module ML74 with AP74 (CANHEAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-58 9 Communication module ML77B with AP77 (Profibus DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-59 10 Multi-channel I/O amplifier module ML78B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-60 11 System devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-63 K Index MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 14 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-1 A Introduction MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-2 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Introduction Ý Safety instructions 1 A-3 Safety instructions Use in accordance with the regulations The amplifier system is to be used exclusively for measurement tasks and directly related control tasks. Use for any purpose other than the above shall be deemed to be not in accordance with the regulations. To ensure safe operation, the device may only be operated in accordance with the information given in the Operating Manual. It is also essential to comply with the legal and safety requirements for the application concerned during use. The same applies to the use of accessories. General dangers due to non-observance of the safety instructions The amplifier system is a state-of−the-art device and is fail-safe. The device may give rise to further dangers if it is inappropriately installed and operated by untrained personnel. Any person instructed to carry out installation, commissioning, maintenance or repair of the device must have read and understood the Operating Manual and in particular the technical safety instructions. Remaining dangers The scope of supply and list of components provided with the amplifier system cover only part of the scope of measurement technique. In addition, equipment planners, installers and operators should plan, implement and respond to the safety engineering considerations of measurement technique in such a way as to minimise remaining dangers. Prevailing regulations must be complied with at all times. There must be reference to the remaining dangers connected with measurement technique. After setting up and password protected activities, care must be taken to ensure that any control units that may be connected remain in a safe and secure state until the switching behaviour of the amplifier system has been checked. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-4 Introduction Ý Safety instructions Any risk of remaining dangers when working with the amplifier system is pointed out in this introduction by means of the following symbols: Symbol: DANGER Meaning: Maximum danger level Warns of a decidedly dangerous situation in which failure to comply with safety requirements will lead to death or serious physical injury. Symbol: WARNING Meaning: Dangerous situation Warns of a potentially dangerous situation in which failure to comply with safety requirements can lead to death or serious physical injury. Symbol: CAUTION Meaning: Possibly dangerous situation Warns of a possibly dangerous situation in which failure to comply with safety requirements could cause damage to property or result in some kind of minor physical injury. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-5 Introduction Ý Safety instructions Symbols indicating application notes and useful information: Symbol: NOTE Means that important information about the product or its handling is being given. Symbol: Meaning: CE mark The CE mark enables the manufacturer to guarantee that the product complies with the requirements of the relevant EC directives (the declaration of conformity is available at http://www.hbm.com/support/dokumentation). Symbol: Meaning: Component may be damaged by electrostatic discharge This means that the PCMCIA hard disk (optional) must be protected against static discharges by securing it in place with the fasteners provided (CP42 only). MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-6 Introduction Ý Safety instructions Working safely Error messages must only be acknowledged when the cause of the error has been removed and no further danger exists. Conversions and modifications The amplifier system must not be modified from the design or safety engineering point of view except with our express agreement. Any modification shall exclude all liability on our part for any resulting damage. In particular, any repair or soldering work on motherboards is prohibited (this includes changing components other than EPROMs). When exchanging complete modules, use only original parts from HBM. Qualified personnel means persons entrusted with the installation, assembly, commissioning and operation of the product who possess the appropriate qualifications for their function. This instrument must only to be installed and used by qualified personnel, strictly in accordance with the technical data and the safety requirements and regulations listed below. It is also essential to comply with the legal and safety requirements for the application concerned during use. The same applies to the use of accessories. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Introduction Ý Safety instructions A-7 Safety requirements Before commissioning, find out whether the mains voltage and current type specified on the identification plate match the mains voltage and current type at the place of use, and whether the circuit being used is adequately protected. Insert the mains plug only into a socket with a protection switch (Protection Class I). When connecting electrical devices to low voltage: connect to separated extra−low voltage (SELV) only (safety transformer in accordance with DINVDE 0551 / EN60742). Use only the mains cable supplied, which has been provided with a ferrite core. Before you open the device, make sure it is switched off; remove the mains plug from the socket. Never pull the mains plug from the socket by the mains cable. Do not operate the device, if the mains cable is damaged. If an amplifier channel is to be withdrawn, close off the plug-in unit with a blank plate. Built-in devices must only ever be operated whilst they are within the housing provided for them. The device complies with the safety requirements of DIN EN 61010-Part 1 (VDE 0411-Part 1); Protection Class I. To ensure adequate immunity from interference, use only Greenline shielded ducting (see HBM offprint ”Greenline shielding design, EMC-compliant measuring cable; G36.35.0”) The port connections (50V) must have an insulating strength of at least 350V(AC). MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-8 2 Introduction Ý Notes on the documentation Notes on the documentation The total documentation for the MGCplus amplifier system covers the following publications: The Operating Manual explains how you can operate the device manually and use it to take measurements. With each system device delivered, CD-ROMs containing the following documentation are also supplied: Operation with computer or terminal contains the commands for programming and measuring with a computer or terminal MGCplus Assistant, documentation about the program for assigning parameters and driving the MGCplus measurement amplifier system. Catman Demo, which is a demo version of the data acquisition, display and analysis software from HBM. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-9 Introduction Ý Notes on the documentation This manual contains all the information you need to operate the MGCplus. There are several guidelines available to you: • The column header tells you which chapter or sub-section you are currently reading. Example: Connections SG full bridges, induct. half bridges B-15 • The page numbering is linked to capital letters which correspond to the chapter headings. • Chapter D Functions and symbols on the AB22A/AB32 contains explanations about the AB22A/AB32 display and control panel. All statements about the display and control panel refer to both variants (AB22A/AB32). For reasons of space, however, most of the illustrations only show the AB22A. • Chapter I Menu structure gives you an overview of the selection and set-up menus on the display and control panel. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-10 3 Introduction Ý System description System description The MGCplus system is modular in construction. Depending on the enclosure variant concerned, up to 16 slots are available for one-channel and multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules. This means that up to 128 measuring points can be measured in one MGCplus. Each amplifier plug-in module operates in standalone mode through the internal CPU. Data conditioning, such as taring, filtering and measuring range adjustment, is carried out in digital form. The disadvantages of analogue conditioning, such as time and temperature related drift, errors due to component tolerances, limited flexibility and high circuit complexity, can no longer arise. The prerequisite for this, however, is analogue-digital conversion free of information loss. The digitally conditioned signal is fed to the internal high-speed bus. In the case of one-channel measurement modules, two analogue outputs (voltage or current) are available in addition to the digital measured values. A credit-card format standard internal PC collects the data with a total sampling rate of up to 300 000 values per second. All measurement signals can be captured in parallel, since each channel has its own A/D converter. No Sample & Hold or multiplexer is used in the MGCplus. This ensures continuous digital filtering and highest possible signal stability. Using interfaces like Ethernet or USB, data is sent to an external computer or PLC. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-11 2 Further MGCplus PC-Interface PC-Card (optional) Profibus CAN 10V ... 1 Digit remote contacts, limit switches Introduction Ý System description 8 2400Hz Digital signal conditioning filtering, scaling, zero balancing, etc. Digital signal conditioning ... ... filtering scaling, zero balancing, etc. CPU 8-channel module CPU ... CPU Display and Communikation processor CPxx control panel Synchronisation 2400Hz 2400Hz ... CPU One−channel module Serial bus MGCplus Fig.3.1: MGCplus block diagram MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Fig.3.2: ON/Off MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 MGCsplit block diagram Embedded PC with memory Multi-channel module Bus communication Display PC Card Communication Power pack On-board network 9V ... 58V Digital signal conditioning Filtering Scaling Zero balance Single-channel module Dig. sign. Filter. Scal. Zero ML70B Programmable module 10V Digital I/O CAN RS 232 C/RS 485 10V Remote contacts Limit value switches Ethernet USB RS 232 C Hard disk A-12 Introduction Ý System description A-13 Introduction Ý MGCplus housing versions 4 MGCplus housing versions The MGCplus system is supplied in various housing versions (dimensions in mm). Desktop housing TG 009C (173x171x367) Desktop housing TG 001C/002C (255x171x367) Rack frame 19” ER 003C/004C (482x133x375) Desktop housing TG 010B/003C/004C (458x171x367) Desktop housing Rack frame Slots Supply voltage (V) Weight, approx. (kg) TG/ER TG001C − 6 230 (115) 6 TG010C − 6 (with AB32) 230 (115) 8 TG002C − 6 12/24 = 6 TG003C ER003C 16 230 (115) 7/6 TG004C ER004C 16 12/24 = 7.5/6 TG009C − 2 230 (115) 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-14 Introduction Ý MGCplus housing versions All basic versions of the device consist of the following components: Display and control panel AB22A /AB32, AB12 (without link feature) Amplifier plug-in modules (ML10B, ML30B, ML50B, ML55B, etc.) Housing Connection boards (AP01i, AP02, etc.) Power pack Options: Final stage module (EM001) Relay module (RM001) CP22 (communications processor with Ethernet-on-board and USB-Interfaces) CP42 (communications processor with data storage option) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-15 Introduction Ý MGCplus device 5 Structure of the MGCplus device Connection boards (AP01i, AP02, etc.) Final stage modules Power pack CPxx Communications processor AB22A display and control panel Amplifier plug-in modules (ML30B, ML50B etc.) Fig.5.1: Device structure with display and control panel AB22A MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-16 Introduction Ý MGCplus device Connection board (AP01i to AP18i) Final stage modules Power pack CPxx Communications processor AB32 display and control panel Amplifier plug-in modules (ML30B, ML50B etc.) Fig.5.2: Device structure with display and control panel AB32 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-17 Introduction Ý MGCplus structure 6 Insert communications processor CP22/CP42 Requirements for operation of the communications processor: The MGC/MGCplus system must not include any AB12 display and control panel. The MGC/MGCplus/MGCsplit system must not include any modules of type MCxx. Only modules of type MLxxB (with ML firmware or MC firmware) and MLxx (only with ML firmware) are permissible. The display and control panels (AB22A, ABX22A, AB32) operated with the CP22 in the system unit must use firmware P4.01 or higher. Any firmware upload has to be performed before installing the communication processor. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-18 Introduction Ý MGCplus structure If you want to swap out an older type of communications processor for a CP22/CP42 communication processor, you have to remove two guide rails from the MGCplus housing. Upper Lower guide rail guide rail Fig.6: Guide rails in the MGCplus housing 1. Disconnect the MGCplus device from the mains power supply. 2. Remove the upper and lower covers from the housing. 3. Withdraw the existing communications processor from the housing. 4. CP12 only: Remove the BL01 blank plate next to the power pack (see page A-19). 5. Remove the upper and lower guide rails. 6. Slide the new communications processor into the housing. 7. Put the upper and lower covers back onto the housing. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-19 Introduction Ý MGCplus structure CAUTION Before swapping a CP12 communication processor for a CP22/CP42 you should also remove the blank plate next to the power pack, in order to prevent damage to any PCB components when sliding the processor into the housing. Blank plate BL01 Power pack CP 12 AB22A display and control panel Fig.6.1: Removing the BL01 blank plate (view from above) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 A-20 Introduction Ý MGCsplit 7 Modules in the MGCsplit system The MGCsplit system is based on the components of the MGCplus measurement system and housed in robust enclosures (protection class IP 40 or IP 65). The system makes it possible to build up a decentralized measurement system from individual modules. Each enclosure has room for an amplifier module and a maximum of two connector plates. The following module types are available, depending on the particular function required: D Measurement modules with one MLxx amplifier module and max. two connector plates D Processor modules with one communication processor D Power pack module with power pack and CAN input The modules are networked together using split-line connection cable and optionally may also be networked with the MGCplus system via the AP20 connector plate. Fig.7.1: MGCsplit measuring amplifier system Note When the line length exceeds 10m or the total number of modules exceeds 8, we recommend the use of a Link terminating resistor (1−MGCsplit Term) for linking the MGCsplit modules. MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-21 Introduction Ý MGCsplit 7.1 Measurement module, enclosure 1−SH400 This module has an enclosure which is open at the front and in which a conventional MGCplus MLxx amplifier module and a maximum of two connector plates can be fitted. If you use one connector plate only, this must be positioned in the outermost slot on the right and the empty slot must be closed off with a blank plate. Three communications LEDs Four module address LEDs Split-line in Split-line out Amplifier module, e.g. ML801B Connector plate 2, e.g. AP409 Subchannels 5 to 8 Connector plate 1, e.g. AP409 Subchannels 1 to 4 Fig.7.2: Version IP40, typical configuration MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-22 7.2 Introduction Ý MGCsplit Measurement module, enclosure 1−SH650 This module is closed by a shared front panel. The MLxx amplifier module and a maximum of two connector plates are fitted securely in the enclosure. The protection class IP65 enclosure is designed for outside use. The amplifier module or connector plates can only be changed in the factory. Three communications LEDs Four module address LEDs Split-line in Split-line out Amplifier, e.g. ML801B Connection sockets (ODU) Channels 5 to 8 Connection sockets (ODU) Channels 1 to 4 Fig.7.3: Version IP65, typical configuration MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-23 Introduction Ý MGCsplit 7.3 Processor modules 1−SH400CP The CP22 and CP42 communication processors in the 1−SH400 enclosure handle the communication between modules. They have the usual PC interfaces (RS232, USB, Ethernet) and ensure rapid synchronization with other MGCplus systems. The CP42 communication processor can also accept a PC card which enables data to be recorded without a PC. NOTE The CP22 communication processor has to be mounted right−aligned and the middle (free) slot has to be covered by a dummy plate. Interfaces Three communications LEDs Connection for indicator PC card Split-line in Split-line out Fig.7.4: Synchronization Enclosure 1−SH400 with CP42 communication processor MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-24 7.4 Introduction Ý MGCsplit LED display for modules Rx/Tx For monitoring the communication bus. Green = OK Off = communication signal fault SYNC For monitoring the synchronization signal. Green = signal present Off = no signal present LINK For monitoring the measurement data bus. Green = OK Off = link signal fault If the measurement system consists of more than four modules, the LINK LED is darker due to the increased data load from all the modules. If a link signal fault is suspected, the modules should be tested individually. ERROR If a measurement module is removed while the system is operating, the series-connected module detects this and its ERROR LED flashes red at approx. 1 Hz. Once the system is restarted the error status is reset. MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-25 Introduction Ý MGCsplit Display for other error situations (measurement modules only): LED display Error Error + address LED1 Restart error Error + address LED2 No address received Error + address LED4 Faulty address signal Error + address LED8 More than 16 channels present Restart errors can occur if the supply voltage is quickly turned off and on again. After switching off the supply voltage it is best to wait about 2 seconds before turning it on again. ”No address received” is displayed if the cabling is faulty, e.g. if line in (IN) and line out (OUT) have become switched. To remedy this, reconnect the cabling correctly and restart the system. When more than 16 measurement modules are connected, the measurement module displays at address 16 the error ”More than 16 channels present” and the following modules show ”No address received”. These measurement modules are ignored by the communication processor. MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-26 Introduction Ý MGCsplit ADDRESS (measurement modules only) Module address, binary display (address 16 = all LEDs off). NOTE The address is displayed in error-free measuring mode only. In the event of an error the address LEDs have a different meaning (see ERROR). Address LED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 4 8 = LED on = LED off The module addresses result from the cabling of the measurement system. The measurement module which has its split-line input (IN) connected to the split-line output (OUT) on the processor module receives address 1. The next module, which is connected to the output (OUT) of module 1, receives address 2, and so on. This gives continuous address numbering without gaps. In the event that MGCsplit modules are incorporated into an MGCplus system via the AP20 connector plate, the first MGCsplit measurement module receives the address of the AP20 slot (e.g. with an AP20 in slots 3 and 4, the measurement module receives address 3). MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-27 Introduction Ý MGCsplit 7.5 Connecting to MGCplus systems Split-line connecting cable can also be used to connect the 1−SH400 and 1−SH650 measurement modules to MGCplus systems. An AP20 connector plate is needed for this. A processor module is not necessary, since communication is carried out by the processor on the MGCplus system. MGCplus system Connector plate Connecting cable AP20 1−Kab265 MGCsplit system 1−Kab264−3 Fig.7.5: MGCsplit measurement module connected to an MGCplus system MGCplus system requirements: D CP22 or CP42 communication processor. D Hardware version 1.31 (or higher) of the MGCplus measuring amplifier (older MLxx amplifiers can be retrofitted in the factory at Darmstadt). MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-28 Introduction Ý MGCsplit Installing an AP20 connector plate The AP20 connector plate is installed in the MGCplus instrument directly alongside the existing connector plates. The remaining slots (to the right of the AP20 in Fig.7.6) must be kept free. The unoccupied channels in the MGCplus (up to channel 16) are available to the MGCsplit system. In the case of amplifier modules that do not need connector plates (e.g. the ML77B), the backing connector plate slot must be kept free just the same (see Fig.7.7). MGCsplit Addresses 1 to 4 Address 5 Address 6 AP20 MGCsplit APxx APxx APxx APxx MGCplus CP22/ CP42 IN IN OUT Not in use MLxx MLxx MLxx MLxx AB22A display and control panel Fig.7.6: MGCsplit measurement module connected to an MGCplus system via an AP20 connector plate (top view) MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-29 Introduction Ý MGCsplit MGCsplit MGCsplit Address 5 Address 6 CP22/ Not in use APxx APxx APxx AP20 MGCplus Addresses 1 to 4 CP42 IN IN OUT Not in use MLxx MLxx MLxx ML77B AB22A display and control panel Fig.7.7: AP20 next to an amplifier module without a connector plate (top view) MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-30 Introduction Ý MGCsplit Is the last MGCplus module (MLxx or APxx) is double-width (e.g. ML38B, AP03i, etc.), then a complete slot must be kept free ahead of the AP20 connector plate (see Fig.7.8 and Fig.7.9). MGCsplit MGCsplit Addresses 1 to 4 Address 6 Address 7 Not in use APxx APxx APxx APxx AP20 MGCplus CP22/ CP42 Not in use Fig.7.8: ML38B MLxx MLxx MLxx AB22A display and control panel Special case of an ML38B with an AP20 connector plate MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 IN OUT IN A-31 Introduction Ý MGCsplit MGCsplit Address 8 AP20 AP03i MGCsplit Address 7 APxx APxx APxx MGCplus Addresses 1 to 4 CP22/ CP42 Not in use Not in use OUT IN MLxx MLxx MLxx MLxx AB22A display and control panel IN Fig.7.9: Special case of a double-width connector plate next to an AP20 connector plate MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-32 7.6 Introduction Ý MGCsplit Enclosure dimensions Mechanical linkage of the module enclosure 205.5 202.42 204.4 149.4 Raster 101.5 MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 Introduction Ý MGCsplit A-33 Dimensions in the case of lateral mounting MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-34 Dimensions in the case of rear mounting MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 Introduction Ý MGCsplit Introduction Ý Conditions on site 8 A-35 Conditions on site CAUTION D D D D D D D Protect desktop devices from moisture or atmospheric influences such as rain, snow etc. Ensure that the ventilation openings on the sides, the openings for the electric fan on the back of the device and the openings on the underside of the device are not covered up. Protect the device from direct sunlight. Comply with the maximum permitted ambient temperature specified for the system device in the technical data (chapter J). When installed in 19” fitted cupboards, due to the poor heat dissipation suitable steps must be taken to ensure that the maximum permissible ambient temperature is not exceeded (see page J-63). In all cases we recommend forced exhaust ventilation and in particularly critical cases, clearances above and below the rack frame. Permissible relative humidity at 31 5C is 80 % (non-condensing), reducing linearly to 50 % at 40 5C. The devices are classed as overvoltage category II, pollution grade 2 equipment. MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 A-36 9 Introduction Ý Maintenance and cleaning Maintenance and cleaning MGCplus system devices are maintenance free. Please note the following points when cleaning the housing: CAUTION Withdraw the mains plug from the socket before carrying out any cleaning. D D Clean the housing with a soft, slightly damp (not wet!) cloth. You should on no account use solvent, since it may damage the labelling on the front panel and the display field. When cleaning, ensure that no liquid gets into the device or connections. MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 B-1 B Connecting MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-2 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-3 Connecting Ý Mains and battery operation: desktop housing 1 Connection: desktop housing 1.1 Mains connection The NT010 power pack is designed for connection to 230 V (115 V) and for the maximum configuration of 16 channels. It adapts automatically to the 115 V/230 V mains supply voltage. The fan on the power pack is temperature-controlled and automatically cuts out if necessary. Chassis ground The power pack is protected with an internal 3.15 A/ T micro-fuse. CAUTION The power pack fuse may be changed only by the manufacturer’s service personnel. Earthing switch The earthing switch, in the factory setting ( ), links zero operating voltage to the protection circuit. If external devices (e.g. transducers, computers) already make this link, and this causes ground circuits to occur (hum-pickup), the earthing switch must be opened ( ). Mains connection Earthing switch MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-4 Connecting Ý Mains and battery operation: desktop housing 1.2 Battery connection Chassis ground The NT011 power pack is designed for mains−independent battery operation for a maximum of 16 channels. It adapts automatically to a 12 V/24 V DC supply voltage. The fan on the power pack is temperature-controlled and automatically cuts out if necessary. Connections Earthing switch Supply voltage (+) 12 V/24 V DC (−) To protect against electromagnetic interference, you must wrap the connection cable round the ferrite ring supplied (3 turns). Position the ferrite ring as close to the power pack as possible and make sure that the coils are parallel and close together. Ferrite ring Connection cable Connect the device to the battery via the screw terminals on the back of the device. Fuse CAUTION Be sure to make all connections with the correct polarity. Use cable with a wire cross section of 2.5 mm2 to 4 mm2. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting Ý Mains and battery operation: desktop housing B-5 Fuse Flat-pin fuse 25A F (Colour code colourless). The fuse also acts as a one-way fitting. Changing the fuse CAUTION Disconnect the device from the battery before changing the fuse. Voltage drop If the battery voltage drops below 8.5 V (for instance battery low, connection cable too long), the MGCplus is in reset status and is not ready to take measurements (display and LEDs light up). If the voltage returns to more than 10.8 V you may take measurements again. If the battery voltage drops below 7.5 V, the MGCplus switches off (display and LEDs dark) and is only ready for service again if battery voltage returns to 10.8 V. Earthing switch ), links zero operating voltage to the protection circuit. If external deThe earthing switch, in the factory setting ( vices (e.g. transducers, computers) already make this link, and this causes ground circuits to occur (hum-pickup), the earthing switch must be opened ( ). MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-6 Connecting Ý Mains and battery operation: desktop housing 1.3 Synchronization Synchronizing a CP22/CP42 Connected devices are automatically detected and synchronized by dedicated SYNC sockets. The status (master/slave) is displayed by means of a color−coded LED. CP42 RS 232 CARDBUS USB DEVICE USB HOST LED ETHERNET YE SLAVE RD ERROR GN MASTER IN SYNC CTRL I/O OUT 24V 1 2 GND 1 2 OUT IN Synchronization sockets CP42 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 LED Status Green Master Yellow Synchronized slave Red Unsynchronized slave Connecting Ý Mains and battery operation: desktop housing B-7 CP22 RS 232 CTRL I/O IN OUT 24Vext GNDext USB SLAVE SYNCRON. IN LED USB MASTER YE SLAVE RD ERROR GN MASTER ETHERNET OUT SYNCRON. Synchronization sockets CP22 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-8 2 Connecting Ý ABX22A Connecting the ABX22A Blank plate BL12A Connect the male connector for the mobile ABX22A display and control unit to the female connector on blank plate BL12A. Field upgrade: If you wish to replace an existing AB22A with a mobile ABX22A as an upgrade, please take note of the following points: • • • Male connector for the ABX22A: 3-3312.0121, 8-pin, Series 423 99−5671−15−08 Cable extension female connector: 3-3312.0120, 8-pin, Series 432 99−5672−15−08 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Replace the AB22A with a blank plate BL12A. Unscrew the cover from the housing Check the position of the sliding switch and change it if necessary (see figure below). B-9 Connecting Ý ABX22A Plan de positionnement des commutateurs d’interface (boîtier ouvert, vue de dessus) : Switch position seen from above Display and control unit position 1 Boîtier X S3 Commutateur CP S2 S1 Commutateur d’interfaces TTL S2 AB22A Câble nappe position 1 Bloc d’alimentation secteur RS485 position 2 ABX22A position 2 S1 S2 X S1 NOTE If a CP... Communication Processor was subsequently installed, the S3 CPswitch must be changed over! Without CP... seen from above With CP... seen from above CP CP yes S3 no S3 yes no MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-10 Connecting Ý ABX22A NOTE LOG OFF EXTERNAL DISPLAY Log off Cancel When operating devices without a communications processor but with an ML77B Profibus module, you must log off the ABX22A before removing the connector cable. 1. Use the shift key 2. Press function key to return to set-up mode. . 3. Select ”Log off” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 4. Select the ”Log off” button and confirm with . 5. When the message ”Now you can disconnect the ABX22A!” is displayed, you can remove the connector cable. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-11 Connecting Ý Shielding design 3 Shielding design Until now: gr 12 1* * Pin assignment varies according to the connection board (see table) So far, the customary HBM shielding connection has used a male connector to connect the shield. This solution provides only limited EMC protection and should no longer be used. Earth pin GREENLINE AP01i/13i/14/17 AP03i AP07/1 1 E YE New Greenline shielding design: wh bk rd HBM has developed the Greenline shielding design as an effective means of improving EMC protection against electromagnetic interference. The cable shielding is formed in such a way that the whole of the measurement chain is completely enclosed in a Faraday cage. bl gn gr NOTE ye In the case of connection boards fitted with a terminal connector (AP07/1), connect the cable shielding to the eyelet on the connection board. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-12 4 Connecting transducers Excitation voltage (+) When using double-width connection boards (AP03i) only slots 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 and 11i can be occupied by an amplifier. This also applies when using an AP01i connection board in conjunction with an AP02. Measurement signal (−) IMPORTANT: Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage (−) 2 1 Transducer with four-wire connection 4 Cable shielding 1) 3 Sensor circuit (+) Feedback bridges Sensor circuit (−) If you are connecting a transducer with 4-wire cable, you must connect the sensor circuit to the appropriate bridge excitation circuit in the transducer male connector (sensor circuit (−) to excitation voltage (−) and sensor circuit (+) to excitation voltage (+))*). Any cable extension must only ever be carried out in six-wire connection. *) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 For cable lengths >50 m, one resistor with half the bridge resistance value (BR/2) must be wired into the transducer in place of each feedback bridge. If the transducers are calibrated in six-wire connection, the resistors must be wired directly into the sensor circuit. Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.1 Amplifier: B-13 Connecting separate TEDS modules All MLxxB and ML460 U AP01i AP13i AP455i 1 9 8 15 8 (+) Operating voltage zero 6 (−) 15 Cable shielding Geh. TEDS TEDS Data 4 9 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-14 4.2 Strain gage full bridges, inductive full bridges Amplifier: Amplifier: SG full bridge ML30B, ML55B, ML10B3), ML38B4) Ind. full bridges ML50B, ML55B AP01i AP13i AP14 AP455i 1 9 8 15 AP03i A F B WH BK 2 BL RD 1 4 3 YE GN GR Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage (−) Excitation voltage (+) Measurement signal (−) Cable shielding 1) E D 6 1 2 3 5 4 8 A 1 5 B 2 6 C 3 15 Case D 4 Case Case Sensor circuit (+) 13 F 5 Sensor circuit (−) 12 G 6 1) see page B-11 2) SG full bridges only 3) Full bridge and Lo must be set up under bridge type only use ML38B in connection with AP01i and AP03i 4) C G AP11i AP455iS6 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.3 B-15 SG full bridges with AP810/AP815i Amplifier: ML801B AP810/AP815i Sub-channel Sub-channel 1 14 Sub-channel Sub-channel 1/5 2/6 3/7 4/8 2 5 8 11 Sub-channel 1...4 13 2 1 Measurement signal (+) BK Excitation voltage (−) Excitation voltage (+) Measurement signal (−) BL 14 RD 1 Sub-channel 5...8 13 WH 25 25 4 3 YE GN GR Cable shielding 1) 1 4 7 10 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 Case Case Case Case Sensor circuit (+) 16 19 22 25 Sensor circuit (−) 14 17 20 23 1) see also page B-11 Wire colours: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-16 4.4 Strain gage half bridges, inductive half bridges Amplifier: SG half bridges ML30B2), ML55B, ML10B3) Amplifier: Ind. half bridges ML50B, ML51, ML55B WH BK 2 BL 1 YE 3 GN GR 1) 2) 3) AP01i AP13i AP14 AP455i 1 9 8 15 AP03i A F B Measurement signal (+) 8 C G A E D AP11i AP455iS6 6 1 2 3 5 4 1 Excitation voltage (−) 5 B 2 Excitation voltage (+) 6 C 3 Cable shielding 1) Case Case Case Sensor circuit (+) 13 F 5 Sensor circuit (−) 12 G 6 see page B-11 only in conjunction with AP14 Half bridge and Lo must be set up under bridge type MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Wire colours: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.5 B-17 LVDT-Transducer Amplifier: ML455 AP455i AP455iS6 6 1 2 3 5 4 LVDT-Transducer Measurement signal (+) 8 Excitation voltage (−) 5 Excitation voltage (+) 6 Measurement signal (−) 15 Cable shield 1) case Sensor circuit (+) 13 Sensor circuit (−) 1 2 3 Case 12 5 6 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-18 4.6 SG half bridges with AP810/AP815i Amplifier: ML801B AP810/AP815i 1 Sub−channel Sub−channel 14 1/5 2/6 Sub−channel Sub−channel 3/7 4/8 Sub−channel 1...4 13 1 25 2 1 14 Sub−channel 4 14 25 3 20 23 1 4 7 10 2 5 8 11 Case Case Case 18 21 24 9 12 22 25 Sensor circuit (−) WH/RD Excitation voltage (−) WH/GN Measuring signal (+) Cable shielding Case GN Measuring signal (−); AP815ii only 15 WH/BR Excitation voltage (+) 3 6 BN Sensor circuit (+) 5...8 13 17 RD 16 1) 19 see page B-11 Wire colours: WH= white; BL= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-19 4.7 Connecting a single strain gage 4.7.1 Compensating resistor external Amplifier: ML55B, ML10B AP01i AP13i AP455i 1 9 8 15 AP03i A F B WH BK 2 BL C G E D YE R 3 GN GR 1) 6 1 2 3 5 4 Measurement signal (+) 8 A 1 Excitation voltage (−) 5 B 2 Excitation voltage (+) 6 C 3 ε 1 AP11i Cable shielding 1) Case Case Case Sensor circuit (+) 13 F 5 Sensor circuit (−) 12 G 6 see page B-11 R - compensating resistor Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-20 4.7.2 Compensating resistor external with AP815i Amplifier: ML801B AP810/AP815i 1 Sub−channel Sub−channel 14 1/5 2/6 Sub−channel Sub−channel 3/7 4/8 Sub−channel 1...4 13 1 25 2 1 14 Sub−channel 4 14 25 3 20 23 1 4 7 10 2 5 8 11 Case Case Case 18 21 24 9 12 22 25 Sensor circuit (−) WH/RD Excitation voltage (−) WH/GN Measuring signal (+) Cable shielding Case GN Measuring signal (−); AP815ii only 15 WH/BR Excitation voltage (+) 3 6 BN Sensor circuit (+) 5...8 13 17 RD 16 1) 19 see page B-11 Wire colours: WH= white; BL= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.7.3 B-21 Single strain gage with AP14 Amplifier: ML30B, ML55B, ML10B AP14 Sensor circuit (−) Excitation voltage (−) SG 1 9 8 15 12 5 SG Case Excitation voltage (+) Sensor circuit (+) 15 8 Three-wire connection* Four-wire connection* * Must be set up under bridge type MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-22 4.7.4 Single strain gage with AP814Bi Amplifier: ML801B AP814Bi 1 Sub-channels 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 2 15 5 18 5 8 21 11 24 Case Sub-channel 1...8 13 25 Excitation voltage (−) SG Cable shielding 1) Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Excitation voltage (+) 15 14 16 17 19 15 20 22 23 25 8 1 3 4 6 8 7 9 10 12 Sensor circuit (+) Three-wire connection 1) see also page B-11 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.7.5 B-23 Single strain gage with AP815i Amplifier: ML801B AP815i Sub−channel 1 14 1/5 Sub−channel Sub−channel Sub−channel 2/6 3/7 4/8 Sub−channel 1...4 13 2 25 2’ 1 WH/RD RD Sensor circuit (−) 1 4 7 10 14 17 20 23 Case Case 8 11 21 24 14 S.G. 5...8 Case Cable shield Sub−channel 13 Excitation voltage (−) 1 WH/GN Measuring signal (+) 2 4 GN Excitation voltage (+) 15 25 1) Case 5 18 see page B-11 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-24 4.7.6 Amplifier: SG systems and rosettes on AP815i ML801B sub-channel 1 AP815i 2 1 2’ 14 SG sub-channel 5 SG 4/8 SG 3/7 SG 2/6 SG 1 Excitation voltage (−) 1 Sensor circuit (−) 14 Cable shielding Case sub-channel 2/6 sub-channel 3/7 1...4 13 1 25 4 Excitation voltage (+) 2 sub-channel 15 4/8 14 sub-channel 5...8 13 1 Measurement signal (+) 25 sub-channel 5 18 5 8 21 11 24 2 15 You can operate a maximum of eight 120 W SGs on a 5 V feed. Make sure that sensor probe 2’ on the SG system is as close as possible to the single strain gages and that the gaps between the single strain gages are small. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-25 If the gaps between the single strain gages cannot be kept small (for example two 90° rosettes at different places), they should be connected as follows: Amplifier: ML801B sub-channel 1 AP815i 2 2’ 1 SG 2 14 SG 1 sub-channel 1...4 13 1 Excitation voltage (−) Sensor circuit (−) 14 Cable shielding Case 1 Measurement signal (+) 4 Excitation voltage (+) 25 sub-channel 2 2 15 5 18 14 sub-channel 5 sub-channel 5...8 13 1 2 25 2’ SG 4 SG 3 Excitation voltage (−) 1 Sensor circuit (−) 14 Cable shielding Geh. 1 Measurement signal (+) 4 Excitation voltage (+) sub-channel 6 2 15 5 18 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-26 4.8 Torque flange T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2 4.8.1 Torque measurement Amplifier: ML60B Male connector 1 Md AP17 BK BL 2 3 RD 4 1 WH GR 1) 8 15 5 Supply voltage (18V ... 30V) 6 Measurement signal torque, frequency output (+) 12 Measurement signal torque, frequency output (−) 13 Cable shielding GN 9 Supply voltage (0V) YE 7/56 1 1) Case Calibration signal trigger (approx. 5V) 14 Ground 8 see page B-11 Connection cable K−T10F Option 5, Code V5, V6, W1, W2. Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey For connection of version T10F−KF1 see chapter 4.9 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers Amplifier: B-27 ML460 AP460i 7 6 8 5 9 10 4 1 2 3 Male connector1 Md 2 3 RD 4 1 WH YE 7/5 6 Measurement signal torque, frequency output (+) Measurement signal torque, frequency output (−) 1 2 Cable shielding 1) Case Ground 10 GN GR 1) see page B-11 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey For connection of version T10F−KF1 see chapter 4.9 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-28 AP460i Pin assignment LEMO) connector female Pin (Top view) 1 Frequency signal 1, Input a 2 Frequency signal 1, Input b 3 Frequency signal 2, Input a 4 Frequency signal 2, Input b 5 Zero index, Input a 6 Zero index, Input b 7 Transducer supply (0 V, 5 V, 8 V or 16 V, depending on jumper position, see page B-40) 8 Transducer identification (Dallas protocol) 9 Supply mass 10 Signal mass 7 6 9 10 8 5 4 1 2 Function 3 Connection: Symmetrical input signal (RS 422): Input a / Input b Asymmetrical input signal, bipolar: Input a (Signal mass at Input b) Asymmetrical input signal, unipolar: Input a (Signal mass at Pin 10, Input b must stay open) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.8.2 Amplifier: B-29 Rotation speed measurement (symmetrical signals) ML60B Male connector 2 n AP17 WH 6 7 GN 15 Measurement signal, rotation speed 0° (+) 12 Measurement signal, rotation speed 0° (−) 13 Measurement signal, rotation speed 90° (−) 14 Cable shielding 3 GR 1) 8 8 Ground 1 9 BK and BL RD 8 1 1) Measurement signal, rotation speed 90° (+) Case 15 see page B-11 Connection cable K−T10F Option 5, Code W1, W2. Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey For connection of version T10F−KF1 see chapter 4.9. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-30 Amplifier: ML460i AP460i 7 6 8 5 9 10 4 1 2 Male connector 2 n YE RD 8 1 WH 6 7 GN GR 10 1 Measurement signal, rotation speed, 0° (−) 2 Measurement signal, rotation speed, 90° (−) Cable shielding 1) 3 1) Ground Measurement signal, rotation speed, 0° (+) Measurement signal, rotation speed, 90° (+) 4 Case 3 see page B-11 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 3 Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.8.3 Amplifier: B-31 Rotation speed measurement (symmetrical signals) with reference signal ML60B Male connector 2 n AP17 YE 8 1 WH 6 7 3 4 GN BL BK GR see page B-11 15 12 Measurement signal, rotation speed 0° (−) 13 Measurement signal, rotation speed 90° (−) 14 1) Case. Reference signal (+) 2 Reference signal (−) 3 Measurement signal, rotation speed 90° (+) 5V (out) 1) 8 Measurement signal, rotation speed 0° (+) Cable shielding 2 9 8 Ground RD 1 15 11 Connection cable K−T10FS option 6, Code W5, W6 Wire colors: YE= yellow; RD= red; WH= white; GN= green; BL= blue; BK= black; GR= grey MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-32 Amplifier: ML460 AP460i 7 6 8 5 9 10 4 1 2 Male connector 2 n YE RD 8 1 WH 6 7 3 4 GN BK GR 10 1 Measurement signal, rotation speed, 0° (−) 2 Measurement signal, rotation speed, 90° (−) Cable shielding 1) 2 BL 1) Ground Measurement signal, rotation speedl, 0° (+) 4 Case Reference signal (+) 5 Reference signal (−) 6 Measurement signal, rotation speed, 90° (+) 3 see page B-11 Wire colors: YE= yellow; RD= red; WH= white; GN= green; BL= blue; BK= black; GR= grey MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 3 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-33 4.9 Torque transducers (T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1) 4.9.1 Torque measurement (square-wave excitation voltage) Amplifier: ML60B AP07 /1 (MD) A F B C G E D with T34FN only Transducer shaft Md 1) GN WH YE BK PK BL WH RD YE BN GN GR GR see page B-11 Zero operating voltage A Supply voltage preamplifier (−15V) B Supply voltage preamplifier (+15V) C Measurement signal, torque, 12V (5...30V) peak, 5...15kHz Cable shielding 1) D Case Rotor square-wave excitation voltage 54V/81V F Rotor square-wave excitation voltage 0V G Connection cable Kab 139A with male MS connector Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; PK= pink; BN= brown For connection of version T10F−SF1/SU2 see chapter 4.8 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-34 Amplifier: ML460 AP460i 7 6 8 5 9 10 4 1 2 with T34FN only Transducer shaft Md 1) GN WH WH RD YE Zero operating voltage Measurement signal, torque, 12V (5...30V) peak, 5...15kHz Cable shielding 1) 10 1 Case see page B-11 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey For connection of version T10F−SF1/SU2 see chapter 4.8 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 3 Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.9.2 Amplifier: B-35 Rotation speed measurement (asymmetrical signals) ML60B AP01i AP13i 1 9 8 15 AP03i AP07/1(N) A B C F G E D AP11i 6 1 2 3 5 4 with T34FN only WH Trans− ducer shaft n BK RD YE BL 1) WH GR Zero operating voltage Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5...30V) peak-to-peak (90o out-ofphase for angle of rotation detection) 8 A 1 D 4 Cable shielding 1) Case Case Case Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5 ...30V) peak-to-peak 12 G 6 15 see page B-11 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-36 Amplifier: ML460 AP460i 7 6 8 5 9 10 4 1 2 with T34FN only Trans− ducer shaft n WH WH BK RD YE BL 1) GR Zero operating voltage Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5...30V) peak−to−peak (90o outof-phase for angle of rotation detection) Cable shielding 1) Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5 ...30V) peak−to−peak 10 3 Case 1 see page B-11 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 3 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-37 4.10 Torque transducers (T1A, T4A/WA-S3, T5, TB1A) 4.10.1 Torque measurement (slip ring or direct cable connection) Amplifier: ML30B, ML55B, ML10B AP01i AP13i AP142) AP455i 1 9 8 15 AP03i A F B WH BK 2 BL RD 1 4 YE C G Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage (−) Excitation voltage (+) Measurement signal (−) Cable shielding 1) Case Sensor circuit (+) 13 F Sensor circuit (−) 12 G 6 1 2 3 5 4 8 A 1 5 B 2 6 C 3 15 D 4 Case 3 Feedback bridges for transducers in four-wire connection * E D AP11i Cas e 5 6 1) see page B-11 SG full bridge only *) For transducers in six-wire connection: see connection diagram Page B-14 2) Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-38 4.10.2 Amplifier: Rotation speed and angle of rotation measurement (T4WA-S3) ML60B AP01i AP13i 1 AP03i 9 A B 15 8 BK RD Transducer shaft n GR YE GN Zero operating voltage Supply voltage +5V Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5...30V) peak-to-peak 1) (90o out-of-phase for angle of rotation detection) Cable shield 2) Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5 ...30V) peak-to-peak 1) for AP17 nominal voltage 5V (3...20V) 2) see page B-11 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 AP11i C F G E D AP17 1 9 8 15 6 1 2 3 5 4 8 A 1 8 13 F 5 11 15 Case 12 D 4 15 Case Case Case G 6 12 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray Connecting ➝ Transducers Amplifier: B-39 ML460 AP460i 7 6 9 10 8 Attention: You can connect a maximum of 3 Transducer shafts T4WAS3 to each MGCplus device. 5 4 1 2 BK Zero operating voltage Jumper RD Transducer shaft n GR YE GN Supply voltage +5V 1) Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5...30V) peak−to−peak (90o out-of-phase for angle of rotation detection) Cable shielding 2) Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5 ...30V) peak to peak 1) Change jumper on 5V, see page B-40 2) see page B-11 3 9 10 7 3 Case 1 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Jumper (Factory setting 0 V) Connection board AP460i (Side view) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Supply voltage +5 V Supply voltage +8 V No function (only for special versions) No function (only for special versions) Supply voltage +16 V B-40 Connecting ➝ Transducers Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.10.3 Amplifier: B-41 Rotation speed measurement with inductive transducers ML460i AP460i 7 6 9 10 8 5 1 4 2 Measurement signal, rotation speed (+) 1 1 kW Umax = 30 V Measurement signal, rotation speed (−) 3 5 kW 5V 2 Inductive rotation speed measuring device (T−R coil) Please refer to the setup instructions for T−R coils on page E-38. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-42 4.11 Thermocouples Amplifier: ML01B AP09 AP409 AP809 + − + − 1 2 Extension wire Connect shield here Thermocouple − 2 − − + 1 + + Case Cas Case Case Cable shield e Extension wire MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Type 1 (+) 2 (−) J K T S Iron Nickel-chrome Copper Rhodium-platinum Cupro-nickel Nickel Cupro-nickel Platinum Connecting ➝ Transducers Amplifier: B-43 ML801B AP4091) AP809 + − + Miniature thermo-connector, uncompensated − Extension wire Thermocouple (−) − − (+) + + Extension wire Miniature thermo-connector (For compatible type see table) Type (+) J K T S Iron Cupro-nickel Nickel-chrome Nickel Copper Cupro-nickel Rhodium-platinum Platinum 1) (−) Maximum common-mode voltage about earth 50V; channels 1 to 4 electrically isolated from each other and system. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-44 4.12 Amplifier: DC voltage sources ML01B Maximum input voltage relative to earth ="12 V AP01i AP13i 1 9 8 15 AP03i A B C AP09 AP11i F G 6 1 2 3 E D 5 4 1 2 U (+) 8 Zero operating voltage3) 6 (−) Cable shield 1) A 1 1 2) C 3 15 D 2 4 Case Case Case Case 1) see page B-11 Connect the negative pole of the voltage source to one of the pins 22...25 on the 25-pin female connector Bu2 (earth pin) (in the case of the AP13i, only pin 25 can be used) 3) In the case of a potential-free DC voltage source, you must connect pin 15 to pin 6. 2) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers Amplifier: ML801B B-45 AP801 AP801S6 3 4 Maximum input voltage relative to earth = "50 V U (+) Case U (−) 2 1 (+) 1 (−) 2 Supply voltage 8 V/16 V*) 3 Supply voltage 0 V 4 Case *) Changeover supply voltage see page B-46 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-46 Supply voltage +16 V No function (for special versions only) Jumper No function (for special versions only) Supply voltage +8 V Connection board AP801S6 (side view) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers Amplifier: ML801B B-47 AP401 Sight of coupler socket 4x U (wiring side) 2 1 3 4 (+) Case. (−) Pin assignment 1 + In 2 not in use 3 not in use 4 − In MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-48 4.13 Amplifier: DC power source ML01B AP01i AP13i Maximum input voltage relative to earth = ±12 V (−) Zero operating voltage 1 9 8 15 AP03i A B C F G E D AP11i 6 1 2 3 5 4 6 C 3 5 B 2 Case Case I (+) Cable 1) shielding 1) see page B-11 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Case Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.14 Amplifier: B-49 Resistors, Pt10, 100, 1000 ML35B AP01i AP13i 1 9 8 15 AP03i A F B Three-wire connection R C G E D AP11i 1 2 3 6 5 4 Four-wire connection Excitation 5 B 2 Sensor circuit * 12 G 6 R Cable shielding 1) Case Case Case Sensor circuit 13 F 5 Excitation 6 C 3 * When connecting a two-wire sensor, wire bridges must be soldered into the male connector (between the sensor circuit and the excitation voltage) 1) see page B-11 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-50 Amplifier: ML801B AP835 1 4 2 3 Excitation 1 Sensor circuit 2 R Cable shielding 3 Excitation 4 Pt100 with four wire circuit only MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Case Sensor circuit Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.15 Amplifier: B-51 Frequency measurement without a direction of rotation signal ML60B AP01i AP13i AP17 1 9 8 15 AP03i A B Zero operating voltage Frequency generator / Pulse generator Cable shielding 1) Rotation speed/pulse signal 1 (frequency) 1) see page B-11 C F G E D AP11i 1 2 3 8 A 1 Case Case Case G 6 12 6 5 4 Case = housing In this operating mode, deactivate f2 signal evaluation (default: OFF), see page E-44. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-52 4.16 Amplifier: Frequency measurement with direction of rotation signal ML60B AP01i AP13i 1 9 8 15 AP03i A B *) see page B-11 E D 1 2 3 A Cable shielding 1) Case Case Case Speed/Impulse signal 1 (Frequency f1) 12 G 6 15 D 4 Rotation speed/pulse signal 1 (frequency f2) 1) F G 8 Zero operating voltage Frequency generator / Impulse generator C AP11i 6 5 4 1 Case = Housing F2 signal evaluation has been deactivated by default. For measurements with signal of direction, you must activate the f2 signal, see page E-44. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.17 Amplifer: B-53 Impulse counting ML60B AP01i AP13i 1 9 8 15 AP03i A B f2 f1 Industrial pulse generator Zero index Transducer error C F G E D AP11i AP460i 6 1 2 3 5 4 8 A 1 9 15 D 4 3 12 G 6 1 6 C 3 5 5 B 2 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-54 Amplifier: ML60B AP17 Zero index + Zero index − f1+ Industrial pulse generator f1− f2− f2+ Transducer error MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 1 9 8 15 AP460i 2 5 3 6 12 1 13 2 14 4 15 3 Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.18 B-55 Active and passive piezoelectric transducers Passive piezoelectric transducer Amplifier: ML10B, ML01B with AP08 Current-fed piezoelectric transducer AP08 Amplifier: ML10B, ML01B with AP18i/AP418i AP18i AP418 i Adjustment potentiometer for current feed Shield Piezoelectric transducer with preamplifier (with T-ID/ TEDS for AP418i) Piezoelectric transducer Input * * Shield Input * Use special coaxial cable see page E-66 Advice for connection boards AP08, AP18i, AP418i: If the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms or if the transducer connection cable is longer than 30 m, then this cable must be protected against high voltage with an additional, separately grounded shield. This can be achieved laying the cable in a metallic pipe or by using double shielded cables, where the external shield near by the connection board must be grounded (connect to ground or ground wire). For this purpose HBM recommend to use Triaxial cables. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-56 4.19 Piezoresistive transducers Amplifier: ML10B2) AP01i AP13i AP03i 1 9 8 15 A F B Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage (−) Excitation voltage (+) 2 1 4 Measurement signal (−) Cable shielding 1) 8 C G A E D AP11i 6 1 2 3 5 4 1 5 B 2 6 C 3 15 Case D 4 Case Case 3 1) Sensor circuit (+) 13 F 5 Sensor circuit (−) 12 G 6 see page B-11 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.20 B-57 Potentiometric transducers (single−channel) Amplifier: ML10B2) AP01i AP13i 1 9 8 15 AP03i A F B Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage (−) Excitation voltage (+) 2 8 C G A E D AP11i 6 1 2 3 5 4 1 5 B 2 6 C 3 1 Cable shielding 1) Case Case Case 3 1) see page B-11 2) You will need to set up Sensor circuit (+) 13 F 5 Sensor circuit (−) 12 G 6 and Hi under bridge type MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-58 4.21 Potentiometric transducers (Multi−channel) Amplifier: ML801B AP836 Sub−channels 1 2/6 3/7 4/8 14 Sub−channel 1...4 13 1/5 25 2 Measuring signal (+) 2 5 8 11 Excitation voltage (−) 1 4 7 10 Excitation voltage (+) 3 6 9 12 1 Cable shield 1) 3 Sub−channel 5...8 Case Case Case Case Sensor circuit (+) 16 19 22 25 Sensor circuit (−) 14 17 20 23 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray; BN= brown MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers 4.22 B-59 Connection via distributor board VT814i Single−S.G.; 3−wire connection with AP814 1−Kab156−3 2 Single−S.G.; 3−wire connection with AP814Bi 3 2 S.G. 1 RJ45 socket WH/GN Excitation voltage (+) 3 S.G. RD Measuring signal (+) 2 Cable shield 1’ 1−Kab156−3 RJ45 socket WH/GN Excitation voltage (−) 1 RD Cable shield Case WH/RD Excitation voltage (+) Measuring signal 1 1’ 2 Case WH/RD Excitation voltage (−) 1 Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown Connection diagram Measuring point Distributor board VT814 Connection board AP814Bi S.G. 1 1−Kab156−3 RJ45 1 D-Sub25 S.G. 2 D-Sub25 1−Kab263−3 1−AP814Bi 1−Kab156−3 2 S.G. 8 1−Kab156−3 8 A detailed connection diagram has been supplied with the distributor board. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting ➝ Transducers B-60 4.23 Connection via distributor board VT810/815i Single−S.G.; 4−wire connection 1−Kab156−3 2 WH/RD S.G. half bridge RJ45 socket Excitation voltage (−) 1−Kab156−3 1 2 2’ RD Sensor circuit (−) 2 1 RD Sensor circuit (−) 2 WH/RD Excitation voltage (−) 1 WH/GN Measuring signal (+) S.G. Cable shield Cable shield Case 1 WH/GN Measuring signal (+) 3 4 GN Excitation voltage (+) 6 4 3 1−Kab156−3 Measuring signal (−); only AP815i 6 WH/BN Excitation voltage (+) BN Sensor circuit (+) 7 8 2 1 3 RD Sensor circuit (−) 2 WH/RD Excitation voltage (−) 1 GN Measuring signal (−) 6 WH/BN Excitation voltage (+) 7 BN Sensor circuit (+) 4 3 RJ45 socket Measuring signal (+) Cable shield 8 Case Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown A detailed connection diagram has been supplied with the distributor board. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 3 Case GN S.G. full bridge WH/GN RJ45 socket Connecting ➝ Transducers B-61 Connection diagram Measuring point Distributor board VT810/815i Connection board AP810/815i D-Sub25 S.G. 1 1−Kab156−3 RJ45 1 D-Sub25 S.G. 2 1−Kab263−3 1−Kab156−3 2 D-Sub25 1−Kab263−3 1−AP810 1−AP815i S.G. 8 1−Kab156−3 8 A detailed connection diagram has been supplied with the distributor board. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-62 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5 Connecting the MGCsplit modules 5.1 Split-line-cable CAUTION Only original split-line connecting cable that has been made up and tested by HBM must be used for cabling MGCsplit systems. If other cable is used it will be impossible to guarantee error-free operation and we accept no responsibility for any resulting loss or damage. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-63 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.2 Power supply units NT650/NT651 1−NT650 ATTENTION The power supply units have fine-wire fuses. The fuses may only be replaced by the manufacturer’s service personnel. Connecting the power supply The power supply units NT650/NT651 supply the MGCsplit-modules with a direct voltage of 28 V. The input voltage range is 10 V ... 50 V (DC). The power supply units are not potentially isolated. The power supply unit NT650 is specially designed for test drives and can bridge voltage interruptions of up to 10 seconds 15 minutes after being switched on (if 10 measurement modules are connected). The buffer capacitors are automatically recharged as long as the power supply unit is switched on. Use a 4-wire cable for the supply line with a wire cross-section of 0.5 mm2. Always connect all 4 wires. Avoid high contact resistances (e.g. due to corroded plug connectors)! Voltage supply Matching plug (view of connection side) 4 1 3 2 Voltage supply (device plug POWER IN) Pin Function 1 Input voltage (10…50V DC) 2 Input voltage (10…50V DC) 3 Input voltage (0V DC) 4 Input voltage (0V DC) Device plug: G82BFC−T04MPH0−0000 Recommended cable jack: S32BFC−T04LPH0−6000 (suitable for crimp mounting and cable diameter 5.5 mm ... 6 mm) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-64 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 1−NT650 Input Output You can connect a maximum of 10 modules (1x SH400CP and 9x SH400 or SH650) or, if using a ABX22 display- and control panel, a maximum of 9 modules. If more MGCsplit-modules (up to 1x SH400CP, 16x SH400 or SH650 and 1x ABX22) are to be operated, you will need an additional power supply unit. Both power supply units should in this case be arranged directly behind one another. Connect the MGCsplit measuring system to the sockets ”SPLIT−LINE IN” and ”SPLIT−LINE OUT”. Only use the Split Line cable from HBM. You can connect the power supply unit at any point in the measuring system. Just interrupt the SPLIT−LINE and connect the power supply unit in between. Connection at the start of the system (before the SH400CP): Advantage: if there is a power failure, the communication processor CPxx receives a warning signal from the NT650 if the energy only suffices for another ca. 5 seconds. It can therefore finish the measurement in a defined manner. Connection in the middle (e.g. between two SH650 measurement modules): Advantage: Good power distribution (less losses in the supply lines). MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-65 Connecting Ý MGCsplit Split-Line-connections Matching plug (view of connection side) Pin 1 16 *) Function 1 Output voltage (28V DC) for MGCsplit supply 2 Output voltage (28V DC) for MGCsplit supply 3 Output voltage (0V DC) for MGCsplit supply 4 Output voltage (0V DC) for MGCsplit supply 5 −*) 6 −*) 7 −*) 8 −*) 9 −*) 10 −*) 11 −*) 12 −*) 13 Power Down Signal at CP module (NT650 only) 14 Earth potential MGCsplit 15 −*) 16 −*) Signal at these pins are looped through from SPLIT−LINE IN to SPLIT−LINE OUT. Device connector: G82B0C−T16QF00−0000 Recommended cable connector:S32B0C−T16MPFG0−7500 (suitable for crimp mounting and cable diameter 7 mm ... 7.5 mm) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-66 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 1−NT650 CAN-connections Pin CANinput (**) Function 1 CAN signal (Low) 2 CAN earth 3 Input for ext. CAN supply voltage (**) 4 CAN signal (High) 5 Digital input for remote control of NT650/NT651 6 Ground reference of digital input NT_ON Currently not required Device connector: G82BAC−T06QPH00−0000 Recommended cable connector:S32BAC−T06MPH0−6000 (suitable for crimp mounting and cable diameter 5.5 mm ... 6 mm) Matching plug (view of connection side) 5 1 6 2 4 3 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 With pin 5 you can switch the power supply unit on or off remotely. The mains switch must be in the position ”REMOTE”. A change in the level from over 3V to under 1V or vice versa causes switching, either from ”OFF” to ”ON” or from ”ON” to ”OFF”. The CAN bus is connected to pins 1 and 4, the earth may also be required. A CAN terminating resistor is not present in the power supply unit, if necessary you must add one externally. Switching on and off is implemented with two predefined messages (see Page B-67). The galvanically isolated digital input NT_ON is related to GNDM. GNDM can if necessary be connected with pin 6 (0V_IN). B-67 Connecting Ý MGCsplit Switch settings Switch setting Significance (with connected supply) ON The power supply unit is switched on, connected MGCsplit measuring systems are supplied with 28 V DC. (*) OFF The power supply unit is switched off, connected MGCsplit measuring systems are not supplied. (*) REMOTE a) Directly after switching from switch position OFF or after deactivation via CAN or digital input: The power supply unit is switched off, green LED flashes every 2s, connected MGCsplit-measuring system is only supplied when it is activated via the CAN or digital input. b) After activation via CAN or digital input: The power supply unit is switched on, green LED lights up, connected MGCsplit measuring systems are supplied with 28 V DC. (*) (*) NT650 only: The buffer capacitors are automatically recharged when necessary (additional power consumption up to ca. 8W). Manual on/off switching Turn the ”POWER” switch to the ”ON” or ”OFF” position. Remote on/off switching In the switch position ”REMOTE”, you can switch the power supply unit on/off via the CAN bus. Standard CAN is supported as per ISO11898 (Transceiver PCA82C251). A switch on and switch off message are defined. CAN-message for switching on/off: CAN-parameter Significance Baud Rate 250 kBit/s ID 0x83 DLC 2 Data switch on message 0x79, 0x78 Data switch off message 0x79, 0x70 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-68 Connecting Ý MGCsplit Ensure that a terminating resistor (120 Ohm) is present on both ends of the CAN bus. The listed CAN parameters are preset but can be adapted by HBM on request. Remote control via digital input In the switch position ”REMOTE”, the power supply unit can be switched on/off via a galvanically isolated digital input. Switching on/off is flank controlled, i.e. switching occurs when a flank is detected, either from ”OFF” to ”ON” or from ”ON” to ”OFF”. A flank is detected when the actual level of the signal ”NT_ON” changes from < 1V to > 3V (rising flank) or from > 3V to < 1V (falling flank). Remote control via CAN and digital input Both variants can be combined, e.g. switching on via CAN switch on message, switching off with rising or falling flank at the digital input. Bridging of voltage failures (NT650 only): The power supply unit NT650 is equipped with so-called ”buffer capacitors” which are fully loaded within 15 minutes of the supply voltage being connected. If the power fails (e.g. during the vehicle starting procedure), the power supply unit is supplied by these capacitors. A connected MGCsplit system with maximum modules can be supplied for at least 10 seconds, correspondingly longer if less modules are connected. If a CP module is directly connected to the Split Line output and the capacitor feed is active, then the CP module will receive a warning signal (PDWN_CP based on GNDD) ca. 5 seconds before the buffer energy is exhausted and can therefore end a current measurement data recording in a defined manner. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting Ý MGCsplit B-69 Once the input voltage is again available, discharged buffer capacitors are recharged, regardless of the NT650 switch position. Recharging can take up to 15 minutes if the buffer capacitors are fully discharged. A drop in capacitor voltage through self-discharge is also detected and compensated for by cyclical recharging. However, this requires that the NT650 is continually supplied with voltage. In order to achieve correct switching from external supply to capacitor supply, the supply lines must be as short and as low impedance as possible. Too many or poor plug connections can also affect the bridging function due to transition impedance. This must be taken into account when using numerous modules and low supply voltages. Operating states and errors, LED displays: Two LEDs are located on the front panel, these can display various operating states and errors. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-70 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 1−NT650 Operating and error status display via status LEDs: POWER STATUS (green LED) ERROR STATUS (Red LED) Significance Operating states Green LED Red LED MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 ON OFF Switch setting: ON or REMOTE, NT65x ON, normal operation, no error OFF OFF a) NT65x not supplied b) Switch position OFF, NT65x OFF, normal operation, no error Flashes every 2s OFF Switch position REMOTE, NT65x OFF, normal operation, no error Error states ON Flashes once per second NT650 only: Switch position ON or REMOTE, NT650 ON, supply voltage failure, power supply unit operation via buffer capacitors. Error rectification: Restore correct supply. ON Flashes twice per second NT650 only: Switch position ON or REMOTE, NT650 ON, voltage supply failure, power supply unit operation via buffer capacitors which are already discharged to ca. 15 − 20% of their initial energy level. Error rectification: Restore correct supply. OFF ON a) Switch position ON or REMOTE, active NT65x is switched off due to excess temperature. Error rectification: Switch to OFF, check load and allow device to cool, switch NT65x back on. b) Switch position ON or REMOTE, NT65x switched off due to overload (e.g. short circuit). Error rectification: Switch to OFF, rectify overload, switch NT65x back on. B-71 Connecting Ý MGCsplit Schematic circuit diagram of battery cable RL RK UBat RL RL Iin = Pin Umin NT650 SH400CP Umin Pin RK Terminal RL Cable Equation for minimum battery voltage calculation ǒ U Bat U min 2 R K 2 l Ǔ P R ȀL in 2 U min Example: Umin = 10V, Pin = 100W RK = 20mW (estimated transition resistances of terminals and plug connectors) R ȀL = 24mW/m (cable resistance with cable cross-section of 0.75mm2) l = 3m (cable length) UBat 11.12V ATTENTION Keep the cable short and avoid unnecessary transition resistances to keep the voltage drop as small as possible. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-72 Connecting Ý MGCsplit Battery voltage [V] Minimum required battery voltage UBat [V] Cable length [m] MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-73 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.3 Amplifier modules and connection boards in the 1−SH400 enclosure 5.3.1 Amplifier modules that can be connected The following amplifier modules from the MGCplus system can be used in the MGCsplit system (with effect from hardware version 1.31 and higher): Amplifier module Software version ML01B P5.33 ML10B P5.33 ML30B P5.33 ML35B P5.33 ML50B P5.33 ML55B P5.33 ML55BS6 P5.33 ML60B P5.20 ML70B P1.33 ML71B P1.80 ML71S6 P1.28 ML77B P2.02 ML78B P1.53 ML460 P1.13 ML801B P5.18 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-74 5.3.2 Connecting Ý MGCsplit Connection boards You can use any connection board from the MGCplus system. In the case of the transducer excitation the following special features apply: AP17 The torque transducers must be energized by means of an external power supply (except for T10F−SF1 and SU2). AP460i The transducer excitation (DC) may be adjusted to 5 V, 8 V, 16 V. Maximum current per connection board is 50 mA. AP801S6 The transducer excitation may be 8 V or 16 V. Maximum output current is 50 mA. Note In the event of higher loads the module concerned may be automatically shut down. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-75 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.4 Connecting the MGCsplit modules 1−SH400CP ABX22A external display and control panel Input Output Suitable connector Connection end view 1 16 *) Pin Input Output 1 Power supply 24 − 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 24 − 32 V DC (typically 28 V) 2 Power supply 24 − 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 24 − 32 V DC (typically 28 V) 3 Power supply 0 V Power supply 0 V 4 Power supply 0 V Power supply 0 V 5 Not in use Link1+ 6 Not in use Link1− 7 Not in use Link2+ 8 Not in use Link2− 9 SDA_out *) Rx_A 10 Not in use Rx_B *) Tx_A 11 SDA_in 12 Not in use Tx_B 13 ResIn*) ResOut 14 GND digital *) GND digital 15 SCL *) Sync_A 16 Not in use Sync_B I2C interface and reset are only necessary when using the NT650 power pack Device connectors: Recommended male plug: G82B0C−T16LFG0−0000 S32B0C−T16PFG0−7500 (suitable for crimp fit and cable diameters 7 mm to 7.5 mm) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-76 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.5 Inputs/outputs for measurement modules SH400/SH650 1−SH400 Input Output 1−SH650 Pin Input Output 1 Power supply 24 − 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 24 − 32 V DC (typically 28 V) 2 Power supply 24 − 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 24 − 32 V DC (typically 28 V) 3 Power supply 0 V Power supply 0 V 4 Power supply 0 V Power supply 0 V 5 Link1+ Link1+ 6 Link1− Link1− 7 Link2+ Link2+ 8 Link2− Link2− 9 Rx_A Rx_A 10 Rx_B Rx_B Tx_A 11 Tx_A 12 Tx_B Tx_B 13 ResIn ResOut 14 GND digital GND digital 15 Sync_A Sync_A 16 Sync_B Sync_B Input Device connectors: Recommended male plug: Output G82B0C−T16LFG0−0000 S32B0C−T16PFG0−7500 (suitable for crimp fit and cable diameters 7 mm to 7.5 mm) Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 16 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-77 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.6 AP409 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure 1−SH650−ML801B−409 1−SH650−ML801B−2x409 Pin Function 1 + Input 2 − Input Device connectors: Transducer connections AP409 GX0S0C−P020000−0002*) Recommended male plugs: SX0S0C−P020000−0002 (solder contacts, K-Type) S30S0C−T02PJD0−5000 (crimp contacts, gold) S30S0C−T02MJG0−5000 (solder contacts, gold) (suitable for cable diameters 4.5 mm to 5 mm) *) Contacts made of K-type thermal material, to avoid measuring errors by temperature gradients of the connector. Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 S 2 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-78 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.7 AP401 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure 1−SH650−ML801B−401 1−SH650−ML801B−2x401 5 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 Transducer connections AP401 Function 1 + Input 2 Not in use 3 Not in use 4 − Input Device connectors: G80S0C−T04LFD0−0000 Recommended male plug: S30S0C−T04MFD0−5000 (suitable for solder contacts and cable diameters 4.5 mm to 5 mm) Suitable connector (Connection end view) 2 1 3 Pin S 4 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-79 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.8 AP815i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure 1−SH650−ML801B−815 5 1 6 2 7 3 8 Transducer connections 4 Pin Half− and Full bridge function Quarter bridge function 1 Measurement signal (+) Measurement signal (+) 2 Excitation voltage (−) Excitation voltage (−) 3 Excitation voltage (+) Not in use 4 Measurement signal (−) Excitation voltage (+) 5 GND (inner shield) GND (inner shield) 6 Not in use Not in use 7 Not in use Not in use 8 Not in use Not in use 9 Sensor circuit (+) Not in use 10 Sensor circuit (−) Sensor circuit (−) Device connectors: G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000 Suitable connector (Connection end view) Recommended male plugs: S32B0C−T10PJD0−8000 (crimp contacts) 1 S32B0C−T10MJD0−8000 (solder contacts) 8 2 9 7 3 10 6 4 5 (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) See also connection diagrams SG full bridges with AP810/AP815i in chapter 4.3 SG half bridges with AP810/AP815i in chapter 4.6 Single strain gage with AP815i in chapter 4.7.5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-80 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.9 AP460i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure 1−SH650−ML460−460 1 2 Transducer connections 3 4 Pin Function 1 Frequency signal 1, input a 2 Frequency signal 1, input b 3 Frequency signal 2, input a 4 Frequency signal 2, input b 5 Zero index, input a 6 Zero index, input b 7 Transducer supply 5V*) 8 Transducer identification 9 Transducer supply ground 10 Signal ground Device connectors: G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000 Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 8 2 9 7 3 10 6 4 Recommended male plugs: S32B0C−T10PJD0−8000 (crimp contacts) S32B0C−T10MJD0−8000 (solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) 5 *) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Maximum total current for all subchannels is 50 mA B-81 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.10 AP13i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure 1−SH650−ML55B−AP13i 1−SH650−ML10B−AP13i 1−SH650−ML30B−AP13i Digital inputs The following are valid for all single-channel connection boards: Digital inputs: (30° coded female connector) Digital outputs: (30° coded female connector) Analog outputs: (30° coded female connector) Transducers: (0° coded female connector) Digital inputs: Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 8 2 9 7 3 10 6 4 5 Pin Function 1 Ground (control inputs 1/2/3/4) 2 Ground (control inputs 5/6/7/8) 3 Control input 1 4 Control input 2 5 Control input 3 6 Control input 4 7 Control input 5 8 Control input 6 9 Control input 7 10 Control input 8 Device connectors: G82BAC−T10QJ00−0000 (30° coding) Recommended male plugs: S32BAC−T10PJD0−8000 (30° coding; crimp contacts) S32BAC−T10MJD0−8000 (30° coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-82 Connecting Ý MGCsplit AP13i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure Digital outputs: 1−SH650−ML55B−AP13i 1−SH650−ML10B−AP13i 1−SH650−ML30B−AP13i Digital outputs Pin Function 1 24 V (limit value 1/2) 2 24 V (limit value 3/4) 3 Ground (limit value 1/2) 4 Ground (limit value 3/4) 5 Limit value output 1 6 Limit value output 2 7 Limit value output 3 8 Limit value output 4 9 Warning 10 Not in use Device connectors: G82BAC−T10QJ00−0000 (30° coding) Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 8 2 9 7 3 10 6 4 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Recommended male plugs: S32BAC−T10PJD0−8000 (30° coding; crimp contacts) S32BAC−T10MJD0−8000 (30° coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) B-83 Connecting Ý MGCsplit AP13i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure Analog outputs: 1−SH650−ML55B−AP13i 1−SH650−ML10B−AP13i 1−SH650−ML30B−AP13i Analog outputs Pin Function 1 Analog ground 2 Voltage output Ua1 3 Not in use 4 Voltage output Ua2 5 Not in use 6 Current output Ia1 7 Not in use 8 Not in use 9 Not in use 10 Not in use Device connectors: G82BAC−T10QJ00−0000 (30° coding) Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 8 2 9 7 3 10 6 4 Recommended male plug: S32BAC−T10PJD0−8000 (30° coding; crimp contacts) S32BAC−T10MJD0−8000 (30° coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-84 Connecting Ý MGCsplit AP13i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure Transducers: 1−SH650−ML55B−AP13i 1−SH650−ML10B−AP13i 1−SH650−ML30B−AP13i Transducer connection Pin Function 1 Measurement signal (+) 2 Bridge excitation voltage (−) 3 Bridge excitation voltage (+) 4 Measurement signal (−) 5 GND 6 +16 V 7 −16 V 8 SDA 9 Sensor circuit (+) 10 Sensor circuit (−) Device connectors: G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000 (0° coding) Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 2 8 9 3 7 10 4 6 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Recommended male plugs: S32B0C−T10PJD0−8000 (0° coding; crimp contacts) S32B0C−T10MJD0−8000 (0° coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) B-85 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.11 AP17 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure 1−SH650−ML60B−AP17 Digital inputs The following are valid for all single−channel connection boards: Digital inputs: (30° coded female connector) Digital outputs: (30° coded female connector) Analog outputs: (30° coded female connector) Transducers: (0° coded female connector) Digital inputs Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 8 2 9 7 3 10 6 4 5 Pin Function 1 Ground (digital) 2 Control input 1 3 Control input 2 4 Control input 3 5 Control input 4 6 Control input 5 7 Control input 6 8 Control input 7 9 Control input 8 10 Not in use Device connectors: G82BAC−T10QJ00−0000 (30° coding) Recommended male plugs: S32BAC−T10PJD0−8000 (30° coding; crimp contacts) S32BAC−T10MJD0−8000 (30° coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-86 Connecting Ý MGCsplit AP17 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure Digital outputs 1−SH650−ML60B−AP17 Digital outputs Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 8 2 9 7 3 10 6 4 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Pin Function 1 Ground (digital) 2 Limit value output 1 3 Limit value output 2 4 Limit value output 3 5 Limit value output 4 6 Warning 7 Not in use 8 Not in use 9 Not in use 10 Not in use Device connectors: G82BAC−T10QJ00−0000 (30° coding) Recommended male plugs: S32BAC−T10PJD0−8000 (30° coding; crimp contacts) S32BAC−T10MJD0−8000 (30° coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) B-87 Connecting Ý MGCsplit AP17 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure Analog outputs 1−SH650−ML60B−AP17 Analog outputs Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 8 2 9 7 3 10 6 4 Pin Function 1 Analog ground to Vo1 2 Voltage output Vo1 (Ra>5 kOhm) 3 Analog ground to Vo2 4 Voltage output Vo2 (Ra>5 kOhm) 5 Analog ground to Vo1 / Io1 6 Vo1 / Io1 (20 mA); Ra<500 Ohm 7 Analog ground to Vo2 / Io2 8 Vo2 / Io2 (20 mA); Ra<500 Ohm 9 Not in use 10 Not in use Device connectors: G82BAC−T10QJ00−0000 (30° coding) Recommended male plugs: S32BAC−T10PJD0−8000 (30° coding; crimp contacts) S32BAC−T10MJD0−8000 (30° coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-88 Connecting Ý MGCsplit AP17 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure Transducers 1−SH650−ML60B−AP17 Transducer connection Suitable connector (Connection end view) 8 1 2 9 7 3 10 6 4 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Pin Function 1 Frequency signal 1, input a 2 Frequency signal 1, input b 3 Frequency signal 2, input a 4 Frequency signal 2, input b 5 Zero index, input a 6 Zero index, input b 7 Transducer supply +5 V*) 8 Transducer identification 9 Transducer supply ground 10 Signal ground Device connectors: G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000 (0° coding) Recommended male plugs: S32B0C−T10PJD0−8000 (0° coding; crimp contacts) S32B0C−T10MJD0−8000 (0° coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) *) Maximum output current is 50 mA. Please note that torque transducers cannot be fed from this supply. B-89 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.12 AP71 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure CAN connections 1 to 2 1−SH650−ML71B−AP71 1 CAN connections 2 Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 2 8 9 3 7 10 4 6 Pin Function 1 Not in use 2 CAN_L 3 CAN_GND 4 CAN_V+ 5 CAN_Shield 6 GND 7 CAN_H 8 Not in use 9 Not in use 10 Not in use Device connectors: G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000 (0° coding) Recommended male plugs: S32B0C−T10PJD0−8000 (0° coding; crimp contacts) S32B0C−T10MJD0−8000 (0° coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-90 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.13 AP78 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure The AP78 connection board has a total of ten analog outputs, two of which are looped through from the ML78B amplifier (VO1 and VO2). 1−SH650−ML78B−AP78 1 Connection 1 (analog output VO1) Analog outputs 2 3 4 Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 8 2 9 7 3 10 6 4 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Pin Function 1 GND to Vo1 2 Analog output from amplifier VO1 3 Not in use 4 Not in use 5 Not in use 6 Not in use 7 Not in use 8 Not in use 9 Not in use 10 Not in use Connection 2 (analog output VO2) Pin Function 1 GND to Vo2 2 Analog output from amplifier VO2 3 Not in use 4 Not in use 5 Not in use 6 Not in use 7 Not in use 8 Not in use 9 Not in use 10 Not in use B-91 Connecting Ý MGCsplit AP78 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure Connection 3 (analog outputs AO3 to AO6) 1−SH650−ML78B−AP78 1 2 3 Analog outputs 4 Pin Function 1 GND to AO3 2 Analog output AO3 3 GND to AO4 4 Analog output AO4 5 GND to AO5 6 Analog output AO5 7 GND to AO6 8 Analog output AO6 9 Not in use 10 Not in use Connection 4 (analog outputs AO7 to AO10) Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 2 8 9 3 7 10 4 6 5 Pin Function 1 GND to AO7 2 Analog output AO7 3 GND to AO8 4 Analog output AO8 5 GND to AO9 6 Analog output AO9 7 GND to AO10 8 Analog output AO10 9 Not in use 10 Not in use MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-92 Connecting Ý MGCsplit AP78 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure 1−SH650−ML78B−AP78 Device connectors: G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000 (0° coding) 1 Recommended male plugs: S32B0C−T10PJD0−8000 (0° coding; crimp contacts) S32B0C−T10MJD0−8000 (0° coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) 2 3 4 Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 2 8 9 3 7 10 4 6 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-93 Connecting Ý MGCsplit 5.14 AP75 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure Connection 1 (digital outputs 1 to 4, analog output 1) 1−SH650−ML78B−AP75 1 Digital outputs and analog outputs 2 3 4 Pin Function 1 GND OUT 2 OUT1 3 OUT2 4 OUT3 5 OUT4 6 24 V IN 7 Not in use 8 Not in use 9 GND VO1 10 VO1 Connection 2 (digital outputs 5 to 8, analog output 2) Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 8 Pin Function 1 GND OUT 2 OUT5 3 OUT6 2 9 7 4 OUT7 3 10 6 5 OUT8 6 24 V IN 7 Not in use 8 Not in use 9 GND VO2 10 VO2 4 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-94 Connecting Ý MGCsplit AP75 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure Connection 3 (digital inputs 1 to 4): 1−SH650−ML78B−AP75 1 2 3 Digital inputs 4 Pin Function 1 GND IN 2 IN1 3 IN2 4 IN3 5 IN4 6 Not in use 7 Not in use 8 Not in use 9 Not in use 10 Not in use Connection 4 (digital inputs 5 to 8): Suitable connector (Connection end view) 8 1 2 7 9 3 6 10 4 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Pin Function 1 GND IN 2 IN5 3 IN6 4 IN7 5 IN8 6 Not in use 7 Not in use 8 Not in use 9 Not in use 10 Not in use B-95 Connecting Ý MGCsplit AP75 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure Device connectors: G82BAC−T10QJ00−0000 (30° coding) 1−SH650−ML78B−AP75 1 Recommended male plugs: S32BAC−T10PJD0−8000 (30° coding; crimp contacts) S32BAC−T10MJD0−8000 (30° coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) 2 3 4 Suitable connector (Connection end view) 1 8 2 9 7 3 10 6 4 5 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-96 6 Connecting Ý CANHEAD Connecting CANHEAD modules The ML74 communication card and the AP74 connector plate are required for connecting CANHEAD modules to the MGCplus systems. A maximum of 12 modules per plug−in amplifier and 24 modules per MGCplus device can be connected, this amounts to a total of 240 measuring points (a maximum of 256 channels per CP22/CP42 can be managed in the device). For more information on connection and operation please refer to the “CANHEAD Measurement electronics” mounting instructions. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-97 Connecting Ý CANHEAD 6.1 ML74 communication module ML74 LED Labeling Color Meaning 1 CHAN. Yellow Channel has been selected 2 ERROR/ WARN. Red Error/Warning 3 Rx Yellow Receiving CAN protocol 4 Tx OVRN Yellow Red Transmitting CAN protocol Overrun 5 BUS−/ERR Red Bus error 6 CONFIG Yellow Configuring allocated CANHEADS 7 AP74 STATUS Yellow Off Red Voltage supply via AP74 No voltage supply via AP74 Error during voltage supply via AP74 8 SCAN Yellow Executing bus scan 9 − − − MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-98 6.2 Connecting Ý CANHEAD AP74 connection board AP74 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 LED color Meaning Green Normal state during operation Red Short circuit or overload None Voltage supply switched off B-99 ConnectingÝ Interfaces 7 Connecting the computer, PLC and printer The MGCplus can optionally be fitted with the following interfaces: Serial interfaces for computer port (CP22/CP42): • RS 232 C • USB • Ethernet MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-100 8 Connecting Ý Shunt resistor Connecting a shunt resistor For connection boards there also exists, as an optional solution, a facility for switching the shunt on. An off-the-shelf shunt on-switch is provided for the AP14 connection board. This compensating resistor creates a bridge mismatch of 1 mV/V. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-101 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes 9 Inputs, Outputs and remotes 9.1 Inputs and Outputs CP22/CP42 The CP22 communication processor provides one digital input and output each. The CP42 communication processor provides two digital inputs and outputs each. The digital In− and Outputs must be operated with an external feeding (12 V ... 24 V). CP42 RS 232 CARDBUS Inputs (0 V ... 24 V) The following functions can be assigned to the digital inputs: USB DEVICE • Start data acquisition by external trigger (only with CP42) • Print measured values (with direct connection via USB interface) • Formfeed USB HOST ETHERNET The MGCplus terminal commands can also be used to query the status of the inputs and outputs. YE SLAVE RD ERROR GN MASTER IN SYNC CTRL I/O OUT 24V 1 2 GND 1 2 OUT IN Outputs (0 V ... 24 V) The digital outputs are allocated to the “Disc full” function. If the remaining storage space on the PC card harddisk in the CP42 unit is lower than 1 MByte, the output will be set to high. No function is assigned to the digital outputs. The MGCplus terminal commands can be used to modify the status. Inputs and outputs MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-102 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes Wiring example for the ”Start Trigger” function at the CP42 control inputs CP42 COM NO NC CTRL I/O + − 24V DC MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 24V GND1 IN B-103 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes Wiring example for the ”Print measured values” function at the CP22 control inputs COM CP22 NO NC IN 24Vext GNDext CTRL I/O + − 24V DC MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-104 9.2 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes Analogue output on the front panel The front panel of a one-channel module includes a female BNC connector for analogue output signal VO1. (This female connector is for test purposes. The fixed wiring should always go through the connection boards, since the noise voltage is smaller here). NOTE Please note: the input resistance of the connected device must be greater than 1 MW. When connecting a coaxial cable to the analog output of the ML60B preamplifier module for use in Class B environments, acc. to EN55011 or EN55022 (residential premises, business and trade, and small businesses), a ferrite (Würth, art. No. 742 711 72 or similar) must be attached to the cable. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes 9.3 B-105 Connection boards AP01i...AP18i Connection boards for the amplifier channels are plugged in at the back of the desktop housing, respectively on the right-hand side of the wall-mounted housing. The female connector on these connection boards provide you not only with connection facilities for the transducer, but also with several output and control signals, depending on the chosen option. These are explained in greater detail in the following chapters. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-106 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes 9.3.1 Pin assignment AP01i/03i/05/08/09/11i/14/17/18i PIN 1 13 14 25 Bu 2 Outputs OUTPUT Function 1 Digital 2 Remote 1 Input 3 Remote 2 Input 4 Remote 3 Input 5 Remote 4 Input 6 Remote 5 Input 7 Remote 6 Input 8 Remote 7 Input 9 Remote 8 Input 10 VO2/IO2 (20 mA); Ro<500 Ω Output 11 VO1/IO1 (20 mA); Ro<500 Ω Output 12 VO2 (Ro>5 kΩ) Output 13 VO1 (Ro>5 kΩ) Output 16 Digital Input 17 Output of LIV1 Output 18 Output of LIV2 Output 19 Output of LIV3 Output 20 Output of LIV4 Output 21 Warning Output 22 to pin10 to pin 11 23 24 25 Table 9.1 Bu2 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Analogue to pin 12 to pin 13 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes B-107 Output pin assignments Analogue output • Pin 10 is only used if the connection board is fitted with the EM001 final stage module. This must be installed as described in chapter 9.3.2. The switch position determines whether the output signal is made available as a voltage signal or as a current signal. Vo= 0...10 V, Ro >500 W Io = 0...20 mA or +4...20 mA; Ro <500 W • Pin 11 is only used if the connection board is fitted with the EM001 final stage module. This must be installed as described in chapter 9.3.2. The switch position determines whether the output signal is made available as a voltage signal or as a current signal. Vo=0...10 V, Ro≥500 W Io=0...20 mA or +4...20 mA, Ro<500 W NOTE Connection boards AP08/14/17/18i may only be fitted with one final stage module. In this case pin 11 is used and pin 10 is left free. • On pin 12 you will find analogue output signal VO2. The connected load resistance must be greater than 5 kW. • On pin 13 you will find analogue output signal VO1 exactly as on the BNC female connector on the front panel. Signals S1 to S4 are to be assigned as required to outputs V01 (Bu2 and BNC) and V02 (Bu2 only). Bu2: Ro >5 kW BNC: Ro >1 MW MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-108 • Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes On pins 17 to 20 you will find the connection states for limit switches 1 to 4. Their connection states are indicated by two different HCMOS voltage levels: Positive logic: Level 0V: Limit switch OFF Level 5V: Limit switch ON • Pin 21 carries a level of 5 V (high level), which can be used as a warning signal. In the event of a fault − for example a break in the transducer cable − the output signal is set to 0 V (low). On the other hand, this signal is also set to zero during the autocalibration cycle (every 5 min., for approx.1 s). Remotes On pins 2 to 9 of female connector 2 you will find remotes Ctrl 1 to 8 for controlling certain of the amplifier’s functions. These remotes are active if they have been enabled via an AB22A/AB32 display and control panel, i.e. in REMOTE operating mode. The tasks assigned to these remotes can be freely selected. The available functions are shown in chapter F ”Additional functions” together with their descriptions. In the factory preset, the remotes are not defined. External triggering Remote 7 is used as an external trigger input. For AP13i (Remote contact 7) see page B-49. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-109 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes Additional notes on the AP17: Pin assignment of the input socket PIN *) Function I/O 1 Shield 2 Zero-Index (+) Input 3 Zero-Index (−) Input 4 Ground 5 Supply voltage transducer −16 V (max. 500 mA) *) Output 6 Supply voltage transducer +16 V (max. 500 mA) *) Output 7 no function 8 Ground 9 SDA for the XM001 external memory module Input 10 SLC for the XM001 external memory module Output 11 Supply voltage transducer 5 V (max. 300 mA) *) Output 12 F1+ rotation speed 0°, angle of rotation, torque, frequency Input 13 F1− rotation speed 0°, angle of rotation, torque, frequency Input 14 F2− rotation speed 90°, calibration signal trigger Input/Output 15 F2+ rotation speed 90°, calibration signal trigger Input/Output The data on current indicates the maximum continuous currents which are permissible on the AP17. There is no restriction on the number of connection boards per enclosure, but a maximum of four connection boards can be used for the transducer power supply (for instance 5 V/16 V for the T10F−SF1 torque flange). MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-110 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes When there are long cables (>100 m) and high frequencies (>200 kHz) it is necessary to switch on terminating resistances. For this purpose the AP17 motherboard has a triple DIP switch S2, which must be switched to the “ON” position. AP17 ON 3 2 1 Switch S2 Component layout AP17 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes B-111 AP02 Relay contacts Another possible option is to use RM001 relay modules in conjunction with the AP02 connection board (with or without front panel). Depending how the relay modules are fitted to this connection board, they are available to relay contacts Limit1/2 or Limit3/4. These signals are carried on 37-pin female connector Bu3 (see Table 9.2). MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-112 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes Function PIN 1 20 37 19 Bu 3 1 Analogue 2 Digital 29 +10 V excitation pot. LV 20 −10 V excitation pot. LV 36 HCMOS Limit1 6 HCMOS Limit2 17 HCMOS Limit3 10 HCMOS Limit4 37 Central contact 7 Normally open contact 19 Normally closed contact 8 Central contact 18 Normally open contact Explanations about the table: 9 Normally closed contact Control signal for relay modules 1 to 4: HCMOS Limit1...4 16 Central contact 11 Normally open contact 15 Normally closed contact 12 Central contact 14 Normally open contact 13 Normally closed contact 33 no function 32 no function 31 no function 30 no function 26 no function 25 no function 24 no function 23 no function Table 9.2 Bu3 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 >5kΩ Limit1 RM001 (BU404) Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 RM001 (BU403) Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes B-113 AP07/1 If you wish to take measurements with torque transducers in the T3..FN/FNA and T10F−KF1 series, you have AP07/1 connection board available. The AP07/1 has only one female connector for torque. Outputs torque, rotation speed, performance (scaled) The pin assignment for female connectors MD, N and P (scaled) is shown in Table 9.3. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-114 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes Function (MD, N, P scaled) PIN 1 13 14 25 Female connector MD, N, P scaled 1 Digital 2 Remote 1 3 Remote 2 4 Remote 3 5 Remote 4 6 Remote 5 7 Remote 6 8 Remote 7 9 Remote 8 10 Limit switch Limit1, normally open contact 11 Vo1= 10 V; Io1= 20 mA/+4...+20 mA 12 Voltage output Vo2 = 10 V; Ro>5 kΩ 13 Voltage output Vo1 = 10 V; Ro>5 kΩ 14 Limit switch Limit1, normally closed contact 15 Limit switch Limit1, central contact 17 Limit switch 1; status 18 Limit switch 2; status 19 Limit switch 3; status 20 Limit switch 4; status 21 Warning 22 Limit switch Limit2, normally closed contact 23 Limit switch Limit2, normally open contact 24 Limit switch Limit2, central contact 25 Zero operating voltage, analogue Table 9.3 Female connector MD, N, P MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 HCMOS 5 V logic B-115 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes The outputs torque, rotation speed and scaled performance can only be fitted with one final stage module each. The analogue output signal is carried on pin 11 if the final stage module is fitted. Sliding switches and DIP switches are used to make the choice between voltage output and current output. The switch positions are described in chapter 9.3.2. The relay contacts for limit switches Limit1 and Limit2 are available on pins 10, 14, 15 or 22, 23, 24 if the relay module is fitted. There is only provision for fitting with one relay module. Output multiplier The pin assignment for female connector P (unscaled) is shown in the table below. The analogue output signal is carried on pin 11 if the final stage module is fitted. There is only provision for this option. PIN Function (P unscaled) 1−10,12,14−21 no function 11 Vo1 = 10 V; Io1 = 20 mA/+4...+20 mA 13 Voltage output Vo1 = 10 V; Ro>5 kΩ MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-116 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes AP13i Input assignments (Pin-assignments for remote contact 1): PLC Output Ground (1) (14) External AP13i Remote contact Associated ground HBM AP13i connection board makes remote contacts and limit switch outputs, as well as the 24 V-level warning output, available for direct connection to I/Os on programmable logic controllers. Control I/Os are potential-segregated by optical coupler and arranged in a number of groups, each with its own grounding system. These groups are identified by shading in the AP13i connection diagram. Functions of remote contacts shown between brackets refer to the factory preset. You are free to allocate these functions to whichever remote contacts you please. In the case of the AP13i, the only available option is an EM001 final stage module. Output assignments (Pin-assignments for output of LIV1): CAUTION Input Ground Power supply 24V Output of LIV Ground 24V 0V External MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 HBM AP13i connection boards are specially adapted for ML30B or ML50B/55B amplifiers. Please do not interchange these amplifier types. B-117 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes Pin assignment for the AP13i: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Remote contact 1 Remote contact 2 Ground (Remote contacts 3/4) Remote contact 5 Remote contact 6 Ground (Remote contacts 7/8) 24V (Limit switch 1/2) Ground (Limit switch 1/2) 24V (Limit switch 3/4, warning) Ground (Limit switch 3/4, warning) Current output Io1 Voltage output Vo2 Voltage output Vo1 Ground (Remote contacts 1/2) Remote contact 3 Remote contact 4 Ground (Remote contacts 5/6) Remote contact 7 Remote contact 8 Output of LIV1 Output of LIV2 Output of LIV3 Output of LIV4 Warning Analogue earth 1 14 25 13 Bu 2 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-118 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes Remote contacts: On the remote contacts the logic in relation to HCMOS levels is reversed in the case of the other connection boards. Function Level 0 V Level 24 V ACAL Autocal ON Autocal OFF TARE taring starts on transition 0 V − 24 V CPV1/2 Peak value 1/2 is stored Peak value 1/2 is cleared from current value HLD1/2 Peak value stores 1/2 not frozen Contents of peak value stores 1/2 frozen ZERO Current measuring signal is set to zero on transition 0 V − 24 V REMT Remote control contacts inactive SHNT Shunt off Shunt on PRNT When printing is enabled the channel is taken into account When printing is enabled the channel is not taken into account CAL Remote control contacts active Input is switched to internal calibration source ZERO Input is switched to zero signal INV Polarity is switched over (ML60B only) PSEL1 PSEL2 PSEL3 PSEL4 REMT Remote control contacts inactive Remote control contacts active Remote control outputs: Function Level 0 V Level 24 V Limit switches Limit switches OFF Limit switches ON Warning Device not ready or error (e.g. overflow) No error MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-119 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes AP77 Profibus 1 5 The pin assignment of the 9-pin female D-Sub connector conforms to the Profibus standard. Pin 6 9 Function 1 − 2 − 3 RS485−B 4 RS485−RTS 5 GND 6 VCC 7 − 8 RS485−A 9 GND You can find more information in the Operating Manual “MGCplus Profibus Interface”. MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-120 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes 9.3.2 Installing the EM001 final stage module Output stage module EM001 1 The EM001 final stage module can only be used with connection boards without transducer recognition. For correct positioning on the connection boards’ mother board the EM001 final stage module has been marked with the numeral 1 on the bottom left corner and a triangle on the left side. These symbols have also been printed onto the mother board. After having inserted the final stage module, you have to select the switch and bridge positions according to the desired output signal (see tables). 1 Mother board MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-121 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes AP07/1 The AP07/1 has slots for one EM001 final stage module and one RM001 relay module. Output stage module EM001 The chart shows the arrangement on the motherboard. The final stage module is assigned to a sliding switch and a DIP switch. The switch position necessary for the output signal you require is shown in the following table. Relay module RM001*) Output signal 1 DIP switches 1 10 V 2 2 *) Switch Output P has no slot for RM001 1 20 mA 2 1 +4...20 mA 2 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-122 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes AP08/14/17/18 These connection boards are all equipped with a slot for an EM001. 2 EM001 The accompanying chart shows the motherboard layout for the AP08/17/18. 1 The accompanying chart shows the motherboard layout for the AP14. NOTE 1 EM001 2 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Pay careful attention to the name (numbering) on the switch. The deciding factor for the switch position in Table 9.4 is the numbering on the switch and not its location. B-123 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes This table shows the switch position necessary for the output signal you require. Output signal Switch DIP switches 1 10 V 2 1 20 mA 2 1 +4...20 mA 2 Table 9.4: AP08/14/17/18 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 B-124 Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes AP09 AP09 connection board can have two slots for final stage modules of the EM001 type. EM001 slot EM001 slot 1 1 2 2 for for 2 1 If these connection boards are ordered without final stage modules, they are supplied without slots. 1 The accompanying chart shows the arrangement on the motherboards. Each final stage module is assigned to a sliding switch and a DIP switch. The switch position necessary for the output signal you require is shown in the following table. 2 for 2 Output signal Switch for 1 1 10 V 2 1 20 mA 2 1 +4...20 mA 2 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 DIP switches C-1 C Commissioning MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 C-2 MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 Commissioning Ý Switching on 1 C-3 Commissioning This chapter shows you the necessary steps to take in order to make your measurement chain (amplifier system and transducer) ready for use. You will then be in a position to carry out a function test of all components. The various steps are deliberately explained in very general terms, without going into detail about specific transducers or amplifier plug-in modules. However, it is very easy to apply the description to your own measurement chain. In some instances − especially to do with connecting transducers − reference will be made to later chapters. We also warn about certain errors which can typically occur during commissioning. After initial commissioning and adapting the amplifier plug-in module to your transducer, you are in a position to get to know the other functions and facilities of the MGCplus amplifier system. • • • • Unpack the MGCplus. Check that the MGCplus is undamaged. Is the delivery complete? Compare the contents of packages with the accompanying documentation list. Is the documentation complete? MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 C-4 1.1 Commissioning Ý Switching on Devices in the desktop housing and rack frame • If you have not yet received your complete amplifier system, you should take note of the following points when putting the system together: − The amplifier plug-in units are plugged in at the front panel and the associated connection boards are plugged in at the back. It is important to ensure correct allocation during this step: − If using wide connection boards (8 divisions), you must plug these into slots 1, 3, 5 etc. Slots 2, 4, 6 etc. on the front panel must be left free or with fitted blank plates. • On safety grounds, all unused slots (amplifiers or connection boards) must be covered over with blank plates. • • • Check that all amplifiers and connection boards are firmly plugged in. Connect the device to the mains supply with the mains cable provided. Connect your transducer to the female connector provided on the connection board (reference BU01). If you use a cable you have made up yourself, please adhere to the pin assignment for your transducer as shown in chapter B. Please note the safety instructions on page A-3. MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 C-5 Commissioning Ý Switching on • Switch the device on with the POWER button on the front panel of the device (in the case of the MGCCompact 2-channel housing, there is a toggle switch on the back of the device). When the AB22A/AB32 is initialized (at which time all LEDs light up for a moment) it makes a note of the components that are present. MGCplus Start-up Switching on If no transducer is connected, an overflow is displayed. The opening display is followed in the standard version by a value display of the ”1 value” type (factory setting). Pressing the shift key takes you to the set-up mode, in which you can configure the system, the display, the amplifier and the additional functions. MGC Compact Back of the device NP05: Switching on MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 C-6 Commissioning Ý Switching on We recommend that you set up the language first if you require a language other than German. System Display Password Save/Recall Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time LANGUAGE Language: Deutsch↓ Deutsch English Francais MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 Amplifier Options D-1 D Functions and symbols on the AB22A/AB32 MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 D-2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-3 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Control elements 1 Control elements 1.1 AB22A control elements All settings on your device are carried out with the keys on the AB22A/AB32 display and control panel. Using the shift key (SET) you can select the ”Measure” or ”Set-up” operating modes. Function keys F1...F4 Effective in measurement mode and set-up mode Delete key Clears the last entries to input fields Help key Activates online help texts for certain functions Cancel (Escape) key Resets last entry in menus and selection fields; closes help texts Alphanumeric keypad For entering numbers, letters or special characters into the Power switch edit fields Display Channel selection keys Selecting the active channel Shift key Switches between measuring mode and set-up mode. Cursor keys Measuring mode: Cursor control Set-up mode: Moving through the menu Confirmation key Activates the settings that have been entered MGCplus with AB22A /AB32 D-4 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Control elements 1.2 AB32 control elements Display Channel selection keys Selecting the active channel Power switch Help key Activates online help for the active functions. Function keys Effective in measurement mode and set-up mode; freely assignable for measuring mode Shift key Switches between measuring mode and set-up mode. Delete key Clears the entire entry in edit fields Confirmation key Activates the settings that have been entered Alphanumeric keypad For entering numbers, letters or special characters into the edit fields in the display Cursor keys Measuring mode: Set-up mode: MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Select signal (Gross, Net, Peak values) Selecting display mode (one or multi-channel) Moving through the selection and set-up menus Cancel (Escape) key Resets the last entry in menus or selection fields and closes help texts. D-5 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Display 2 Display 2.1 The first display MGCplus Start-up When the power is switched on, a progressively moving horizontal bar is displayed to indicate that the device is initialising. The opening display is followed in the standard version by a value display of the ”1 value” type (factory setting). Pressing the shift key takes you to the set-up mode, in which you can configure the system, the display, the amplifier and the additional functions. We recommend that you set up the language first if you require a language other than German. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-6 2.2 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Display Display in measuring mode Display for ”1 value” type The chapter called ”Display” deals fully with setting up the various screen types. The following section gives you an overview of the factory preset display types. Channel name (freely definable) Output signal Gross Net Peak values Limit switches Gross B Channel Status line Function keys (in this example, in measuring mode, 1st level) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Status limit switch Measure Measure Measurement value Unit Number of the selected channel (maximum 16 or 16.8 in the case of multi-channel modules) D-7 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Display Display with ”3 values” type Gross Gross Use to go to the next type Gross Measure Gross Gross Gross Gross Gross Gross Display for ”6 values” type Use to go to the next type Measure 1−ML55B Gross Display for ”YT-Diagram” type Use to go to the next type Measure 1−ML55B 1−ML55B Gross Gross Display for ”XY-Diagram” type Use to go to the next type Measure Limit switches 1−Limit1 1−Limit2 1−Limit3 1−Limit4 Display for ”Status limit switch” type LIV−On LIV−Off LIV−On LIV−Off Use to go to the next type Measure DATA ACQUISITION SAMPLERATE: 50Hz PERIODS: 100 TIME: 00: 00: 00 Use 1 −4.0S to go to the next type 16.0S FILE NAME: MGCP0000.MEA Get DAQ1 Display for ”Data acquisition” type 120 MB FREE Acal MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-8 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Display Symbols in the display The status line tells you about the status of a measuring device at that instant: Gross B Channel Measure Status line Measure Measure, Zero, Calibrate Acal Amplifier input status Status display of parameter set memory Numbers 1...8 Number of the current parameter set S Factory setting X User-defined set-up; displayed when a parameter set has been modified / Read next/previous parameter set Acal Automatic calibration on (function ”Acal”) Computer interface is active Data transmission over link MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Display D-9 Status of limit switches. If the On level that has been set for a limit switch is exceeded, the number of the switch concerned is underlined in black in the display. Example: On level of limit switch 1 is exceeded Local Remote off Remote Remote on Channel Channel number of a one-channel module 1 Channel 3.2 Channel number of a multi-channel module Number of the sub-channel Slot number in the system enclosure MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-10 2.3 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Display Messages on the AB22A/AB32 The following messages may be displayed on devices fitted with a CP42 communications processor: Message in the display Cause Remedy CP42 hard disk full! The capacity of the PCMCIA hard disk has been exceeded. Install a new hard disk or delete data. Error configuring channels x, y, z! a) The measuring amplifier types x, y, z do not agree with the types in the configuration file (modules changed). Check the equipment of the MGCplus device. b) There is no amplifier plug-in module present. The following channels have been configured: x, y, z Information about a successful configuration of channels x, y, z − Wrong hard disk! The PCMCIA hard disk contains a file (Ident.txt) in which the Serial No. of a CP42 is stored. This Serial No. does not match the Serial No. of the existing CP42. Check the assignment of the CP42 hard disk, and if necessary delete file Ident.txt (see also Operating Manual “MGCplus Assistant; CP42 serial number”). Overflow The measuring range has been exceeded (Gross, Net or both). a) Check the values in the zero buffer and/or tare buffer. (In status mode the red “ERROR/WARN.” LED lights up on the front panel of the amplifier plug-in module). Calibration error (In status mode the red “ERROR/WARN.” LED lights up on the front panel of the amplifier plug-in module). b) Carry out taring or a zero balance. c) Increase the measuring range. a) No feedback circuits connected and Autocal has been triggered. a) Check the transducer connection, then trigger autocalibration. b) Connection board has been changed. b) Carry out a set-up. c) RAM/EEPROM error d) Check the transducer settings (transducer type, excitation voltage, output characteristics). d) Calibration curve not in order c) Carry out a set-up. (In status mode, the red “ERROR/WARN.” LED on the front panel of the amplifier module lights up) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-11 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode 3 AB22A/AB32 in set-up mode The set-ups for the MGCplus unit are subdivided into groups according to their function. Pressing the shift key takes you to the set-up dialogue. Ihe selection bar and the number of the channel, the settings will have an effect on, is displayed. Display in set-up mode Settings for channel: System Display System Display System-specific settings that in most cases are only carried out during the initial start-up or for a new measurement task. User-defined display settings such as the required method of representing values, function key assignment, or the specification of channel names. 3.2 ... Amplifier Options Amplifier Options Selection bar Amplifier set-ups for Additional set-ups for each channel, taking each individual into account such amplifier. things as transducer type, amplifier plug-in module or conditioning. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-12 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode Switch to the set-up dialogue by pressing the shift key . The lower part of the display is a selection bar showing the topics to which the function keys immediately below them (F1...F4) are assigned (selection level 1). You can set up your unit in various menus which you call up from the selection bar in the display. Depending on the function, you can call up to 4 menu levels (selection and setup levels). In the first two levels you select topics; you are in the selection levels. In the next levels you set up certain values or switch functions on/off. You are then in the setup levels. Example: Setting up a system password Selection level 1 Selection level 2 Password Password System Display Selection bar Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language System Pop-up menu Setup level 1 Password new User: Display Amp Password: Access: Set-up window System delete Setup level 2 chang Add e user set User: Display Amp Password: Access: Set-up window MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Operator OK Cancel D-13 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode 3.1 Press the shift key Calling up menus . At first only the selection bar is displayed. If you now press one of the function keys F1...F4, the corresponding pull-up menu appears above the topic concerned (in this example ”System”). Move the bright bar through the pull-up menu with the cursor keys to the required topic (in this case ”Language”) and press the confirmation key . You are now in the setup level for the selected topic. The current setup window can take you to other setup levels. Selection level 1 Selection bar Selection level 2 Pull-up menu Setup level 1 Selection window System Display Password Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time English↓ Amplifier Options Bright bar Deutsch English English Francais MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-14 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode 3.2 Quitting menus If you want to quit a menu level, press the shift key Result: You return to measuring mode or one of the function keys F1...F4 Result: You return to selection level 2 or (if present) the key symbol Cancel or Result: You return to the previous menu level OK Measuring mode 1−ML30B Gross Channel Selection level 1 Selection level 2 System Password Displa Password Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language System Setup level 1 Password Displa User: Password: Access: System .... new .... change .... set Add user Displa delete Setup level 2 User: .... Password: .... Access: Operator OK Before quitting a menu widow and returning to measuring mode, you are still able to save or clear the set-ups you have entered, or cancel your intention to quit the dialogue window. A security prompt is therefore displayed alongside. Save set-up? Yes No Cancel Cancel In this case the factory preset is ”Yes”. Confirm with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . D-15 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode 3.3 Channel selection in measuring mode There are two ways in which you can select a channel in measuring mode: 1. By using the channel selection keys . 2. By directly inputting the channel number using the alphanumeric keypad (recommended for multi-channel modules). Here are two examples of method 2: Example 1: Selecting a channel on a one-channel module • Press the numeric key for the desired channel (for example 7) • The indicator then displays the channel text box showing the channel number requested: Channel 7 • Confirm with . Example 2: Selecting a sub-channel on a multi-channel module • Press the numeric key for the required slot (for example 3) • The indicator then displays the channel text box showing the slot number requested: Channel 3 (If you then use • to confirm, the first sub-channel is automatically selected, which in this case is 3.1). Type in a point and then the required sub-channel number: Channel 3.2 • Confirm with . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-16 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode 3.4 Channel selection in set-up mode In most of the set-up windows on the AB22A/AB32, the column header shows the name of the currently selected set-up menu and the channel selected. Channel text box CHANNEL NAME Channel Channel name: 3.2 2−ML55B There are two ways in which you can select a channel in set-up mode: 1. By using the channel selection keys (select the channels one after another). 2. By entering the channel number in the channel text box. You have the option to skip directly from one channel to any other channel of your choice. • Press the cursor key • Type in the required channel number (for instance 3.2 in the case of a multi-channel module). • Confirm with . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 , to go to the channel text box in the column header. D-17 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode 3.5 Saving the set-ups All settings that you enter before the security prompt are temporarily stored in working memory (RAM) as soon as . The data are permanently saved as soon as you quit set-up you make an amendment and confirm it with mode and confirm the security prompt with ”Yes”. Amplifier Volatile memory (8h) RAM Factory settings EPROM save load EEPROM Permanent save parameter set 1...8 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-18 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode 3.6 Selection menus Example: Password Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language You select topics from the first two selection levels. You do this in the first level (menu bar) by pressing the corresponding function keys, and in the second level by selecting from pop-up menus. • Select and confirm in selection fields (pull-up menu) The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm the selection with Time MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-19 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode 3.7 Elements in the set-up window At set-up level you enter the parameters via set-up windows. The set-up windows contain dialogue boxes, of which there can be vier different types. SETUP WINDOW Activation fields Dialogue boxes • Selection field 1V Excitation 2.5V 5V Abs Gross Net Edit field User: Button Cancel Switching on or off in activation fields Example: Abs Gross Net The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm the selection with . A tick appears in the selected box (”activated”). Pressing the confirmation key again cancels the activated status. Channel-related activation fields Example: SELECT SIGNALS FOR PRINTOUT OK Cancel All channels All signals Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 LIV-Status MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-20 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode Multi-channel modules are identified by two points below the channel number (channel 8 in the example). If you to enable it, a new set-up window opens with select the activation field for a multi-channel module and use activation fields for the various sub-channels. Example: SELECT SIGNALS FOR PRINTOUT OK Cancel All channels All signals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 .. 8 9 10111213141516 Channel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 LIV-Status • 1 2 3 45 6 78 8. All OK Cancel Opening and selecting from selection fields Example: Excitation: 5V↓ Excitation: 1V 2.5V 5V The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. When you press the confirmation key to select your set-up and confirm with Use the cursor keys such fields are identified with a downward pointing arrow↓ . the selection field opens. . In the documentation (but not in the display) NOTE Doubleclick to edit the “Unit” selection field in the “Transducer” set−up window. Then, you can enter up to four characters (e.g. min−1, with −1 representing an individual character assigned to the button MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 ). D-21 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode w Edit fields You may input numbers or letters in the edit fields. In certain edit fields you can only enter numbers (e.g. Zero value), since it would serve no purpose to enter letters in such cases. Example: a) Edit field without contents User: The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm your input with Example: b) Edit field with contents An edit field with contents can be Zero point: . 0.000 − directly overwritten − partially edited − completely deleted with the clear key . Inputting numbers and letters The keys in the alphanumeric input field are assigned seven ways: 1 number, 3 capital letters, 3 small letters. On the first keystroke a number is displayed; further keystrokes produce letters. When entering letters one after another that are located on the same key, you must press the cursor key . For example: entering the letters ”FE”: Step 1 Step 2 4x The minus sign on the Step 3 1x 3x key can also be used as a separator in text boxes. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 D-22 Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode The special characters °, W, m have been assigned to button , in addition. The superscript numerals 2, 3, and the special character @ have been assigned to button The superscript numeral −1 has been assigned to button w , in addition. , in addition. Buttons Example: Cancel or change... The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm with . The button label is followed by three dots (change...) and a new set-up window is displayed when confirmation is given. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-1 E Measure MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ General Notes 1 E-3 General notes This chapter shows you the steps involved in taking a measurement with the MGCplus. At the beginning of each section an example explains the details specific to each transducer with regard to adapting the amplifier plug-in modules. Once the amplifier plug-in modules are matched you can proceed with taking measurements. For information on other functions such as limit switches or peak value stores, see chapter F ”Additional functions”. Steps in setting up the measurement chain 1 Settings specific to the transducer: bridge type, excitation voltage, sensitivity, k-factor. 2 Settings for conditioning: zero balance, zero offset, tare value, filter settings. 3 Settings specific to the display: unit, decimal places, scale range, step. 4 Settings for analogue output: gross, net, peak value, output characteristics. You can set up the zero point and measuring range in two ways, depending on the requirement: a) by inputting the given transducer characteristics b) by calibration with direct loading MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-4 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier 2 Basic measurement channel set-up The ”Amplifier” pull-up menu is adapted to the signal flow of a measurement chain and is used to balance the whole system. Basic unit (e.g. mV/V) Transducer Analogue output Amplifier (V) Display (User-specific unit e.g. kg) The following basic steps are needed to set up a measurement channel: 1. Select set-up mode with shift key TRANSDUCER CHANNEL1 Type SG full bridge 5V↓ Excitation kg ↓ Unit: mV/V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Zero pt: 2.0000 ... Nom. val.: 50.0000 ... measure... K-Factor: 3 Adjust amplifier 0.0000 ... . 2. If necessary: Set up the language you want for the menus in the system set-up (see chapter H; System → Language) 3. Settings specific to the transducer: ’Bridge type and excitation voltage measure ’Unit ’Characteristics (zero point and nominal value) 4. Adjust amplifier Having carried out these steps you will have completed the most essential settings and adjustments, and will be able to carry out simple measurements. The following steps are optional. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-5 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier CONDITIONING CHANNEL1 0.0000 ... V Zero reference: −>0<− 0.0000 ... V Zero offset: −>T<− 0.0000 ... V Tare: Disable zeroing: 3 Disable taring: 3 Bessel ↓V Low pass 100 ↓ Hz High pass Off ↓ DISPLAY CHANNEL1 kg ↓ Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −50.000 kg 50.000 kg to Step 1↓ ANALOGUE OUTPUTS CHANNEL1 Output Vo1: Gross ↓ Output Vo2: Net ↓ Output characteristics ppm V Point 1: 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 2: 100.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 5. Settings for conditioning: ’Zero balance (zero offset) ’Tare ’Filter 6. Setting up the display format ’Unit ’Decimal places ’Display range ’Step 7. Setting up analogue outputs ’Gross/Net/Peak value ’Output characteristics 8. Setting up additional functions (if necessary) ’Limit switches, Peak values ’Remote contacts, ... MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-6 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier 2.1 Adaptation to the transducer TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: 5V↓ kg ↓ mV/V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ... 2.0000 ... 3 Adjust amplifier 0.0000 ... Type Selection field for the transducer types which can be attached. The selection depends on the type of amplifier and connection board. SG full bridge measure... K-Factor: CHANNEL1 measure Excitation Selection field for available excitation voltages (not available with all amplifier types). The selection depends on the type of amplifier and connection board. You will find more hints in later chapters. Unit Selection field for the physical unit. The basic unit mV/V cannot be changed. Zero pt. Edit field for entering the zero point. The lefthand field refers to the physical unit and the righthand field to the basic unit. By activating the button labelled measure you can measure the current zero signal. The value in mV/V is then displayed in the righthand edit field. Nom.val. Edit fields for the nominal value. The lefthand field refers to the physical unit and the righthand field to the basic unit (you can find this nominal value on the identification plate for the transducer). measure... Button for opening the ”Two point calibration” set-up window, in which you can measure the characteristic points 1 and 2. Adjust amplifier Button for matching the amplifier to the inputs of zero point and nominal value. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-7 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier 2.1.1 Extended functions of the ML38B TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom. val.: CHANNEL1 SG full bridge Ex.Ftn... 5V↓ kg ↓ mV/V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ... 2.0000 ... measure... Nominal value Enter the rated value. The value can be found in the table for linear interpolation comparison (in the calibration certificate); if this is not available, enter the value for the maximum calibration stage with the corresponding arithmetic mean in electric units. measure Adjust amplifier NOTE 0.0000 ... K−factor: These values used for the rated value must not be changed after entering the coefficient of the polynomial curve! Polynomial curve Ex. Ftn... Active Standardized Coeffizients A0: A1: A2: A3: 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... OK C0: C1: C2: C3: 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Aktive Press the confirm key to activate the curve (a checkmark will appear in the activate field) Cancel Coefficients/Standardized The cubic polynomial curve is used to correct the signal of the transducer (in mV/V). The measured values are thereby adapted to the actual curve of the transducers. To do this, enter the coefficients A0, A1, A2 and A3 of the third order polynomial, which is described by the following equation: YPh = A3Yel3 + A2Yel2 + A1Yel + A0 YPh: Display in physical units with polynomial curve Yel: Measured value in electric units The coefficient values can be found in the transducer calibration certificate. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-8 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier The amplifier itself requires standardized coefficients (C0−C3) for value 1, the coefficients from the calibration certificate (A0−A3) are automatically converted before being transferred to the amplifier (also in the MGCplus assistant). Conversion: C A Rated value electrical unit (right input field) Rated value physical unit (left input field) Example: Enter the coefficients from a Force DKD calibration certificate from HBM. The following equivalencies apply: DKD calibration certificate Polynomial equation T A1 S A2 R A3 ATTENTION During calibration, the measured values must be entered as the electric unit (mV/V) without changing the read-out! MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-9 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier 2.2 TEDS transducer F-keys-level 1 1−ML30B Gross Channel measure −> 0 <− −> T <− −II− F-keys-level 2 Acal TEDS Unit ... TEDS (Transducer Electronic Data Sheet) is the designation for an electronic data sheet in the transducer. It is stored in an electronic module that is inseparably connected to the transducer. It can be located in the transducer housing, in the inseparable cable or connector plug. Many components in the MGCplus amplifier system are capable of reading the transducer information stored in the data sheet and to convert it into amplifier settings so that measurements can be started immediately. MGCplus supports TEDS-transducers that comply with the data protocol (One-Wire-Protocol) and data structure in the IEEE 1451.4 standard. This means that the same cables can be used as for transducers that do not have TEDS. Some MGCplus system connection plates, e.g. AP01i, also offer the possibility of inputting TEDS data signals to two separate pins (ground and TEDs data signal). Loading TEDS data into the amplifier In the default setting, the TEDS key F2 is in level 2 of the function keys. 1. Press it in measuring mode 2. Press the TEDS-key . . The actual amplifier will then be parameterised with the transducer settings from the TEDS chip if it supports this functionality. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-10 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier TEDS supports the following combinations of single-channel amplifiers with corresponding connection plates as per IEEE 1451.4. All single-channel amplifier MLxxB are suitable for TEDS, however they must be equipped with up to date firmware. This firmware and the corresponding firmware download program can be downloaded free of charge from the HBM homepage (www.hbm.com/support/downloads). ML01B ML10B TEDS ML50B ML55B ML55BS6 ML60B ϑ nR ϑ 1,4,5,B1 1,4,5,B1 AP03i ML38B 1,4,5,B1 TEDS ML35B nR 1,4,5,B1 AP01i ML30B T3...T10 AP07/1 min−1 T4WA AP08 AP09 TEDS min−1 T4WA nR ϑ 1,4,5,B1 1,4,5,B1 AP13i ϑ 1,4,5,B1 TEDS 1,4,5,B1 AP12 T3...T10 nR T3...T10 ϑ 1,4,5,B1 1,4,5,B1 AP11i nR AP14 TEDS AP17 AP18i MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 T10F(S) E-11 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier The following amplifier – connection plate combinations are TEDS capable for multi-channel amplifiers. ML801B ML455 ML460 TEDS AP401 AP402i (1) TEDS TEDS TEDS AP409 AP418i AP455i AP455iS6 AP460i AP801 AP801S6 TEDS TEDS TEDS AP809 AP810i (2) AP814Bi AP815i TEDS AP835 AP836i (2) (1) (2) available from December 2005 available from October 2005 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-12 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier Legends Voltage SG (resistance)-half bridge Current SG (resistance)-quarter bridge Passive piezo-electric transducer Inductive half bridge Current-fed piezo-electric transducer Pulse counter/frequency T3...T10 Torque/speed T3..., T10 Potentiometer 200Ω − 5000Ω 1,4,5,B1 Torque T1, T4, T5, TB1 LVDT Inductive full bridge nR ϑ SG (resistance)-full bridge Piezoresistive transducer MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Thermo-resistors PT100, PT 1000 Thermocouples min−1 T4WA T4WA speed E-13 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier 2.3 CONDITIONING Signal conditioning CHANNEL1 0.0000 ... V Zero reference: −>0<− 0.0000 ... V Zero offset: −>T<− 0.0000 ... V Tare: 3 Disable zeroing: Disable taring: 3 Bessel ↓V Low pass 100 ↓ Hz High pass Off ↓ Zero reference Amount by which the relative zero point is offset in relation to the absolute zero. Example: A displacement transducer (nominal displacement ±20 mm) is intended to be measured from an engine seating and is fastened at a height of 1 m above. The display is intended to show the displacement as an absolute value. Displacement transducer ±20mm CONDITIONING Relative zero point CHANNEL1 1000.00 mm Zero reference: 0.0000 ... mm −>0<− Zero offset: 0.0000 ... mm −>T<− Tare: Disable zeroing: 3 Disable taring: 3 Bessel ↓V Low pass 100 ↓ Hz High pass Off ↓ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ Zero reference=1000mm Absolute zero point Engine seating Zero offset By activating the button labelled −>0<− you trigger zero balancing. If the value of the zero offset is known, you can input it directly in the edit field. Zero balancing affects how the gross value is displayed. Tare By activating the button labelled −>T<− you trigger taring. If the tare value is known, you can input it directly in the edit field. Taring affects how the gross value is displayed. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-14 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier Disable zero/Disable tare You can disable Zero Balance and/or Taring. Disabling applies to all triggering mechanisms (F-keys, remote contacts, software). The following brief example will make clear the difference between zero balancing and taring: Container Platform ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ Load cells Action Platform 55 kg −>0<− Container 6 kg Component 1 7 kg Component 2 8 kg MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 −>0<− −>T<− − A platform which stands on three load cells is to be used for weighing a container. Two different components are tipped into the container one after the other, and the weight of each is to be displayed (net). The table shows the status before and after zero balancing and taring are triggered. Set-up window Display Zero offset Tare 55 kg 0 61 kg 61 kg 61 kg 0 7 kg 15 kg Gross Net before 55 kg before 55 kg after 0 kg after 0 kg before 6 kg before 6 kg after 0 kg after 0 kg before 7 kg before 7 kg after 7 kg after 0 kg 15 kg (total contents of container) 8 kg (component 2 only) E-15 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier Impulse response Low pass Low-pass filters are used to suppress unwanted high-frequency interference above a defined cut-off frequency. Amplitude response, phase delay and impulse response are dependent on the filter characteristics. You can choose between the Butterworth characteristic and the Bessel characteristic. Impulse response The Butterworth characteristic exhibits a linear amplitude response which then falls away steeply above the cut-off frequency. There is an overshoot of approx. 10 %. The Bessel characteristic exhibits an impulse response with very little (<1 %) or no overshooting. The amplitude response falls away less steeply. High pass High-pass filters are used to suppress unwanted low-frequency interference below a defined cut-off frequency. You can use high-pass to suppress slow fluctuations such as those due to the influence of temperature and drift over time. The high-pass filter has no function when connected to resistance thermometers and thermocouples. NOTE In order for high-pass to function, the low-pass setting must not fall below the following limits: Bessel: ≥5 Hz Butterworth: ≥10 Hz MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-16 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier 2.4 Display Unit3 System Display DISPLAY Amplifier Options CHANNEL1 V↓ 3 Abs Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −10.000 V 10.000 V to Step 100 ↓ Selecting the required unit for the display. You may choose between the basic unit (mV/V), the user-specific unit (e.g. kg) and the unit for analogue output (V). The associated measured value is then displayed. You can achieve the same effect with the function ”Unit” (factory settings: F3/level 2; see also page G-23). Abs If the absolute display is activated ( 3 ), the display shows the signal at the amplifier input without any conditioning (such as zero offset or taring). Decimal places Number of decimal places. Display range Display range in the selected unit (automatically displayed). Step The step defines the size of the display increments. It refers to the last decimal place in the nominal value. Example: Nominal value 20 kg Decimal places 1 (20.0 kg) Step 1 means the display is in steps of 100 g Step 5 means the display is in steps of 500 g Decimal places 3 (20.000 kg) Step 1 means the display is in steps of 1 g Step 5 means the display is in steps of 5 g MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-17 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier 2.5 Analogue outputs (one-channel modules only) Output VO1 Select signal for analogue output 1 (BNC female connector front panel). System Display Amplifier Options Output VO2 Select signal for analogue output 2 (female connector Bu2 back of the device). Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch ANALOGUE OUTPUTS CHANNEL1 Output Vo1: Gross ↓ Output Vo2: Net ↓ Output characteristics ppm V Point 1: 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 2: 100.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Output characteristics The edit fields for calibration points 1 and 2 are automatically updated as soon as you go to the ”Transducer” input window and activate the . However, you can also change the button labelled Adjust amplifier characteristics of the analogue output by direct input. User-specific unit (e.g. ppm) Pnt.2 Gross Net Store1 Store2 OFF Pnt.1 Analogue output (V) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-18 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier Example: Minimum set-up for first measurement System Display Amplifier The transducer is a load cell with the following nominal data: Options Nominal load 50 kg Nominal sensitivity 2 mV/V Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 1. Select the channel you want using the channel selection keys by directly inputting the channel you want (see D-15). to return to set-up mode. 2. Use the shift key , use the cursor keys 3. Press the function key TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: K-Factor: ”Transducer” and confirm with 5V↓ kg ↓ 4. Use the cursor keys mV/V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ... 2.0000 ... 3 to select CHANNEL1 SG full bridge measure... or Adjust amplifier 0.0000 ... measure confirm with . to select ”Strain gage full bridge” and . 5. Use to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press select 5V. 6. Confirm with 7. Use . to go to the ”Unit” selection field. Press ”kg” and confirm with 8. Use . Select the unit . to go to the ”Zero pt.” edit field and enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field. Confirm with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 and . E-19 Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier 9. Unload the load cell. System Display Amplifier 10. Use to go to the button labelled measure... and confirm with (the measured value is displayed in the righthand edit field of ”Zero pt.”) Options 11. Use Confirm with Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 12. Use . to go to the righthand edit field (column mV/V) and enter the value ”2”. Confirm with 13. Use with TRANSDUCER to go to the ”Nom.val.” edit field and enter the value ”50”. . to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier . CHANNEL1 14. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: and confirm SG full bridge the security prompt with 5V↓ kg ↓ 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ... 2.0000 ... 3 . mV/V 0.0000 ... measure... K-Factor: and confirm measure Adjust amplifier 0.0000 ... MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-20 Measure Ý Adaptation to the transducer 3 Adaptation to the transducer 3.1 SG transducer SG transducers (HBM load cells, force transducers) are passive transducers with the following characteristics: • • • they must be fed with an excitation voltage (carrier frequency or DC voltage) they are SG full bridges The transducer has the following characteristic data: − Nominal load (e.g. 20kg) − Nominal sensitivity (e.g. 2mV/V) These values must be taken into account during adaptation to the amplifier. The standard set-up for excitation voltage UB in the case of an SG full bridge is 5V. If higher measuring ranges are required or if several transducers are connected in parallel, a lower excitation voltage must me selected. The individual values depend on the type of plug-in module used. Amplifier Limits of the measuring range (mV/V) UB=5 V UB=2.5 V UB=1 V ML10B ± 0.2...6.12 ± 0.4...12.24 ± 1.0...30.6 ML30B ± 0.1...3.06 ± 0.2...6.12 ± 0.5...15.3 ML38B ± 0.2...5.1 ± 0.4...10.2 − ML55B ± 0.1...3.06 ± 0.2...6.12 ± 0.5...15.3 With these measuring range limits, a voltage of 1 V to 10 V can be generated at the analogue output, depending on the setting. NOTE The specified full scale values are peak values and cannot be affected by adjusting the analogue output settings. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-21 Measure Ý Adaptation to the transducer 3.1.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics The following example explains the settings: Load cell with the following characteristics: nominal load 20 kg, excitation voltage 5 V, nominal sensitivity 2 mV/V System Display Amplifier Options Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch Measurement is to be to a maximum of 10 kg, i.e. the display range for the amplifier is ±10.00 kg (displayed to 2 decimal places). A value of 10 V is to be generated at the analogue output for a 10 kg load. 1. Select the channel you want using the channel selection keys by directly inputting the channel you want (for example 3.2 Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: 3. Press function key . SG full bridge 5V↓ kg ↓ 0.0000 ... 20.0000 ... 3 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with mV/V 0.0000 ... measure... K-Factor: CHANNEL1 ). to return to set-up mode. 2. Use the shift key TRANSDUCER or 2.0000 ... . measure 5. Use to select ”SG full bridge” and confirm with . Adjust amplifier 0.0000 ... to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press 6. Use select 5V. 7. Confirm with 8. Use . to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”kg” and confirm with 9. Use and . Select . to go to the ”Zero pt.” edit field and enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field. Confirm with . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-22 Measure Ý Adaptation to the transducer 10. Unload the load cell. System Display Amplifier Options 11. Use to go to the button labelled measure and confirm with (the measured value is displayed in the righthand edit field of ”Zero pt.”) 12. Enter the value ”20” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 13. Enter the value ”2” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field (below the unit mV/V). 14. Use with to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier and confirm . If you wish to make no further changes to the display and output characteristics, you may continue with point 24. . DISPLAY CHANNEL1 kg ↓ Unit Decimal places 2 ... Display range from −20.000 kg 20.000 kg to Step 1↓ 15. Use to return to the pull-up menu. 16. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 17. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with . 18. Select the value ”2” from the ”Step*)” selection field and confirm with . NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0 kg → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 100 g → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 500 g Input 10.000 kg → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 1 g → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 5 g MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-23 Measure Ý Adaptation to the transducer 19. Use to return to the pull-up menu. 20. Select ”Analogue outputs” from the pull-up menu and confirm with System Display Amplifier Options . 21. Select the required signal from the ”Output Vo1” selection field and Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch ANALOGUE OUTPUTS CHANNEL1 Output Vo1: Gross ↓ Output Vo2: Net ↓ Output characteristics kg V Point 1: 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 2: 10.0000 ... 10.0000 ... confirm with . 22. Select the required signal from the ”Output Vo2” selection field and confirm with . 23. Use to go to the ”Output characteristics Point 2” edit field, and enter the required value (left for the display, right for the analogue output). Confirm with . 24. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with and confirm . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-24 Measure Ý Adaptation to the transducer 3.1.2 Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer By transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a defined loading occurs. System Display Amplifier Options Example: A 4 kg calibration weight is used for calibrating a 10 kg load cell. NOTE Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch If zero point and nominal value are not modified (for instance in the case of recalibration), you may omit points 1−10. 1. Select the channel you want using the channel selection keys TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: by directly inputting the channel you want (for example 3.2 ). SG full bridge to return to set-up mode. 2. Use the shift key 5V↓ kg ↓ mV/V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 2.0000 ... measure... K-Factor: CHANNEL1 or measure 3. Press . Adjust amplifier 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with 0.0000 ... 3 5. Use Two point calibration kg mV/V 1st pt.: 0.0000 0.0021 Measure 2nd pt.: 4.0000 0.8032 Measure OK Cancel Shunt off to select ”SG full bridge” and confirm with 8. Use and . to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”kg” and confirm with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . 6. Use to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press select 5 V. 7. Confirm with . . . Select E-25 Measure Ý Adaptation to the transducer 9. Use to go to the ”Zero pt.” edit field and enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field. Confirm with 10. Use to go to the ”Nom.val.” edit field and enter the value ”10” in the lefthand edit field. Confirm with 11. Use with . to select the button labelled . and confirm Adjust amplifier . 12. Use the cursor keys and confirm with to select the button labelled measure... . 13. Unload the transducer. 14. Enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field of calibration 1st pt. and confirm with 15. Use cursor key to select the button labelled pt.” line and confirm with 16. Use cursor key . Measure in the ”1st . to select the lefthand edit field from the ”2nd pt.” line, enter the value ”4” and confirm with . 17. Load the transducer with the 4kg calibration weight. 18. Use cursor key to select key symbol Measure from the ”2nd pt.” line. If you now press measurement starts, and the current measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside the Measure button. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-26 Measure Ý Adaptation to the transducer 19. Use cursor key to select the ”OK” button and confirm with (the amplifier converts the nominal value to 10kg; the calibration data for 4kg stays unchanged). 20. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . and confirm E-27 Measure Ý Strain gages 3.2 Strain gages The variable to which reference is to be made for assessment of the material loading is the mechanical stress to which the material is exposed. A practical method for experimental determination of material stresses is based on strain gages. A detailed description of the strain gage technique may be found in the book ”An Introduction to the Technique of Measuring with Strain Gauges” (Author: Karl Hoffmann, published by HBM Darmstadt). The resistance of the SG is changed by straining. This change lies in the mW and mW range, which is why the Wheatstone bridge is used for measuring with great accuracy. e1 UA k e 4 UB e4 UB UB = bridge excitation voltage e2 e3 UA UA = bridge output voltage ML10B ML30B ML55B UA relative change of excitation voltage UB total strain e = e1−e2+e3−e4 k = gage sensitivity (k-factor) Fig.3.1: Wheatstone bridge MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-28 Measure Ý Strain gages With the MGCplus measurement system you can measure the strain of one strain gage or the total strain of several strain gages. The possible bridge circuits and the necessary device configuration are combined in the following table: bridge type Number of active SGs total strain Connection board Amplifier Quarter bridge 1 e AP14 ML10B, ML30B, ML55B 2 e = e1−e2 AP01i, AP03i, AP11i, AP13i, AP14 ML10B, ML55B e Half bridge e1 ML30B (with AP14 only) e2 4 Full bridge 1) e1 e4 e2 e3 e = e1−e2+e3−e4 AP01i, AP03i, AP11i, AP13i, AP14 ML10B, ML30B, ML55B, ML38B1) In connection with AP01i and AP03i The measurement system always measures the total strain (e) of the individual strain gages in the Wheatstone bridge. In practice individual strain gages are generally used for mechanical stress analysis. Due to the temperature compensation, the larger measuring signal, better cable resistance compensation and in some tension states the half bridge and the full bridge are used (e.g. for measuring on a bent rod). The most important characteristic of an SG is the k-factor (strain sensitivity). The MGCplus measurement system automatically switches over to strain measurement when a k-factor >0 is input. Scaling of the zero point and measuring range is carried out in mm/m. By changing the unit and input range, other physical variables (e.g. mechanical stress in N/mm2) can be derived. If zero is entered as the k-factor the system switches over to mV/V. Example: A strain of up to 1000 mm/m is to be measured with 120 W single strain gages. The k-factor of the SG is 2.05. The excitation voltage plays no part in this example. The setup for 2.5 V will be described. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-29 Measure Ý Strain gages 3.2.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics 1. Select the channel you want using the channel selection keys by directly inputting the channel you want (for example 3.2 System Display Amplifier or ). Options 2. Use the shift key . 3. Press Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch to return to set-up mode. 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 5. Select ”Type” in the pop-up menu. TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: SG−1/4−Bridge 120Ohm 4-wire 7. Use 2.5V↓ %↓ µm/m 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 100.000 ... 1000.000 ... measure... K-Factor: CHANNEL1 3 Adjust amplifier 2.0500 ... 6. From the type selection field, select ”SG-1/4-Bridge 120 Ohm 4-wire” and from the excitation selection field select ”2.5 V”. to select the ”K-Factor” edit field and enter the value ”2.05”. Press the confirmation key . measure Since the amplifier automatically changes the native unit from mV/V into µm/m once the k-factor is input, the physical unit plays no role in this example. The menu window shown here is based on the display using factory settings. 8. Use to go to the righthand ”Zero pt.” edit field and enter the value ”0”. Confirm with 9. Use to go to the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field and enter the value ”1000”. Confirm with 10. Use with . . to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier and confirm . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-30 Measure Ý Strain gages 11. Press . 12. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with System Display Amplifier . Options 13. Select µm/m from the selection field ”Unit” and confirm with Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 14. Use to go to the “Abs” activation field and disable the absolute display with the aid of . 15. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with DISPLAY CHANNEL1 µm/m ↓ Unit Abs Decimal places 1 ... Display range from −1000.000 µm/m 1000.000 µm/m to Step 1↓ . . 16. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and confirm with . NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 1000.0 µm/m → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 100 nm/m → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 500 nm/m Input 10.000 µm/m → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 1 nm/m → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 5 nm/m 17. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with and confirm . 18. Carry out a zero balance in no-load status (function key factory settings). MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 in Measure ➝ Inductive transducers 3.3 E-31 Inductive transducers Inductive transducers (HBM displacement transducers) are passive transducers with the following characteristics: • • • they must be fed with an excitation voltage (carrier frequency) they are inductive half bridges The transducer has the following characteristic data: − Nominal displacement (e.g. 20 mm) − Nominal sensitivity (e.g. 10 mV/V) The standard set-up for the excitation voltage UB in the case of inductive transducers is 2.5V. If higher measuring ranges are required or if several transducers are connected in parallel, a lower excitation voltage must me selected. The individual values depend on the type of plug-in module used. Amplifier Limits of the measuring range (mV/V) UB=5V UB=2.5V UB=1V ML50B − ± 6.0...183.6 ± 15.0...459.0 ML51B ± 0.1...3.06 − ± 0.5...15.3 ML55B ± 1.5...45.9 ± 3.0...91.8 ± 7.5...229.5 With these measuring range limits, a voltage of 1 V to 10 V can be generated at the analogue output, depending on the setting. NOTE The specified full scale values are peak values and cannot be affected by adjusting the analogue output settings. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Inductive transducers E-32 3.3.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics The following example explains the settings for a displacement transducer with the following characteristics: System Display Amplifier Options Nominal displacement 20 mm, excitation voltage 2.5 V, nominal value 10 mV/V. The display range from 15 mm shall correspond to an output of 10 V. 1. Select the channel you want using the channel selection keys Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch by directly inputting the channel you want (for example 3.2 2. Use Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: IND half bridge mV/V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 20.0000 ... 10.0000 ... ✓ Adjust amplifier measure . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use 2.5V↓ mm↓ measure... K-Factor: CHANNEL1 ). to return to set-up mode. 3. Press function key TRANSDUCER or to select ”IND half bridge” and confirm with 6. Use to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press select 2.5 V. 7. Confirm with . . and . 0.0000 ... 8. Use to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”mm” and confirm with 9. Use . to go to the ”Zero pt.” edit field and enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field. Confirm with . 10. Position the transducer in the zero position. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . Select Measure ➝ Inductive transducers System Display Amplifier Options Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch E-33 11. Use to go to the button labelled measure and confirm with (the measured value is displayed in the righthand edit field of ”Zero pt.”) 12. Enter the value ”20” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 13. Enter the value ”10” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field (below the unit mV/V). 14. Use with CHANNEL1 mm ↓ Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −20.000 mm 20.000 mm to Step 1↓ and confirm Adjust amplifier . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 20. . 15. Use DISPLAY to select the button labelled to return to the pull-up menu. 16. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 17. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with . 18. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and confirm with . NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0 mm → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 mm → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 mm Input 10.000 kg → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 mm → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 mm 19. Use to return to the pull-up menu. 20. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with and confirm . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Inductive transducers E-34 3.3.2 Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer By transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a defined displacement occurs System Display Amplifier Options Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch Example: A displacement transducer with a nominal displacement of 20 mm (nominal value 10 mV/V) is set with a gauging block of 10 mm, but the measuring range should be 15 mm. NOTE If zero point and nominal sensitivity are not modified (for instance in the case of recalibration), you may omit point 1.−12.. 1. Position the transducer in the zero position. TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: IND half bridge mm ↓ mV/V measure 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 20.0000 ... 10.0000 ... Adjust amplifier or by directly inputting the channel you want ). 3. Use 4. Press to return to set-up mode. . 5. Select ”Transducer” from the pop-up menu and confirm with 0.0000 ... ✓ 2. Use (for example 3.2 2.5V↓ measure... K-Factor: CHANNEL1 to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press 6. Use select 2.5 V. 7. Confirm with Two point calibration mm mV/V 1st pt.: 0.0000 0.0021 Measure 2nd pt.: 10.000 5.1032 Measure OK Cancel Shunt off 8. Use to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press . Select . to go to the ”Zero pt.” edit field and enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field. Confirm with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 and . the unit ”mm” and confirm with 9. Use . . Measure ➝ Inductive transducers System Display Amplifier Options E-35 10. Use to go to the button labelled measure and confirm with (the measured value is displayed in the righthand edit field of ”Zero pt.”) 11. Enter the value ”20” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field (below the unit ”mm”) and confirm with 12. Use Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch with to select the button labelled Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: measure... . 14. Position the transducer in the zero position. 15. Enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field of calibration point 1 and confirm with IND half bridge . 2.5V↓ mm ↓ 16. Use cursor key mV/V to select the button labelled Measure in the ”1st measure 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 20.0000 ... 10.0000 ... measure... K-Factor: to select the button labelled 13. Use the cursor keys CHANNEL1 and confirm Adjust amplifier . and confirm with TRANSDUCER . Adjust amplifier pt.” line and confirm with 17. Use cursor key . to select the lefthand edit field from the ”2nd pt.” 0.0000 ... ✓ line, enter the value ”10” and confirm with . 18. Position the gauging block below the probe tip of the displacement transducer. 19. Use cursor key Two point calibration mm mV/V 1st pt.: 0.0000 0.0021 Measure 2nd pt.: 10.000 5.1032 Measure OK Shunt off to select key symbol Measure from the ”2nd pt.” line. If you now press measurement starts, and the current measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside the Measure button. Cancel MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Inductive transducers E-36 20. Use to select the ”OK” button and confirm with (the amplifier converts the nominal value to 20mm; the calibration data for 10mm stays unchanged). System Display Amplifier Options 21. Use to return to the pull-up menu. 22. Select ”Analogue outputs” from the pull-up menu and confirm with Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch . 23. Select the gross signal from the ”Output Vo1” selection field and confirm with . 24. Select the required signal from the ”Output Vo2” selection field and confirm with ANALOGUE OUTPUTS CHANNEL1 Output Vo1: Gross ↓ Ouput Vo2: Net ↓ Output characteristics mm V Point 1: 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 2: 15.0000 ... 10.0000 ... . to go to the ”Output characteristics Pnt.2” edit field, and 25. Use enter the required value (”15” on the left for the display, ”10” on the right for the analogue output). Confirm with 26. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . . and confirm Measure Ý Torque transducers 3.4 E-37 Torque transducer Torque transducers with different measurement principles require different amplifier modules in the MGCplus-system and therefore different operating steps. The HBM torque transducers in the type series TB1A and TB2 work with SG full bridges. The procedure described in Section 3.1 (SG transducer) must be followed to adapt the torque channels (ML10B, ML30B, ML38, ML55B) of these transducers. The adaptation of the speed channels (ML60B/ML460) corresponds to the procedure described in this chapter. The HBM-torque transducers in type series T3_FNA and T10F−KF1 work with a frequency modulation procedure (TF ca. 10kHz corresponds to unloaded shaft, modulation through load 5kHz). You will need the connection plates AP07 or AP07/1 for processing measured values. The HBM-torque flanges in type series T10F/T10FS−SF1/SU2 and T10FM require connection plate AP17 for operation with the amplifier modules ML60B (one amplifier module each for torque and speed). When using the amplifier modules ML460 (multi-channel module) with the connection plates AP6401, the T10.. transducers must be powered externally. For calculating additional parameters, such as the rotation output (product of speed and torque), the freely programmable module ML70B is recommended for MGCplus. Another option is the use of ”online calculation channels” in the HBM measured data recording software catman. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-38 Measure Ý Torque transducers TRANSDUCER Type: Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom. val.: CHANNEL1 Special features of the ML460/AP460i: Ext.fct... The “Transducer” setup menu is expanded to include the “PWM” and “Duration” types. Freq.0..20kHz Direct Nm ↓ kHz 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 50.0000 ... measure... 5.0000 ... Adjust amplifier measure When inductive rotation speed transducers are connected (T-R coils) select from the setup menu “Type: Freq. 0 ...x kHz” and “Link: Integrating”. Freq.0..2kHz Freq.0..20kHz Freq.0..200kHz Freq.0..500kHz Pulse counter PWM Duration PWM (pulse width modulation) THigh When pulse width modulation is in use, the ratio of the pulse duration (THigh) to the time interval (T) is evaluated (duty ratio). The measuring range is 0 % ... 100 % duty ratio. Duration When pulse duration is in use only the absolute pulse duration (THigh) is evaluated. The measuring range is 0 ... 2500 ms. T MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-39 Measure Ý Torque transducers 3.4.1 Direct input of torque characteristics The following example explains the procedures for setting up the torque, rotation-speed and performance channels (valid for the T3_FNA type series): System Display Amplifier Options Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch Nominal torque of the shaft: Nominal sensitivity: Calibration characteristics: Nominal speed: 50 N⋅m 5 kHz 24.22 N⋅m 3000 rpm Rotation speed range to be displayed for the application: Display range for performance: 2000 rpm 10 kW 1. Use TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: CHANNEL1 Freq.0..20kHz Ext.fct... 5V↓ Nm ↓ (for example 3.2 2. Use ). to return to set-up mode. kHz 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 50.0000 ... 5.0000 ... measure... or by directly inputting the channel you want measure 3. Press function key . Adjust amplifier . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to select ”Freq.0..20 kHz” and confirm with 6. Use to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press select 5 V. Confirm with 7. Use . and . to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”N⋅m” and confirm with . Select . 8. Enter the value ”0” in the lefthand ”Zero pt.” edit field. 9. Enter the value ”10” in the righthand ”Zero pt.” edit field (or if the transducer is not under load, activate the button labelled measure ). MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-40 Measure Ý Torque transducers 10. Enter the value ”50” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 11. Enter the value ”5” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. System Display Amplifier Options 12. Use with to select the button labelled and confirm Adjust amplifier . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 17. . Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 13. Use to return to the pull-up menu. 14. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 15. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal DISPLAY CHANNEL1 Nm ↓ Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −50.000 Nm 50.000 Nm to Step 1↓ places” edit field and confirm with . 16. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and confirm with . 17. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with and confirm . *)NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 50.0 N⋅m → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 N⋅m → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 N⋅m Input 50.000 N⋅m → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 N⋅m → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 N⋅m MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-41 Measure Ý Torque transducers 3.4.2 Measuring with the built-in shunt System Display Amplifier NOTE Options If zero point and nominal torque are not modified (for instance in the case of recalibration), you may omit point 1.−9.. 1. Use Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch (for example 3.2 2. Use TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: or by directly inputting the channel you want CHANNEL1 ). to return to set-up mode. 3. Press function key . Freq.0..20kHz 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5V↓ Nm ↓ 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 50.0000 ... 5.0000 ... measure... . kHz measure 5. Use to select ”Freq.0..20kHz” and confirm with 6. Use to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press . Adjust amplifier select 5V. Confirm with 7. Use Nm kHz 1st pt.: 0.0000 10.056 Measure 2nd pt.: 24.220 2.4210 Measure OK . to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”N⋅m” and confirm with Two point calibration and . Select . Shunt on 8. Enter the value ”50” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. Cancel MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-42 System Measure Ý Torque transducers Display Amplifier Options 9. Use to select the ”Adjust amplifier” button and confirm with 10. Use to select the button labelled measure... and confirm with . 11. Unload the transducer. Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 12. Enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field of calibration point 1 and confirm with 13. Use cursor key . to select the button labelled pt.” line and confirm with TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: in the ”1st . CHANNEL1 14. Use Freq.0..20kHz 5V↓ Nm ↓ to go to the ”Shunt off” selection field, press select ”Shunt on”. Confirm with kHz 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 50.0000 ... 5.0000 ... measure... Measure and . measure 15. Use Adjust amplifier to select key symbol Measure from the ”2nd pt.” line. If you now press , measurement starts and the present value in kHz is displayed on the left next to the Measure key symbol. 16. Use to select the lefthand edit field in the ”2nd pt.” line. Enter the calibration characteristics ”24.22” and confirm with Two point calibration Nm kHz 1st pt.: 0.0000 0.0000 Measure 2nd pt.: 24.220 2.4210 Measure OK Shunt on 17. Use to select the key symbol ”OK” and confirm with (the amplifier converts the nominal value to 50 N⋅m; the calibration data for 25 N⋅m stays unchanged). Cancel 18. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . . E-43 Measure Ý Torque transducers 19. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with . 20. Go to the ”Step” selection field, choose the required step and confirm with . *)NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 50.0 N⋅m → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 N⋅m → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 N⋅m Input 50.000 N⋅m → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 N⋅m → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 N⋅m 21. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with and confirm . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-44 Measure Ý Torque transducers “Extended functions” set−up window for ML60B: Glitch filter System Display Amplifier Options If this filter has been switched on, interfering signals with pulse widths below 1.6 ms will be suppressed. LIV1 switch output The frequency signal F1 or the counter signal can be applied to the switching output of limit value switch 1 (see figure). Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch TRANSDUCER Typ: Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom. val.: LIV1 switch output states CHANNEL1 Freq.0..20kHz Ext.fct... 5V↓ Nm ↓ F1 kHz 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 50.0000 ... 5.0000 ... measure... measure 1.6 ms Adjust amplifier Extended functions ! Glitch filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms) Frequency quadrupling Evaluate F2 signal Zero index input active Transd. error input active LIV1 switch output: F1 Counter signal to LIV1 LIV2 switch output: Off ↓ OK Cancel Off F2 to LIV2 Direction of rotation to LIV2 Off F1 to GW1 F1 Counter signal to GW1 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Counter signal to LIV1 All extended functions that have not been mentioned here are insignificant for torque measurements and must be deactivated (default settings). E-45 Measure Ý Torque transducers 3.5 Adapting the rotation-speed channel The following calculation is needed for setting up the speed channel: Nominal speed: nA = 3000 rpm Number of impulses/revolution: i = 30 (see table below, type T30FNA) nA x i Impulse frequency 60 In this example: 3000 x 30 = 1500 Hz 60 i.e. a frequency of up to 1500Hz is to be measured. *) Torque transducer Number of impulses per revolution (two outputs shifted by 90o) T4WA 90 T30FNA 30 T32FNA 15 T34FNA 15 T10F 15...720*) See T10F documentation. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-46 Measure Ý Torque transducers 1. Use System Display Amplifier Options 3.2 or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example ). 2. Use the shift key Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch TRANSDUCER Typ: Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom. val.: 3. Press function key Freq.0..20kHz Ext.fct... Nm ↓ 5. Use to select ”Freq.0..2 kHz” and confirm with 6. Use to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press select 5 V. Confirm with . . and . kHz 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 50.0000 ... 5.0000 ... measure... . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with CHANNEL1 5V↓ to return to set-up mode. measure Adjust amplifier Extended functions Glitch filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms) Frequency quadrupling Evaluate F2 signal Zero index input active Transd. error input active 7. Use to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”rpm” and confirm with . Select . 8. Enter the value ”0” in the ”Zero pt.” edit field (lefthand column ”rpm” and righthand column ”kHz”). 9. Enter the value ”3000” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 10. Enter the value ”1.5” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. LIV1 switch output: Off ↓ LIV2 switch output: Off ↓ OK 11. Use to select the button labelled with and confirm . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 16. . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Adjust amplifier Cancel E-47 Measure Ý Torque transducers 12. Use to return to the pull-up menu. 13. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 14. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with . 15. Go to the ”Step” selection field, choose the required step and confirm with . *)NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 1000.0 rpm → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 rpm → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 rpm Input 1000.000 rpm → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 rpm → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 rpm 16. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with and confirm . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-48 Measure Ý Torque transducers “Extended functions” set−up window for ML60B: Glitch-Filter System Display Amplifier Options If this filter has been switched on, interfering signals with pulse widths below 1.6 ms will be suppressed. LIV1 switch output The frequency signal F1 or the counter signal can be applied to the switching output of limit value switch 1 (see figure). Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch TRANSDUCER Typ: Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom. val.: LIV1 switch output states CHANNEL1 Freq.0..20kHz Ext.fct... 5V↓ Nm ↓ F1 kHz 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 50.0000 ... 5.0000 ... measure... measure Adjust amplifier Extended functions ! Glitch Filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms) Frequency quadrupling Evaluate F2 signal Zero index input active Transd. error input active LIV1 switch output: F1 Counter signal to LIV1 LIV2 switch output: Off ↓ OK Cancel Off F2 to LIV2 Direction of rotation to GW2 Off F1 to LIV1 F1 Counter signal to LIV1 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Counter signal to LIV1 1 . 6 m s All extended functions that have not been mentioned here are insignificant for torque measurements and must be deactivated (default settings). E-49 Measure Ý Thermocouples 3.6 Thermocouples Thermocouples are active transducers. For measurements using thermocouples you need the ML01B amplifier plug-in module and the AP09 connection board. The AP09 has a built-in reference temperature measuring point. The amplifier plug-in module carries out cold-spot compensation and linearisation for type J, T, K and S thermocouples. With the ’Thermocouples’ operating mode and units °C or °F selected, the temperature will be displayed appropriately in the required unit. With Volt selected as the unit, scaling is carried out in accordance with the output voltage1). The following example explains the settings: Type K thermocouple, the temperature is to be displayed in °C , with a temperature of 50°C corresponding to an output signal of 0 V. The temperature of 70°C corresponds to an output signal of +10 V. Display (°C) 70 50 Nom.val. Upon switching to another thermocouple type, the values for the following functions are reset to their default values: Cut-off frequency; limit switches; peak values; unit of measure; zero balance −10 10 Amplifier Output signal (V) 1) If you wish to measure the output voltage of the thermocouple directly (without linearisation and cold-spot compensation), you must set up under ’75 mV’ operating mode. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-50 Measure Ý Thermocouples 3.6.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics 1. Use System Display Amplifier Options 3.2 2. Use Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: to return to set-up mode. . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with Thermocpl.K 5. Use to select ”Thermocpl.K” and confirm with 6. Use to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”°C” and confirm with °C 50.0000 ... 50.0000 ... 20.0000 ... 20.0000 ... measure... ). 3. Press function key CHANNEL1 no °C↓ or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example Adjust amplifier measure . . . Select . 7. Enter the value ”50” in the lefthand ”Zero pt.” edit field. 8. Enter the value ”20” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field (70°C−50°C=20°C). 9. Use with to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier and confirm . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 14. . 10. Use to return to the pull-up menu. 11. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . E-51 Measure Ý Thermocouples 12. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with . 13. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and confirm with . NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0°C → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1°C → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5°C Input 50.000°C → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001°C → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005°C 14. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with and confirm . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Current and voltage measurement E-52 3.7 Current and voltage measurement To measure current signals and voltage signals you need the ML01B amplifier plug-in module or the ML801B multichannel module with the AP801 connection board. The following example explains the set-ups: A torque transducer with integral amplifier delivers a maximum output signal of 3 V, corresponding to a nominal torque of 20 N⋅m. A display range of 20.000 N⋅m is to be set up. For control purposes an output signal of 10 V is required. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Current and voltage measurement 3.7.1 E-53 Direct input of transducer characteristics 1. Use System Display Amplifier Options 3.2 2. Use Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example ). to return to set-up mode. 3. Press function key . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with Channel 1 5. Use to select ”10 V” and confirm with 6. Use to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press . . . Select 10V the unit ”Nm” and confirm with no Nm↓ 0.00000 ... Vi 50.0000 ... 20.0000 ... 3.0000 ... measure... Adjust amplifier measure . 7. Enter the value ”0” in the lefthand ”Zero pt.” edit field. 8. Enter the value ”0” in the righthand ”Zero pt.” edit field. 9. Enter the value ”20” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 10. Enter the value ”3” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 11. Use with to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier and confirm . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 16. . 12. Use to return to the pull-up menu. 13. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 14. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Current and voltage measurement E-54 15. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and confirm with System Display Amplifier . Options NOTE Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch DISPLAY CHANNEL1 Nm ↓ Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −20.000 Nm 20.000 Nm to Step 1↓ MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0 N⋅m → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 N⋅m → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 N⋅m Input 10.000 N⋅m → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 N⋅m → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 N⋅m 16. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with . and confirm Measure ➝ Resistance temperature detectors 3.8 E-55 Resistance temperature detectors Resistance temperature detectors are passive transducers. For this transducer you need the ML35B one-channel amplifier plug-in module or the ML801B multi-channel module with the AP835 connection board. They carry out automatic linearisation and display the temperature in correct digits. With ’resistance temperature detector’ operating mode and unit °C or °F selected, the corresponding temperature will be displayed in degrees of the required unit. With Volt selected as the unit, scaling is carried out in accordance with the output voltage1). The following example explains the set-ups: Type Pt100 resistance temperature detector, the temperature is to be displayed in °C , with a temperature of 50°C corresponding to an output signal of 0 V. The output signal at 70°C is to be +10 V. 1) The permissible ranges depend on the bridge excitation voltage. If a measuring range is set up that exceeds the amplifier’s adjustment range, the maximum or minimum possible value is adopted. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Resistance temperature detectors E-56 3.8.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics 1. Use System Display Amplifier 3.2 Options 2. Use Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch measure... Adjust amplifier to return to set-up mode. . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with CHANNEL1 Type: Pt100 Connection: 4-wire °C↓ Unit: °C 50.0000 ... Zero pt.: 50.0000 ... 20.0000 ... 20.0000 ... Nom.val.: ). 3. Press function key 5. Use TRANSDUCER or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example to select ”Pt100” and confirm with . . 6. Select the required connection mode from the ”Connection” selection field.*) 7. Use to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press . Select measure the unit ”°C” and confirm with . 8. Enter the value ”50” in the lefthand ”Zero pt.” edit field. 9. Enter the value ”20” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.:” edit field (70°C−50°C=20°C). 10. Use with to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier and confirm . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 15. . 11. Use to return to the pull-up menu. 12. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with *) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . In 4-wire technology, compensation is made for cable resistance up to a length of 500 m. Measure ➝ Resistance temperature detectors E-57 13. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with System Display Amplifier Options 14. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and confirm with Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch DISPLAY CHANNEL1 °C↓ Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −30,000 °C 30,000 °C to Step 1↓ . . NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0°C → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1°C → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5°C Input 50.000°C → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001°C → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005°C 15. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with and confirm . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Resistors E-58 3.9 Resistors Resistors are passive transducers. These transducers require the ML35B , amplifier plug-in module, which has two coarse measuring ranges available (0...500 Ω and 0...5 kΩ). The following example explains the set-ups: Resistance value 400 Ω, Input range 400.00 Ω The input range of 400 Ω corresponds to an output signal of 10 V. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Resistors 3.9.1 E-59 Direct input of transducer characteristics 1. Use System Display Amplifier 3.2 Options 2. Use Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch measure... 400.0000 ... . . to select ”500Ohm” (this is the input range of the amplifier) and confirm with . 6. Select the required connection mode from the ”Connection” selection field.*) Ohm 0.00000 ... to return to set-up mode. 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with CHANNEL1 Type: 500 Ohm Connection: 4-wire Ohm↓ Unit: Zero pt.: 0.00000 ... Nom.val.: 400.0000 ... ). 3. Press function key 5. Use TRANSDUCER or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example measure 7. Use Adjust amplifier to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”Ohm” and confirm with . Select . 8. Enter the value ”0” in both the ”Zero pt.” edit fields. 9. Enter the value ”400” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 10. Use with to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier and confirm . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 15. . 11. Use *) to return to the pull-up menu. In 4-wire technology, compensation is made for cable resistance up to a length of 500 m. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Resistors E-60 12. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 13. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal System Display Amplifier Options places” edit field and confirm with . 14. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch confirm with . NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. DISPLAY CHANNEL1 Ohm↓ Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −400.000 Ohm 400.000 Ohm to Step 1↓ Example: Input 10.0 Ω → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 Ω → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 Ω Input 10.000 Ω → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 Ω → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 Ω 15. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . and confirm the security Measure ➝ Impulse counting 3.10 E-61 Impulse counting The ML60B amplifier is required for impulse counting purposes. It enables a maximum impulse-sequence frequency of 1 MHz to be processed. For more details on further amplifier setup options refer to chapter 3.4, page E-44. Incremental transducers − e.g. for angle measurement − deliver two square-wave signals which are 90° out of phase. The clock ratio between High and Low for both signals must be approx. 1:1. The following example explains the set-ups: An angle of rotation transducer delivers 180 impulses per revolution. These impulses are to be displayed as 360° . Due to the number of impulses per revolution the value 2 is specified as Step, since a higher resolution would make no sense. The levels of the square-wave signal amount to 10 V. A frequency signal with quadrupled counter impulses is required at the output in addition to the measured value. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Impulse counting E-62 3.10.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics 1. Use System Display Amplifier Options 3.2 2. Use Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch TRANSDUCER Type: Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: 5V deg↓ Ext.fct... 0.00000 ... kImp 0.00000 ... 360.0000 ... 0.18000 ... measure... ). to return to set-up mode. 3. Press function key CHANNEL1 Impuls counter or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example measure Adjust amplifier . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 5. Use to select the ”Impuls counter” type and confirm with . 6. Use to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press select 5 V. Confirm with and . 7. Use to switch to the Ext.fct... button and confirm with (For details on the extended functions refer to page E-64). 8. Use . to select the “Frequency quadrupling” and “Evaluate F2 Extended functions ! ! Glitch filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms) Frequency quadrupling Evaluate F2 signal Zero index input active Transducer error input active LIV1 switch output : F1 Counting signal to LIV1 LIV2 switch output : Off ↓ OK MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Cancel signal” activation fields and press 9. Use to activate them. to change to the ”LIV1 switch output” selection field, select “F1 counter signal to LIV1” and confirm with 10. Use to switch to the OK . button and confirm with . Measure ➝ Impulse counting E-63 11. Use to change to the “Unit” selection field and press . Select the unit “deg” and confirm with System Display Amplifier Options . 12. Enter the value ”0” in both the ”Zero pt.” edit fields. 13. Enter the value ”360” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 14. Enter the value ”0.180” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 15. Use with to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier and confirm . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 20. DISPLAY CHANNEL1 deg ↓ Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −360.000 deg 360.000 deg to Step 2↓ 16. Use to return to the pull-up menu. 17. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 18. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with . 19. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 20. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with . 21. Select Value 2 from the ”Step*)” selection field (1 impulse corresponds to 2°; 180 impulses/revolution corresponds to 360°) and confirm with . 22. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with and confirm the security . Assign a free F-key to the function ”Zeroing” (factory settings: Level 1/F1). Then return to measuring mode. If you then press the appropriate F-key, the impulse counter is set to ”0”. See also chap. ”Assigning F-keys”; page G-24. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Impulse counting E-64 “Extended functions” set−up window for ML60B: Glitch filter System Display Amplifier Options If this filter has been switched on, interfering signals with pulse widths below 1.6ms will be suppressed. Frequency quadrupling The frequency quadrupling results in an increased signal resolution by counting of both the positive and the negative signal edges. With both frequency inputs (F1 and F2) having been connected, the measuring frequency is quadrupled. If F2 has not been connected,the measuring frequency is doubled. Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch Evaluate F2 signal (recognition of direction) TRANSDUCER Typ: Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom. val.: CHANNEL1 The phase−shifted signal F2 is evaluated thus enabling the direction of rotation or motion to be displayed. Ext.fct... Zero index input active Freq.0..20kHz 5V↓ Nm ↓ kHz 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 360.0000 ... 0.1800 ... measure... measure Adjust amplifier Extended functions ! ! Glitch filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms) Frequency quadrupling Evaluate F2 signal Zero index input active Transducer error input active LIV1 switch output : Off ↓ LIV2 switch output : Off ↓ OK Transducer error input active (only with AP01i) If a signal is connected (0V level), the amplifier interprets the measured value as an error (e.g. in the case of a failure of the luminescent source with optical systems). LIV1 switch output The frequency signal F1 or the counter signal can be applied to the switching output of limit value switch 1. Cancel Off F2 to LIV2 Direction of rotation to LIV2 Off F1 to LIV1 F1 Counting signal to LIV1 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 With incremental transducers this input is used for resetting the counter in counting mode. LIV2 switch output The frequency signal F2 or the signal for the direction of rotation can be applied to the switching output of limit value switch 2. Measure ➝ Impulse counting E-65 F1 F2 Counting signal to LIV1 with activated quadruple evaluation MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Piezoelectric transducers E-66 4 Piezoelectric transducers Piezoelectric transducers are active transducers that emit a charge in the event of mechanical loading. When using these transducers, please observe the following instructions: • • For transducer connection, special cable with high isolation resistance, low capacitance, low noise and a wide temperature range is essential. Standard coaxial cable is unsuitable for this type of application. For quasi-static measurements a very high isolation resistance (>100TΩ ) is required. For this reason all input plugs must be kept clean and should not be touched by hand. Please use a suitable cleaning agent for cleaning (e.g. pure petroleum spirit). To operate piezoelectric transducers you need the AP08 connection board with the charge amplifier and an ML10B or ML01B DC amplifier. A piezoelectric transducer can be thought of as a capacitor that is charged by mechanical loading. In all cases, discharging is via the input and isolation resistor on the amplifier. The time constant determines the speed of discharge. There are three time constants from which to choose: SHORT MEDIUM LONG for dynamic measurement for dynamic measurement with a limited frequency range for quasi-static measurement Coarse and fine adjustment can be chosen for the measuring range selection. There are four input ranges for coarse adjustment: 100 pC; 1; 10 and 100 nC. Example: If the measuring range 6000 pC is wanted, set up the next higher input range of 10 nC. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Piezoelectric transducers E-67 With a constant transducer loading the value in the display or at the output signal may drift. This may result from insufficient cable isolation resistance or incorrect drift balance on the amplifier. We recommend that all male connectors should first be cleaned. If the problem persists, the drift needs to be readjusted (see chap.4.2). The following example explains the set-ups: You wish to use a piezoelectric acceleration transducer for measurement. Transducer nominal value is 100 pC/g. Dynamic measurement is to be taken, up to 60 g = 10 V. Measuring range 60 g ⋅100 pC/g = 6000 pC Dynamic measurement, i.e. time constant SHORT. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Piezoelectric transducers E-68 4.1 Connecting and measuring Resetting the charge amplifier (RESET): Gross 1−ML10B Channel Measure 1. Assign an F-key (in this case factory setting F2) to the ”Zero/Cal/Measure” function (see page G-23ff). 2. Select screen type ”1 value (with status line)” (see page G-3ff). Measure 3. Reset the charge amplifier: Now press the F-key assigned under point 1 until ”Zero” appears on the status line. AP08 NOTE Transducer connection (BNC female connector) When you have just switched the unit on this step is not necessary, since the input is automatically set to zero. 4. Unloading the transducer: Immediately before connecting the transducer, the cable must be short-circuited. a) Connect the centre pin of the BNC male connector for a moment to the connector housing. b) Connect the transducer to the BNC female connector of the AP08. 5. Starting to measure: Now press the F-key assigned under point 1 until ”Measure” appears in the status line. 6. We recommend selecting the ZERO position with the F-key when measurement is not in progress. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Piezoelectric transducers E-69 If the error message OVERFLOW occurs during set-up: • Press the ”Zero/Cal/Measure” F-key until Zero appears on the status line. • • Wait until the display comes to a stop. Press the ”Zero/Cal/Measure” F-key until ”Measure” is displayed. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Piezoelectric transducers E-70 4.1.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics 1. Use System Display Amplifier Options 3.2 2. Use Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch TRANSDUCER Zero pt.: 0.00000 ... Nom.val.: 60.0000 ... measure... ). to return to set-up mode. 3. Press function key . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with CHANNEL1 Type < 10nC Time constant short↓ g↓ Unit: or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example 5. Use to select transducer type ”< 10 nC” and confirm with 6. Use to go to the ”Decay time” selection field, press select ”Short”. Confirm with nC 0.00000 ... 6.00000 ... Adjust amplifier measure . 7. Use and . to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”g” and confirm with . . Select . 8. Enter the value ”0” in both the ”Zero pt.” edit fields. 9. Enter the value ”60” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 10. Enter the value ”6” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 11. Use with to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 16. . 12. Use MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 and confirm to return to the pull-up menu. Measure ➝ Piezoelectric transducers E-71 13. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 14. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal System Display Amplifier Options places” edit field and confirm with . 15. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch confirm with . *)NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. DISPLAY CHANNEL1 deg ↓ Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −360.000 deg 360.000 deg to Step 2↓ Example: Input 10.0 nC → Step width 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 nC → Step width 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 nC Input 10.000 nC → Step width 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 nC → Step width 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 nC 16. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with and confirm the security . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Piezoelectric transducers E-72 4.1.2 Setting up the zero point Zero point is set up in measuring mode with the ”Measure” and ”Zeroing” functions. Time constant ”Short” 1. Press function key (factory setting: Measure, 2nd level) until ”Measure” appears in the status line. 2. Press the function key to which you have assigned the function ”Zeroing” ( −>0<− ) (factory setting F1/Level 1). Time constant ”Medium/Long” a few times (factory setting: Measure, 2nd level) until 1. Press ”Zero” is displayed on the status line. 2. Press the function key to which you have assigned the function ”Zeroing” ( −>0<− ) (factory setting F1/Level 1). 3. Press a few times (Measure, 2nd level) until ”Measure” is displayed on the status line. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Piezoelectric transducers E-73 4.1.3 Special case: initial charge is known In this case zero point setting is omitted for one measurement. 1. Use System Display Amplifier or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example Options 3.2 ). to return to set-up mode. 2. Use Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 3. Press function key . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with TRANSDUCER CHANNEL1 Type < 10nC Time constant short↓ g↓ Unit: Zero pt.: 0.00000 ... Nom.val.: 60.0000 ... measure... nC 0.12000 ... measure . 5. Use to select transducer type ”< 10nC” and confirm with 6. Use to go to the ”Time constant” selection field, press select ”Short”. Confirm with . and . 6.00000 ... Adjust amplifier 7. Use to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”g” and confirm with . Select . 8. Enter the value ”0” in the lefthand ”Zero pt.” edit field. 9. Enter the value of the initial load in the righthand ”Zero pt.” edit field (e.g. 0.12). 10. Use with to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier and confirm . 11. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with and confirm the security . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Piezoelectric transducers E-74 4.2 Drift balancing The drift will have been balanced at the factory. However, the balancing procedure must be repeated from time to time due to the effects of aging and temperature. AP08 ZERO-potentiometer for setting the drift • • Connect the unladen transducer to the amplifier before it is switched on Switch the instrument on and wait 30min. Set-up mode: • Select nC as the unit of measure • Set input range and measuring range to <100 pC • Set time constant to Long Measuring mode: • • • Use to select gross signal Press the ”Zero/Cal/Measure” F-key a few times until ”Measure” is displayed on the status line. Turn the set-up potentiometer (see accompanying figure) until the value stops. If the error message OVERFLOW occurs during set-up: • • • MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Press the ”Zero/Cal/Measure” F-key a few times until ”Zero” is displayed on the status line. Wait for the display to come to a stop Press the ”Zero/Cal/Measure” F-key a few times until ”Measure” is displayed on the status line. Measure ➝ Current-fed piezoelectric transducers 5 E-75 Current-fed piezoelectric transducers Piezoelectric transducers with a built-in preamplifier are often used for acceleration and force measurement. These transducers need a constant current for the power supply. The measurement signal corresponds to the modulated voltage at the power line. A typical example of this product family is the DeltaTronT acceleration transducer from Brüel&Kjaer. To operate current-fed piezoelectric transducers you will need connection board AP18i and an ML10B or ML01B DC amplifier. You can select rough and fine adjustment for the measuring range. 3 input ranges are available for coarse adjustment: 0.1 V; 1 V; 10 V. Example: If you want a measuring range of 7 V the next input range up 10 V is set. The zero point defines the voltage which generates 0 V at the output of the amplifier. The nominal value is always defined relative to this zero point. Analogue outputs are used to define the display scaling, i.e. they are used to define the value that is displayed for an output signal of 10 V. The following example explains the set-ups: An acceleration of up to 300 m/s2 is to be measured with a DeltaTronT transducer. The nominal value of the transducer is 1 mV/ m/s2. Measuring range (fine adjustment): 300 m/s2 x 1 mV/m/s2 = 0.3 V Input range (coarse adjustment): 1 V ( > 0.3 V) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure ➝ Current-fed piezoelectric transducers E-76 5.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics 1. Use System Display Amplifier Options 3.2 ). 2. Use Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch Type Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: to return to set-up mode. 3. Press function key . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use TRANSDUCER or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example CHANNEL1 . to select transducer type ”Deltatron 1V” and confirm with . Deltatron 1V 6. Use 2−20mA m/s2↓ 0.00000 ... Vi 0.00000 ... 300.0000 ... 0.30000 ... measure... Adjust amplifier measure to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”m/s2” and confirm with . Select . 7. Enter the value ”0” in both the ”Zero pt.” edit fields. 8. Enter the value ”300” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 9. Enter the value ”0.3” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 10. Use with to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 15. . 11. Use MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 and confirm to return to the pull-up menu. Measure ➝ Current-fed piezoelectric transducers E-77 12. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 13. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal System Display Amplifier Options places” edit field and confirm with . 14. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch confirm with . *)NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. DISPLAY CHANNEL1 m/s2 ↓ Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −300.000 m/s2 300.000 m/s2 to Step 1↓ Example: Input 10.0 m/s2 → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 m/s2 → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 m/s2 Input 10.000 m/s2 → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 m/s2 → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 m/s2 15. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with and confirm the security . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-78 6 Measure Ý Piezoresistive transducers Piezoresistive transducers Piezoresistive transducers are passive transducers. The following example explains the set-ups: Pressure transducer with the following characteristics: Rated pressure 300 bar, excitation 10 V, rated sensitivity 200 mV/V, Display range 300 bar, test pressure 250 bar (partial load) Due to the high sensitivity you must use the ML10B amplifier. Zero point and measuring range can be set up directly with the transducer characteristics or by means of a test pressure. Both methods are described below. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-79 Measure Ý Piezoresistive transducers 6.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics 1. Use System Display Amplifier Options 3.2 2. Use Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch TRANSDUCER Type Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example ). to return to set-up mode. 3. Press function key . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with CHANNEL1 . 5. Use and confirm with . 6. Use to switch to the ”Excitation” selection field and press . Full bridge − high level Select ”10V” and confirm with 10V↓ bar ↓ 0.00000 ... mV/V 0.00000 ... 300.0000 ... 200.0000 ... measure... Adjust amplifier measure 7. Use . to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”bar” and confirm with . Select . 8. Enter the value ”0” in both the ”Zero pt.” edit fields. 9. Enter the value ”300” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 10. Enter the value ”200” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 11. Use with to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier and confirm . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 16. . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-80 Measure Ý Piezoresistive transducers 12. Use System Display Amplifier Options to return to the pull-up menu. 13. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 14. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 15. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and confirm with . 16. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with DISPLAY . and confirm the security . CHANNEL1 bar ↓ Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −300.000 bar 300.000 bar to Step 1↓ *)NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0 bar → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 bar → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 bar Input 10.000 bar → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 bar → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 bar MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-81 Measure Ý Piezoresistive transducers 6.1.1 Measuring transducer characteristics Transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a defined test pressure occurs. System Display Amplifier Options NOTE If zero point and nominal value are not modified (for instance in the case of recalibration), you may omit point 1.−10.. Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 1. Use 3.2 TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: CHANNEL1 2. Use or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example ). to return to set-up mode. Full bridge − high level 5V↓ bar ↓ 3. Press . mV/V measure 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 300.0000 ... 200.000 ... measure... 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . Adjust amplifier 5. Use to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press select 10V. 0.0000 ... K-Factor: 6. Confirm with Two point calibration bar mV/V 1st pt.: 0.0000 0.0021 Measure 2nd pt.: 250.000 166.67 Measure OK Cancel Shunt off 7. Use . to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”bar” and confirm with 8. Use . Select . to go to the ”Zero pt.” edit field and enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field. Confirm with 9. Use and . to go to the ”Nom.val.” edit field and enter the value ”300” in the lefthand edit field. Confirm with . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-82 Measure Ý Piezoresistive transducers 10. Use with System Display Amplifier to select the button labelled . Options to select the button labelled 11. Use the cursor keys and confirm with Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch TRANSDUCER measure... . 12. Unload the transducer. 13. Enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field of calibration point 1 and confirm with 14. Use Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: and confirm Adjust amplifier CHANNEL1 . to select the button labelled confirm with Measure in the ”1st pt.” line and . Full bridge − high level 5V↓ bar ↓ 15. Use 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 2.0000 ... measure... measure Adjust amplifier 0.0000 ... K-Factor: the value ”250” and confirm with . 16. Set up the transducer with the test pressure. 17. Use cursor key to select the button labelled Measure from the ”Point 2” line. If you now press measurement starts, and the current measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside the Measure . Two point calibration bar mV/V 1st pt.: 0.0000 0.0021 Measure 2nd pt.: 250.000 166.67 Measure OK to select the lefthand edit field from the ”2nd pt.” line, enter mV/V Shunt off 18. Use to select the button labelled OK and confirm with (the amplifier converts the nominal value to 300 bar; the calibration data for 250 bar stays unchanged). Cancel 19. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . and confirm the security E-83 Measure Ý Potentiometric transducers 7 Potentiometric transducers Resistors are passive transducers. These transducers require the ML35B , amplifier plug-in module, which has two coarse measuring ranges available (0...500 Ω and 0...5 kΩ). Potentiometric transducers are passive transducers that have to be supplied with an excitation voltage. To operate a potentiometric transducer you require the ML10B amplifier. Please note that the maximum resistance value is 5 kΩ. The following example explains the set-ups: A potentiometric displacement transducer with a nominal displacement of 10 mm is used for measurement. The whole nominal displacement is to be used. The display range is 10 mm. Due to the interdependence between excitation voltage and nominal input voltage (mV/V), in the case of an excitation voltage of 2.5 V, the measuring range needs to be set up in accordance with the following correlation: Nominal value to be set up = (RANGE) Rated voltage (displacement) Excitation voltage Nominal value (range) = 2.5 V / 2.5 V = 1000 mV/V This value of 1000 mV/V or 1 V/V only changes if a potentiometric transducer is used in a section. As the second method, partial calibration with end values of 7 mm is performed for calibration of the zero point and range with a defined displacement. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-84 Measure Ý Potentiometric transducers 7.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics 1. Use 3.2 System Display Amplifier TRANSDUCER to return to set-up mode. 3. Press function key Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch . 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with CHANNEL1 . 5. Use and confirm with . 6. Use to switch to the ”Excitation” selection field and press Select ”2.5 V” and confirm with Full bridge − high level . . 2.5V↓ mm ↓ mV/V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 1000.000 ... measure... K-Factor: ). Options 2. Use Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example measure 7. Use to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”mm” and confirm with . Select . Adjust amplifier 0.0000 ... 8. Enter the value ”0” in both the ”Zero pt.” edit fields. 9. Enter the value ”10” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 10. Enter the value ”1000” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field. 11. Use with to select the button labelled Adjust amplifier . If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you may continue with point 16. . 12. Use MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 and confirm to return to the pull-up menu. E-85 Measure Ý Potentiometric transducers 13. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 14. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal places” edit field and confirm with . 15. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and confirm with . 16. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with and confirm the security . *)NOTE The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0 mm → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 mm → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 mm Input 10,000 mm → Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 mm → Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 mm MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-86 Measure Ý Potentiometric transducers 7.1.1 Measuring transducer characteristics Transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a defined displacement occurs. System Display Amplifier Options NOTE If zero point and nominal value are not modified (for instance in the case of recalibration), you may omit point 1.−10.. Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 1. Use 3.2 TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: CHANNEL1 2. Use or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example ). to return to set-up mode. Full bridge − high level 2.5V↓ mm ↓ 3. Press 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 1000.000 ... measure... measure 4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press select 2.5 V. 6. Confirm with Two point calibration mm mV/V 1st pt.: 0.0000 0.0021 Measure 2nd pt.: 7.0000 699.23 Measure OK . Adjust amplifier 0.0000 ... K-Factor: . mV/V Cancel Shunt off 7. Use . to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press the unit ”mm” and confirm with 8. Use to go to the ”Zero pt.” edit field and enter the value ”0” in . to go to the ”Nom.val.” edit field and enter the value ”10” in the lefthand edit field. Confirm with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . Select . the lefthand edit field. Confirm with 9. Use and . E-87 Measure Ý Potentiometric transducers 10. Use to go to the righthand ”Nom.val.:” edit field and enter the value ”1000”. Confirm with System Display Amplifier . Options 11. Use to select the button labelled and confirm with measure... . Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch 12. Slide the core into the transducer until zero is displayed. 13. Enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field of calibration point 1 and confirm with 14. Use TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.: CHANNEL1 . to select the button labelled and confirm with Measure... in the ”1st pt.” line . Full bridge − high level 15. Use cursor key 2.5V↓ mm ↓ 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ... 1000.000 ... measure... to select the lefthand edit field from the ”Point mV/V Adjust amplifier measure 2” line, enter the value ”7” and confirm with . 16. Position the gauging block below the probe tip of the displacement transducer. 0.0000 ... K-Factor: 17. Use Measure from the ”2nd pt.” line. If you now press measurement starts, and the current measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside the Measure . Two point calibration mm mV/V 1st pt.: 0.0000 0.0021 Measure 2nd pt.: 7.0000 699.23 Measure OK to select the button labelled Cancel Shunt off 18. Use to select the button labelled OK and confirm with (the amplifier converts the nominal value to 10mm; the calibration data for 7mm stays unchanged). 19. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with and confirm the security . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 E-88 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measure Ý Potentiometric transducers F-1 F Additional functions MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-3 Additional functions Ý Remotes 1 Remote (one-channel modules only) 1.1 Switching on remote control The remote contacts are used to control important functions of the amplifier by means of digital inputs. These remotes are only active when remote control is switched on. System Display Amplifier Options There are three ways in which you can switch remote control on or off. • In measuring mode: Press function key twice followed by Remote contacts function key Remote contacts Remote control Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 • Channel 1 On ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ On Off (factory setting). In set-up mode: press function key . The ”Switch” set-up window lets you switch remote control on or off. • By means of the remote contacts (with function REMT). No function ACAL−autocal TARA−tare CPV1−clear store 1 HLD1−hold store 1 CPV2−clear store 2 HLD2−hold store 2 ZERO−zero balance SHNT−Shunt ON/OFF PRNT−select for printing CAL−input to cal. signal ZERO−input to zero signal INV−change sign PSEL1−select line param. set 1 PSEL2−select line param. set 2 PSEL4−select line param. set 4 REMT−Remote ON/OFF INT−Start/Stop Integration MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-4 Additional functions Ý Remotes 1.2 Assigning remote contacts Remotes can be assigned freely and are not defined in the factory setup. The available functions and a description of each are shown in the following table: Function Level 5 V (Level 0V for AP13i) Level 0 V (Level 24 V for AP13i) ACAL Autocalibration ON Autocalibration OFF TARA Taring starts on transition 5 V→0 V (0 V→24 V for AP13i) CPV1/2 Peak value 1/2 is stored Peak value 1/2 is cleared from current value HLD1/2 Peak value store 1/2 free Contents of peak value store 1/2 frozen ZERO Current measuring signal is set to zero on transition 5 V→0 V (0 V→24 V for AP13i) SHNT Shunt off Shunt on PRNT When printing is enabled the channel is taken into account When printing is enabled the channel is not taken into account CAL Input is switched to internal calibration source ZERO Input is switched to zero signal INV Polarity is switched over (ML60B only) PSEL1 Parameter set select code line 1(see Table 1.1) PSEL2 Parameter set select code line 2 (see Table 1.1) PSEL4 Parameter set select code line 4 (see Table 1.1) REMT INT Remote control contacts inactive Remote control contacts active All connection boards (except AP13i): Integration starts at the transition from 5 V − 0 V and stops at the transition from 0 V − 5 V. Connection boards AP13i: Integration starts at the transition from 0 V − 24 V and stops at the transition from 24 V − 0 V. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-5 Additional functions Ý Remotes Parameter set selection PSEL1 PSEL2 PSEL4 Parameter set selected 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 0 1 0 3 1 1 0 4 0 0 1 5 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 7 1 1 1 8 Table 1.1 0: Remote contacts not driven; Level 5 V (level 0 V in the case of 13i). 1: Remote contacts driven; Level 0 V; connected to digital ground (level 24 V in the case of 13i). MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-6 2 Additional functions Ý Limit switches Limit switches (one-channel modules only) In order to assess mass or weight tolerances, or when monitoring forces, pressures etc., it is often necessary to comply with certain target values or limit switches. Each amplifier plug-in module therefore has four limit switches available (in ex-factory status these are OFF). They can be used to specify the level, the hysteresis and the direction of each for limit switch monitoring. The hysteresis value prevents ”fluttering” of the limit switches upon reaching the switching threshold. The prevailing connection state is indicated by an LED on the front panel of the amplifier plug-in module when the STATUS display format is enabled. Displays limit switches status MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Please note the following points when working with limit switches: − The measuring signal must last for at least 1 ms. The measurement voltage delivered by the amplifier is compared internally with the reference voltage. If the measurement voltage reaches or exceeds the reference voltage that has been set, the associated logic output is switched and the appropriate LED indicates the connection state. − If you are using the AP02 connection board, you also have relay contacts available. − Connection board AP13i has 24 V PLC−compatible, optically decoupled limit switch outputs. F-7 Additional functions Ý Limit switches 2.1 Activate limit switches In the ex-factory setting, the limit switches are not enabled (Enable limit switch ”Off”). System Display Amplifier 1. Use the shift key Options to return to set-up mode. 2. Press Limit switches 3. Select ”Limit switches” from the pop-up menu and confirm with 4. Select ”Yes” from the ”Enable” selection field and confirm with Limit switch 1 Limit switches . Channel 1 1 ... Name 1-Limit1 ... Enable Input signal Level No ↓ 100.000 ... % Hysteresis 1,000 ... % Direction Output logic Over limit ↓ Delay define... Input Message when ON free ↓ 1-Limit1 ON... Normal ↓ Message when OFF 1-Limit1 OFF... Normal ↓ free disabled . NOTE Gross ↓ The screen type ”Status limit switch”, which enables the status of limit switches to be displayed, is set up under Screen No. 5 ex-factory (see also chap.1.4, ”Status limit switch” ; page G-21). The limit switches must be enabled in advance (see chap. 2.2; page F-8). Positiv logic ↓ No Yes Positive logic Negative logic Over limit Below limit Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Normal Inverse MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-8 Additional functions Ý Limit switches 2.2 Setting up limit switches Limit switch 1 Limit switches Set-up window Limit switches Channel 1 1 ... Setting up and activating the limit switches (Enable). Name 1-Limit1 ... Enable Input signal Level No ↓ 100.000 ... % Hysteresis 1,000 ... % Direction Output logic Over limit ↓ • Gross ↓ to go to the required Enter a number (1 to 4) and confirm with set-up range; this saves you having to run through all the edit fields or selection fields with the cursor keys. Positiv logic ↓ Delay define... Input Message when ON free ↓ 1-Limit1 ON... Normal ↓ Message when OFF 1-Limit1 OFF... Normal ↓ free disabled • Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Positive logic Negative logic Normal Inverse Enable Switches limit switch monitoring on or off. • Input signal Selects the source of the signal that you want to monitor (Gross/Net/Peak values/Peak value combine). No Yes • Level Input the operate value in displayed units (e.g. kg). LIV-Delay 12 3 4 LIV-On Delay time LIV-Off 0ms OK OK Name Name of the limit switch or its function, depending on your choice (for example ”Emergency Off”). • Over limit Below limit Limit switches Cancel OK MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 • Hysteresis Hysteresis is understood to mean the changed onset of the switching effect between the ”On” and ”Off” states. The hysteresis prevents ”fluttering” of the limit switch when the switching level is reached. F-9 Additional functions Ý Limit switches • Direction Input the operating direction of the limit switch. a) Switching when Over the switching level limit Level Hysteresis Amplifier output signal Limit switch On Limit switch Off 1 0 LED LED b) Switching when Below the switching level limit Hysteresis Level 1 Limit switch On Limit switch Off 0 • LED LED Limit switch delay You can enter a limit switch delay time of 0 − 99999 ms. Switch at Delay time of 60 ms 30ms Level Hysteresis 1 0 60 ms Delay time MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-10 Additional functions Ý Limit switches The limit switch should only operate if the signal has been above the level for a long time (here 60 ms). The limit switch should not operate if the signal has only been above the level for a short time (here 30ms). • Output logic You can change the output logic of the remotes as required. Positive logic Negative logic On =High On =Low Off=Low Off=High • Input Enable or disable use of function keys to input limit switches. • Message when ON Edit field for a message that will be displayed when switching to on (e.g. ”below 20kg”, see also the figure on page F-14). You may also select the display mode (Standard=black font on a light background; Inverse=light font on a dark background). • Message when OFF Edit field for a message that will be displayed when switching to off (e.g. ”below 20kg”). You may also select the display mode (Standard=black font on a light background; Inverse=light font on a dark background). MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-11 Additional functions Ý Limit switches 2.3 Limit switch 1 Limit switches Name Enable Input signal On level Off level Input Hysteresis Selection keys in the menu Limit switches NOTE Channel 1 1 .... It may be an advantage to use the horizontal cursor keys when enabling. As soon as you have entered your set-up in the required 1-Limit1 ... No ↓ selection box or edit field (in this case Enable), confirm it with Gross ↓ 10.000 ... 9.9000 ... disabled ↓ variable ↓ V V (Edit fields) and press . By doing this you stay in the required selection box (edit field), but skip to the next limit switch. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-12 Additional functions Ý Combine limit switches 3 Combine limit switches (one-channel modules only) Using this function you can logically combine selected limit switches to a limit switch output. System Display Amplifier Options • • Combine LIV • Combine LIV LIV output: Comb.: Input 1: Input 2: Input 3: Input 4: Channel 1 3 AND ↓ LIV 1 ↓ LIV 2 ↓ −−− −−− −−−− LIV 4 LIV 4 inverted Remote contact 4 Remote contact 4 inverted AND OR EXOR NAND NOR NEXOR −−− 1 2 3 4 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 LIV output Input the required limit switch output (−−−, 1, 2, 3, 4). Comb. Logical combination of the input signals (AND, OR, EXOR, NAND, NOR, NEXOR). Input 1...4 Choose the inputs to be combined (Limit1 (LIV1) to Limit4 (LIV4) or remote contact). F-13 Additional functions Ý Combine limit switches Limit switch 1 Limit switches Example: Channel 1 1 Task: To monitor the range between 10 kN and 20 kN, and evaluate it as ”OK”. The evaluation will be displayed as ”OK” or ”NOK”. Name 1-Limit1 Enable Input signal Level Yes↓ 10,000 ... kN Hysteresis 0.010 ... kN Direction Output logic Over limit ↓ Solution: Limit switch 1 monitors the 10 kN limit, whilst limit switch 2 monitors the 20 kN limit. Both are combined to one another by ”AND”. The result from this combination controls the output of limit switch 3. Gross ↓ Positiv logic ↓ kN Delay define... Input Message when ON free ↓ Over 10kN... Normal ↓ Message when OFF Under 10kN... Invers↓ 20 OK Limit switch 2 Limit switches Channel 1 10 2... Name 1-Limit2 ... Enable Input signal Level Yes↓ 20,000... kN Hysteresis 0.010 ... kN Direction Output logic Below limit ↓ Delay define... Input Message when ON free ↓ Below 20kN ... Normal ↓ Message when OFF Over 20kN... Invers↓ Gross ↓ 1 0 Negative logic ↓ Limit switch 3 Limit switches t Channel 1 1 0 1 0 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 3 Name 1-Limit3 Enable Input signal Level Yes↓ 0,000 ... kN Hysteresis 0.010 ... kN Direction Output logic Over limit ↓ Gross ↓ Positiv logic ↓ Delay define... Input Message when ON free ↓ OK Normal ↓ Message when OFF NOK Invers↓ MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-14 Additional functions Ý Combine limit switches Combine LIV LIV output: Comb.: Input 1: Input 2: Input 3: Input 4: Channel 1 If limit switch 1 is undershot, the settings shown in this example give rise to the following display (screen type ”7Status limit switch”): 3 AND ↓ LIV 1 ↓ LIV 2 ↓ −−− −−− MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 LIMIT VALUE 1−ML30B Gross 8.483 kN 1−Limit Below 10kN 1 1−Limit Below 20kN 2 1−Limit NOK 3 Measure F-15 Additional functions Ý Adjusting peak values 4 Adjusting peak values 4.1 Peak value stores Measured peak value You can use the ’Peak values’ function to record and save isolated signal peaks and minimum/maximum signal amplitudes. All amplifiers have two peak value stores each. You can use these to save: 26 µsec − Maxima − Minima or − Peak-to-peak amplitudes Gross Peak value stores Net (envelope) Display Peak−to−peak In the case of rapid dynamic signals, you must taken into account that the peak values are defined in a fixed time raster. If filter cut-off frequencies are set up > 5 Hz Bessel or 10 Hz Butterworth, the raster is scanned 38400 times per second, corresponding to 26 µsec. The peak value stores are abbreviated to Store1 and Store2 in the set-up windows because this form of notation is shorter. Setting up peak value stores From the ”Function” selection fields, select the minimum or maximum signal for which you want the peak value to be saved. In the ”Envelope” selection fields, switch on the envelope function. In the right-hand edit field, enter the decay time in milliseconds. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-16 Additional functions Ý Adjusting peak values 4.2 Combine peak value stores Combine peak value stores Gross System Display Amplifier Net Options Store1 Store12 Store2 Peak value stores Peak value stores (PVS) Channel 1 Maximum gross ↓ Store1 Function Store1 Envelope curve Off ↓ 0 ... ms Store2 Function Maximum gross ↓ Off ↓ 0 ... ms Store 2 Envelope curve −−− Comb. PVS 1−2 There are four possible ways to combine peak value stores: 1. Difference generation: Store1 − Store2 (used as Peak/Peak). F Store1 Off On −−− Difference PVS1, PVS2 Mean PVS1,PVS2 Integrate gross Integrate net Signal curve Maximum, gross Maximum gross Maximum net Minimum gross Minimum net Peak-to-peak value t Minimum, gross Fig.4.1: MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Peak value combination when calculating difference Store2 F-17 Additional functions Ý Adjusting peak values 2. Mean generation: (PVS1PVS2) 2 System Display Amplifier Options F Store1 Peak value stores Mean value Store2 Peak value stores (PVS) Store1 Function Store1 Envelope curve Store2 Function Store 2 Envelope curve Comb. PVS 1−2 Channel 1 t Maximum gross ↓ Off ↓ 0 ... ms Fig.4.2: Maximum gross ↓ Off ↓ 0 ... Peak value combination when calculating mean value ms 3. Integrate gross: −−− ∑ B/n n = number of points Off On −−− Difference PVS1, PVS2 Mean PVS1,PVS2 Integrate gross Integrate net B = gross signal Maximum gross Maximum net Minimum gross Minimum net 4. Integrate net: ∑ N/n N = gross signal n = number of points The mean value of the gross/net signal is generated for your choice of time interval. The values are added at a sample rate of 1200 Hz (for filter frequencies >5 Hz: Bessel; >10 Hz: Butterworth). You can allocate a F-key (function Start/Stop integration; see page G-25) or use a remote contact (INT) to set the start/end of integration. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-18 4.3 Additional functions Ý Adjusting peak values Controlling the peak value store Three remote contacts have an effect on the peak value store: CPV: HLD: INT: Used to clear the peak value store Freezes or unfreezes the current contents of the memory Starts and stops integration for a particular time interval You can use these remote control elements to carry out other functions, such as storing current values. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-19 Additional functions Ý Adjusting peak values 4.4 Vi, Vo ”Peak value” operating mode Output Measurement signal In ”Peak value” operating mode you can save the minimum value, the peak value or the peak-to-peak value (function ”Run”). Use the ”Hold” function to hold the contents of the store. For all connection boards except AP13i Function Operating mode Run Peak value t Hold Run Current value Function Control circuit for CPV Peak/Current value Control circuit for HLD Run/Hold Peak value: Memory runs in chosen direction 5V 5V Freeze value Any 0V Function Control circuit for CPV Peak/Current value Control circuit for HLD Run/Hold Peak value: Memory runs in chosen direction 0V 0V Freeze value Any 24 V For connection boards AP13i MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-20 Additional functions Ý Adjusting peak values 4.5 ”Current value” operating mode Measurement signal Vi, Vo Output In ”Current value” operating mode, the memory is constantly updated (function ”Run”). Use the ”Hold” function to hold the contents of the store. You can use the remote contacts to switch the peak value store to current value operating mode. For all connection boards except AP13i t Function Operating mode Run Hold Current value Function Control circuit Peak/Current value Control circuit Run/Hold Current value: Memory runs in each direction 0V 5V Freeze value Any 0V Function Control circuit for CPV Peak/Current value Control circuit Run/Hold Current value: Memory runs in each direction 24 V 0V Freeze value Any 24 V Run For connection boards AP13i MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-21 Additional functions Ý Adjusting peak values 4.6 ”Envelope curve” operating mode Output signal 100% 30% Input signal Time constant Time constant: OK Peak value stores can also be used to provide an envelope display. The envelope function is suitable for measuring amplitude modulated vibration. Inputting a decay time defines how quickly the peak value store is discharged to 30 % of the peak value when the latter is no longer present at memory input. The choice of decay time depends on the basic vibration frequency f0 and the modulation frequency. Usable envelopes are obtained in most cases with a decay time which is about a multiple of 10 of the basic frequency period (t= 10 / f0). Time constant: too long Time constant: too short MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-22 Additional functions Ý Adjusting peak values 4.7 Clear peak value store The peak value stores are abbreviated to Store1 and Store2 in the set-up windows because this form of notation is shorter. System Display Amplifier Options Clear peak value store There are three ways in which you can clear a peak value store: 1. By means of a function key (factory setting /level3). Peak value stores 2. With the remote contacts CPV1/CPV2 (in the pull-up menu ”Amplifier”/ set-up window ”Switch”, ”ON” must be selected in the Remote selection field). Peak value stores (PVS) Store1 Function Store1 Envelope curve Store2 Function Store 2 Envelope curve Comb. PVS 1−2 Channel 1 Maximum gross ↓ Off ↓ 0 ... ms Maximum gross ↓ Off ↓ 0 ... ms −−− Off On −−− Difference PVS1, PVS2 Mean PVS1,PVS2 Integrate gross Integrate net MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Maximum gross Maximum net Minimum gross Minimum net 3. From a computer, with the command ”CPV”. F-23 Additional functions Ý Version 5 Version System Display Amplifier Options You may use the channel selection keys to display information about the version of your device components one after another. In the header on the right is the name of the device components (e.g. AB, CP, Channel 1, etc.) and their version is displayed. The first line of the box below gives information on device identification and the second line gives the serial number. You may enter any text you wish in the comment line. Version Version KANAL 1 Identification: Comments: HBM, RD002−ML50B, P4.0A ... Serial and revisionnumber ML801B Serial No. xxxx Rev.No. xxxx MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-24 Additional functions Ý Switch 6 Switch The first things you find in the ”Switch” set-up window are three buttons, which you can use for −>T<− System Display Amplifier Options −>0<− You can use the selection fields that come after, to switch between the possible states of the functions Autocalibration, Parameter set, Amplifier input, Remote and Channel-LED. Channel 1 −>T<− Autocal −>0<− Autocal Off ↓ Param.set 1−internal ↓ Ampl. Input Zero ↓ Remote control zero balancing clearing the peak value store. Switch Switch taring Off ↓ Channel−LED Status ↓ Switching automatic calibration on and off. When AUTOCAL is ”On”, this improves the temperature tracking of zero point and the long term stability of the amplifier. If you need the analogue output signal for continuous monitoring, you must switch autocalibration off. This is because during calibration no data is acquired, giving rise to a ”gap” in the measurement output (at intervals of approx. 5 minutes, lasting about 1 second, depending on the filter setting. Parameter set Selecting stored parameter sets (see also H-9). Ampl. Input MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Zero: Zero signal; input internal to zero potential Cal: Calibration signal Measure: The current measurement signal is present at the input Shunt: Shunt resistor on (shunt calibration) F-25 Additional functions Ý Switch Switch Remote control Channel 1 −>T<− Switching Remote on/off (activates the remote contacts) −>0<− Param.set Off ↓ Remote control Off ↓ 1−internal ↓ Ampl. Input Zero ↓ Autocal Off 5 Min once Channel−LED Channel−LED Status ↓ This switches the function of the LEDs on the front panel of the amplifier. Status: Status display (Amplifier active, Error, Limit switches) Zero Cal Measure 1−internal 2−internal 3−internal 4−internal 5−internal 6−internal 7−internal 8−internal Status Level Level: Amplifier level control coefficient Off On MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 F-26 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Additional functions Ý Switch G-1 G Display MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-3 Display Ý Display format 1 Display format 1 value Gross Channel The settings determine how the selected signals are displayed. You can basically select four different signals (Gross, Net, Limit switches, Peak values) per channel. Measure Measure Values can be represented numerically or graphically. A maximum of six values can be displayed simultaneously in numerical representation. Acal 3 values Gross The display states shown on the left are described as types and can be selected from the setup menu. Gross Gross Measure 6 values Acal Representation as a numerical value Gross Gross Gross Gross Gross Gross Acal Measure • 1 value (with/without status line) • 3 values • 6 values Graphical representation YT-Diagram Gross • YT-Diagram • XY-Diagram XY-Diagram Gross Gross Display four limit switch states • Status limit switch Status limit switch Limit switch 1−ML30B Gross 1−Limit1 Below 10kN 1−Limit2 Below 20kN 1−Limit3 NOK Acal Measure 8.483 kN Display with ”Data acquisition” type Recording status Test sequence 3 • Pre trigger status • Post trigger status MEAS. RATE: 50Hz PERIODS: 100 TIME: 00: 00: 00 1 16.0S −4.0S FILE NAME: MGCP0000.MEA Get DAQ1 Acal 120 MB FREE ... ... MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-4 Display Ý Display format 1.1 Select set-up window 1. Use the shift key 2. Press System Display Amplifier to return to set-up mode. . Options 3. Select ”Display format” from the pull-up menu and confirm with You are now in the ”Display format” set-up window. Display format F-keys Channel names Display Format Screen No: Type: one value 0 ... one value ↓ Channels/Signals: all ↓ Off ↓ Status line MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 define... . G-5 Display Ý Display format 1.2 Set-up window Display format Display format The structure of the ”Display format” set-up window depends on the selected Type. The window mask changes according to the selected Type. For instance the ”Status line” selection field is only present for the ”1 value” type. one value 0 ... one value ↓ Screen No: Type: Channels/Signals: all ↓ Off ↓ Status line define... Off On Display format Menu for ”1 value” type all Selection free One value 3 values 6 values YT-Diagram XY-Diagram Limit_V. status Status data acquisition Display format Channel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 define... 3 values 0 ... Screen No: Type: 3 values ↓ Value 1 (Base): Select channel/signal Cancel Channels/Signals: all ↓ Off ↓ Status line 0...9 Menu for ”3 values” type OK one value 0 ... one value ↓ Screen No: Type: All channels All signals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 Channels/Signals: Selection↓ Value 2: Value 3: define... relativ to base ↓ Channel 2 Signal Gross ↓ relativ to base ↓ Channel −1 Signal Gross ↓ MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-6 Display Ý Display format 1.3 Set-up window components Dsplay format Number one value You can enter the numbers 1...9 in this edit field. In this way you can store your current display settings under a number or recall the factory presets. In the same way you can determine the sequence in which the 0 ... one value ↓ Screen No: Type: Channels/Signals: all ↓ Off ↓ Status line define... types are selected in measuring mode with the Off On The following sequence is preset at the factory: Number all Selection free One value 3 values 6 values YT-Diagram XY-Diagram Limit_V. status Status data acquisition 0...9 Select channel/signal OK Channel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 Cancel −cursor keys. All channels All signals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Type Channels/Signals Status line 0 1 value All On 1 3 values All − 2 6 values All − 3 YT-Diagram All − 4 XY-Diagram All − 5 Status limit switch − − 6 DAQ status − − 7 Free − − 8 Free − − 9 Free − − Type Use the Type to define the number of measurement signals that can be displayed simultaneously (numerical value only) or the representation mode (graphic only) in the display. You can also display the status of four selected limit switches. G-7 Display Ý Display format 1.3.1 Numerical display Display format Channels/Signals 3 values At this point you define which channels and signals are to be shown on the first display line. You can define your settings for all channels or just for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define... ). You can recall a maximum of six signals per channel one after the other. 0 ... Screen No: Type: 3 values ↓ Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection↓ Value 2: none Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 as base define... relativ to base ↓ Channel 2 Signal Gross ↓ 0...9 0...9 all Selection Absolute relativ to base At this point, 3/6 values types are used to define the basic channels (Value 1). Define... The key symbol opens a new window Select channel/signal. Status line Free One value 3 values 6 values YT-Diagram XY-Diagram With the ”1 value” type, the status line can be superimposed on the display. Value1 (”Base”) Select channel/signal OK Channel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 Cancel All channels All signals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 6 values 3 values Gross Gross Gross Measure Gross Gross Gross Gross Gross Gross Measure MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-8 Display Ý Display format Value (2...6): Channel The value entered depends on the ”absolute/relative” selection. This setting lets you use ”3 values” and ”6 values” types to define which reference to the basic channel is produced. Absolute/relativ to base This setting lets you use ”3 values” and ”6 values” types to define whether a reference to the channel number of the basic channel is produced. Absolute: The measured value and signal of the selected channel are displayed independently of the basic value. The number entered corresponds to the actual channel number. Changing channels in measuring mode has no effect on this display value. relativ to base: The number entered refers to the basic channel (display value 1). Channels to the left of the basic channel are entered with a negative sign and those to the right of it are entered with a positive sign. Caution: This value does not correspond to the actual (absolute) channel number. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-9 Display Ý Display format Set-up window Display format 0 ... Screen No: Type: Select channel/signal 3 values ↓ OK Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection↓ define... Value 2: relativ to base ↓ Channel −1 Signal Gross ↓ Value 3: relativ to base ↓ Channel 2 Signal Gross ↓ Basic channel C3 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 (−) Channel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 Cancel All channels All signals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 4 4 4 MGCplus device (+) −1 Display +2 Channel 3 Net Value 1 Channel 2 Gross Value 2 Channel 5 Gross Value 3 Basic value MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-10 Display Ý Display format DISPLAY FORMAT 3 values 0 ... Screen No: Type: The setting in the ”Channels/Signals” selection field and the relative channel number affect the sequence of the values displayed in measuring mode. 3 values ↓ Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection↓ Value 2: Value 3: define... relativ to base ↓ Channel 2 Signal Gross ↓ −1 Example 1: 6-channel module; ”3 values” type relativ to base ↓ Channel Signal Gross ↓ a) Channels/Signals: + All The channel selection keys are used to select all channels in turn, starting with the basic channel. Display Basic value C3 Value 1 Value 2: Channel+2 rel. C5 Value 2 Value 3: Channel −1 rel. C2 Value 3 C6 C2 C5 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 C4 C6 C3 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 C5 C1 C4 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 C1 C3 C6 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 C2 C4 C1 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Use the cursor keys (SIGNAL) to display all signals from the basic channel that were set up in the ”Select channel/signal” menu. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-11 Display Ý Display format Display format 3 values 0 ... Screen No: Type: b) Channels/Signals: + select 3 values ↓ Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection↓ Example 1 (Continued): 6-channel unit; ”3 values” type The channel selection keys are used in measuring mode to select define... Value 2: relativ to base ↓ Channel 2 Signal Gross ↓ Value 3: relativ to base ↓ Channel −1 Signal Gross ↓ the required channels for the basic channel (in this example 1, 3, 5) one after the other. The display fields of non-selected channels stay blank. C3 Value 2: Channel+2 C5 Value 3: Channel −1 C2 Display Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 C5 Value 1 C4 Value 3 C1 C3 Value 1 Value 2 Use the cursor keys (SIGNAL) in measuring mode displays all signals from the basic channel that were set up in the ”Select channel/signal” menu (in the first display line). affects Select channel/signal Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 affects Channel Channel Channel Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-12 Display Ý Display format Display format Example 2: The net weights of three containers are to be displayed simultaneously. The following assignment is to apply: 3 values 0 ... Screen No: Type: Container 1 → Channel 1 3 values ↓ Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection↓ Value 2: Value 3: Channel Signal 2 Channel Signal 3 Container 2 → Channel 2 define... Container 3 → Channel 3 absolute ↓ Net ↓ absolute ↓ Net ↓ First of all the channel names are specified. to return to set-up mode. 1. Use the shift key 2. Press . 3. Select ”Channel names” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . 4. Enter CONTAINER 1 in the ”Channel 1” edit field and confirm with . 5. Enter CONTAINER 2 in the ”Channel 2” edit field and confirm with . 6. Enter CONTAINER 3 in the ”Channel 3” edit field and confirm with 7. Press . . 8. Select ”Display format” from the pull-up menu and confirm with 9. Use to select 3 VALUES from the ”Type” selection field and confirm with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . . G-13 Display Ý Display format 10. Use to choose Selection from the ”Channels/Signals” selection field and confirm with . 11. Use to choose the ”define...” symbol and confirm with 12. Use to choose the ”Channel1/Net” control field and confirm with . (the control field displays n). 13. Use to select the key symbol ”OK” and confirm with 14. Use to choose the ”Value2:Channel” edit field and enter 2. 15. Select the ”Absolute/relative” selection field with ”absolute” and confirm with 16. Use . . to choose the ”Value3:Channel” edit field and enter 3. 18. Select the ”Absolute/relative” selection field with ”absolute” and confirm with 19. Use , select to choose the ”Signal” selection field, select ”Net” and confirm with 17. Use . , select . to choose the ”Signal” selection field, select ”Net” and confirm with . To return to measuring mode, press the shift key security prompt with and confirm the . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-14 Display Ý Display format Example 3: One force and one path are to be measured on each of two presses. The following assignment is to apply: Force on press 1 → Channel 1 Path for press 1 → Channel 2 Force on press 2 → Channel 3 Path for press 2 → Channel 4 A display with three values is required, for which a comparison of the same signals will have to be made between press 1 and press 2. Path P1 Store1 Path P2 Store1 Force P1 Store1 Force P2 Store1 Force P1 Store2 Force P2 Store2 First of all the channel names are specified. CHANNEL NAMES Channel1: Channel 2: Channel 3: Channel 4: Channel 5: Channel 6: Force P1 Path P1 Force P2 Path P2 to return to set-up mode. 1. Use the shift key 2. Press . 3. Select ”Channel names” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . . 4. Enter FORCE P1 in the ”Channel 1” edit field and confirm with 5. Enter PATH P1 in the ”Channel 2” edit field and confirm with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . G-15 Display Ý Display format Channel names 6. Enter FORCE P2 in the ”Channel 3” edit field and confirm with Channel 1: Channel 2: Channel 3: Channel 4: 7. Enter PATH P2 in the ”Channel 4” edit field and confirm with Force P1 Path P1 Force P2 Path P2 Display format 3 values 1 Screen No: Type: 8. Press . . . 9. Select ”Display format” from the pull-up menu and confirm with 3 values ↓ . Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection↓ Value 2: Value 3: Channel Signal 2 Channel Signal 3 define... Channel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 Cancel . absolute ↓ Net ↓ 11. Use absolute ↓ 12. Use All channels to select 3 VALUES from the ”Type” selection field and confirm with Net ↓ Select channel/signal OK 10. Enter 1 in the ”Number” edit field and confirm with All signals . to choose select from the ”Display format : Channels/Signals” selection field and confirm with . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 4 4 13. Use to choose the ”define...” symbol and confirm with 14. Use to choose the ”Channel2/Store1” control field and confirm with 15. Use with 16. Use . (the control field displays n). to choose the ”Channel4/Store1” control field and confirm (the control field displays n). to select the key symbol ”OK” and confirm with . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-16 Display Ý Display format Display Format 3 values 3 values ↓ 18. Use Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection↓ Value 2: Value 3: 17. Enter −1 in the ”Value 2: Channel” edit field and confirm with . 1 Screen No: Type: Channel Signal −1 Channel Signal −1 define... to select relative from the ”absolute/relative” selection field and confirm with . relative ↓ Store1 ↓ relative ↓ Store2 ↓ 19. Use to select Store1 from the ”Signal” selection field and confirm with . 20. Enter −1 in the ”Value 3: Channel” edit field and confirm with 21. Use to select relative from the ”absolute/relative” selection field and confirm with 22. Use . to select Store2 from the ”Signal” selection field and confirm with 23. Press shift key MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . . and confirm the security prompt with . G-17 Display Ý Display format 1.3.2 Graphic display YT-Diagram Type YT-Diagram This diagram is used to examine changes in measured values over time. Gross Sampling rate Signal sampling interval. Channels/Signals Set-up window Display Format YT-Diagram Screen No: Type: 0 ... YT-Diagram ↓ Sampling rate 1s↓ At this point you define which channels and signals are to be represented in the display. You can define your settings for all channels or just for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define... ). You can recall a maximum of six signals per channel one after the other. Define... The key symbol opens a new window Select channel/signal. Channels/Signals: Selection↓ YMax 100... % YMin −100... % define... MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-18 Display Ý Display format YMax Set-up window Display format YT-Diagram Maximum display value by reference to present Range 1 (in %). Screen No: Type: 0 ... YT-Diagram ↓ YMin Sampling rate 1s↓ Minimum display value by reference to present Range 1 (in %). Channels/Signals: all ↓ define... YMax 100... % YMin −100... % Present channel Present measurement signalPresent value YMax Gross Zero point y-Raster 1 division YMin y-Raster Scale MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Time raster Time raster 1 division Scale G-19 Display Ý Display format XY-Diagram Type XY-Diagram Gross Sampling rate Gross Signal sampling interval. Channels/Signals At this point you define which channels and signals are to be represented in the display. You can define your settings for all channels ). You can or just for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define... recall a maximum of six signals per channel one after the other. Define... Setup menu The key symbol opens a new window Select channel/signal. Screen DisplayNo: format XY-Diagram Type: 0 ... XY-Diagram ↓ Sampling rate: 1s↓ Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: all ↓ Value 2: define... XMax 100... % XMin −100... % Channel Signal 2 absolute ↓ Net ↓ YMax 100... % YMin −100... % MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-20 Display Ý Display format YMax Setup menu Display format XY-Diagram Screen No: Type: 0 ... XY-Diagram ↓ Sampling rate: 1s↓ YMin Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: all ↓ Value 2: define... XMax 100... % XMin −100... % Channel Signal absolute ↓ 2 Maximum value on the vertical axis by reference to the present measuring range (%). Net ↓ YMax 100... % YMin −100... % Minimum value on the vertical axis by reference to the present measuring range (%). XMax Maximum value on the horizontal axis by reference to the present measuring range (%). XMin Minimum value on the horizontal axis by reference to the present measuring range (%). Present channel Present measurement signal x-Raster Gross Scale YMax y-Raster 1 division x-Raster 1 division YMin XMin MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Gross XMax Present value (x) y-Raster Scale Present value (y) G-21 Display Ý Display format 1.4 Status limit switch Type: Status limit switch Title Any user-specific name; it appears in the header (factory setting ”Limit switch”). Title LIMIT SWITCH 1−ML30B Gross 1−Limit1 Below 10kN 1−Limit2 Below 20kN 1−Limit3 NOK 8.483 kN Status line 1 (base): channel At this point you define which channels and signals are to be displayed on the first status line. You can define your settings for all channels or ). You can just for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define... recall a maximum of six signals per channel one after the other. Measure Set-up window Display format Status limit switch Screen No: Type: 0 ... Status limit switch ↓ Title Limit switch Status line 1 (base): Channels/Signals: all ↓ define... Status line 2: Channel 2 LV 1↓ relativ to base ↓ Status line 3: Channel 2 1↓ LV absolute ↓ Status line 4: Channel 2 LV 1↓ absolute ↓ Define... The key symbol opens new Menu Select channel/signal. Absolute/relativ to base This setting lets you define whether a reference to the basic channel is produced. Absolute: The measured value and signal of the selected channel are displayed independently of the basic value. The number entered corresponds to the actual channel number. Changing channels has no effect. Relativ to base: The number entered refers to the basic channel. The basic channel number is 0. Channels to the left of the basic channel are entered with a negative sign and those to the right of it are entered with a positive sign. Caution: This value does not correspond to the actual (absolute) channel number! NOTE Enter the description of the limit switches in the menu. Options Limit switches MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-22 Display Ý Display format 1.5 Status data acquisition Type: Status data acquisition Bar chart This diagram shows the current state of data acquisition. Data acquisition comment Data acquisition comment Bar chart Test sequence 3 MEAS. RATE: 50Hz PERIODS: 100 TIME: 00: 00: 00 1 −4.0S 16.0S FILE NAME: MGCP0000.MEA Get DAQ1 120 MB FREE Acal User note (e.g. measurement sequence number). Measuring rate The current measuring rate for all the defined channels is shown here. Time Time elapsed since the start of the period. Periods Number of periods. File name Pre trigger Post trigger Name of the stored file. When you restart the program, the file is not overwritten, instead the counter (last four places) is incremented. xxx MB FREE: Current period Shows the amount of free memory on the hard disk. NOTE The MGCplus computer detects when the storage capacity on the hard disk falls below 1 MB. In this case, data acquisition is cancelle0d and the file is closed. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-23 Display Ý F-keys 2 F-keys 2.1 F-keys in measuring mode F-keys − Level 1 Function keys F1...F4 operate in both measuring mode and set-up mode. Gross Channel Measure −> 0 <− −> T <− 1st level −II− F-keys − Level 2 Acal Measure Unit ... F-keys − Level 3 Rem/Loc Limit_V In measuring mode you can switch between a total of 9 functions on three levels: Start/Stop F-key field ... ... • F1 Zeroing • F2 Tare • F3 Clear peak value store 2nd level • F1 Autocalibration • F2 Ident (import transducer characteristics) • F3 Switch display unit (see also page E-16) 3rd level • F1 Remote on/off • F2 LIV level • F3 Start/Stop Key assignment is freely selectable. The assignment listed above is the factory setting. Key F4 toggles between factory setting and the next level (...F-level). You can make the effect of functions apply to all channels or restrict it to one (of those selected). In measuring mode the current key assignment is displayed in the lower display line for all screen types. If you have set the function for all channels, this is indicated by the ... symbol in the upper right corner of the F-key field. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-24 Display Ý F-keys Function Effect Tare Taring is triggered. Zeroing A zero balance is carried out. Clear stores Clears the peak value store Zero/Cal/Measure Switches between the zero signal, the calibration signal and the measurement signal. Autocal Autocalibration is switched on or off. LED Status/Level Switches between the “Status” and “Level” LED displays. LIV level Call the ”LIV level” menu. Remote/Local Remote On/Off. Shunt On/Off Switches shunt (transducer, AP14) on or off. Start/Stop display The measured value currently being displayed is ”frozen” in the indicator (pause function). Print display Prints the current display (except for graphics). Print values Prints the current measured values. Print setup Prints the stored parameter sets. Load next P-set Reads the next parameter set from the amplifier(s) (1 to 8). Load previous P-set Reads the previous parameter set from the amplifier(s) (1 to 8). Switch display unit Switches between the native unit (mV/V), the user-defined unit (for instance kg) and the analogue output (V). Start/Stop integration Integration of peak values is switched on or off. Start/Stop data acquis. Data acquisition is switched on or off. Load data acquis. set Reads parameter sets from RAM (parameter set 0) or the hard disk (parameter sets 1 to 16). Load DAQ comments Reads data acquisition comments from hard disk. Linearization on/off Linearization of the transducers characteristic on/off Ident Imports transducer characteristic data Tab 2.1: Function key shortcuts MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-25 Display Ý F-keys Select setup window Set-up window F-Keys setup Level 1 1. Use the shift key Level to return to set-up mode. 1 ... F1: Tare ↓ F2: Zero/Cal/Measure ↓ One channel F3: Autocal ↓ One channel F4: ...F-level One channel ↓ 2. Press . 3. Select ”F-keys” from the pop-up menu and confirm with . You are now in the ”F-keys” set-up window. 1 2 3 not assigned Tare Zeroing Clear stores Zero/Cal/Measure Autocal LED Status/Level LIV level Remote/Local Shunt On/Off Start/Stop display Print display Print values Print setup Load from XM001 Load next P-set Load previous P-set Switch display unit Start/Stop integration Start/Stop data acquis. Load DAQ param. set Load DAQ comments One channel All channels MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-26 2.2 Password Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language Display System Display Ý F-keys F-keys in set-up mode In set-up mode use the function keys to call the pull-up menus from the menu bar. Amplifier MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Options G-27 Display Ý Channel names 3 Channel names Select set-up window Set-up window 1. Use the shift key Channel name Channel 3.1 2. Press to go to setup mode . 3. Select ”Channel names” from the pull-up menu and confirm with Channel name: System . Force ... Display Amplifier Options In the set-up window all existing channels have the factory specified channel names in the first instance. (e.g.: Empty edit fields indicate free card slots on your unit.) NOTE If you wish to apply a new description to an edit field that has already been described, you can delete the whole of the old entry using the clear key . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 G-28 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Display Ý Channel names H-1 H System MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-3 System Ý Password 1 Password You can protect all the settings on your unit with a password. In factory setting this password protection is disabled. Once password protection is activated, the password must be entered each time Setup mode is called (and whenever the unit is switched on again). Only then can the settings be changed. There is no need to enter a password just for measuring mode. Access authorisation is linked to the password: • System (all settings can be changed) • Operator (only enabled settings can be changed) You can define a password and access authorisation for a maximum of nine users. Important: When the equipment is in ex-factory status, password protection cannot be enabled until a new user with ”System” access authorisation has been defined. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-4 System Ý Password 1.1 Define new user 1. Use the shift key System Display Amplifier Options 2. Press to go to setup mode . 3. Select ”Password” from the pull-up menu and confirm with Password Save/Recall Data acquisition 4. Select the ”new” key symbol with Interface Print and confirm with . 6. Select the ”Password” edit field with confirm with Password new... Password: change... Access: set... delete... User: Password: Access: OK Operator Cancel Operator System MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 , enter your password and . 7. Choose the ”Access:” selection field with access authorisation and confirm with 8. Select the ”OK” key symbol with Add user . 5. Enter the new user names in the ”User:” edit field and confirm with Language Time User: . , select the required . and confirm with . H-5 System Ý Password 1.2 Enable password protection If you are already in the ”Password” setup window, go straight to point 4. Password User: new... Password: change... Access: set... delete... 1. Use the shift key 2. Press to return to set-up mode. . 3. Select ”Password” from the pull-up menu and confirm with 4. Select the ”set......” key symbol with . and confirm with . Authorisation of the operator System Display Amplifier Options Password Save/Recall Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time Display format F-keys Channel names Yes No No No No No No No No No Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue output Switch Remote contacts Limit switches Tie limit switches Peak value stores Version No No No No No No No No No No OK Cancel . 5. Press Off ↓ Password protection 6. Use to choose selection field ”Password protection” confirm with Off On On and . If the error message ”No user with System access” is displayed at this point, press the Cancel key Off and press to select to delete the error message. Use again. Press twice. You are now in the ”PASSWORD” setup window. Now define a user with system privileges, as described in Chap.1.1. 7. Press with (which takes you straight to the OK key) and confirm . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-6 System Ý Password 1.3 Set operator access Password User: new... Password: change... Access: set... delete... If you are already in the ”Password” setup window, go straight to point 4. 1. Use the shift key 2. Press to go to setup mode . 3. Select ”Password” from the pull-up menu and confirm with 4. Select the ”set...” key symbol with and confirm with . . Authorisation of the operator Off ↓ Password protection System Display Amplifier Options Password Save/Recall Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time Display format F-keys Channel names Yes No No No No No No No No No Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue output Switch Remote contacts Limit switches Tie limit switches Peak value stores Version No No No No No No No No No No OK Cancel MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 and confirm 5. Choose the required ”No/Yes” selection field with with . 6. Select the required set-up with 7. Press with and confirm with . (which takes you straight to the OK key) and confirm . To return to measuring mode, press the shift key security prompt with . and confirm the H-7 System Ý Password 1.4 Delete user If you are already in the ”Password” setup window, go straight to point 4. System Display Amplifier Options 1. Use the shift key 2. Press Password Save/Recall Data acquisition to return to set-up mode. . 3. Select ”Password” from the pull-up menu and confirm with Interface Print You are now in the ”Password” setup window. Language Time 4. Select the ”delete...” key symbol with 5. Use and confirm with . . to select the ”delete...” key symbol next to the required Password User: new... Password: change... Access: set... delete... user and confirm with 6. Press with . (which takes you straight to the OK key) and confirm . Delete user User1: Miller delete User2: Morgan delete delete User3: OK Cancel MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-8 System Ý Password 1.5 Change password If you are already in the ”Password” setup window, go straight to point 4. System Display Amplifier Options 1. Use the shift key to go to setup mode 2. Press Password Save/Recall Data acquisition 3. Select ”Password” from the pull-up menu and confirm with Interface Print You are now in the ”Password” setup window. Language Time 4. Select the ”change...” key symbol with . and confirm with 5. Enter the password in the ”New password” edit field and confirm Password with User: new... Password: change... Access: set... Change password New password: OK Cancel MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . delete... 6. Press with (which takes you straight to the OK key) and confirm . . System ➝ Save/Load H-9 2 Save/Load System Display Amplifier Options With the ”Save/Load” function you can save the current set-ups for the AB22A/AB32/CP42 or the amplifier plug-in modules (up to 8 parameter sets per channel), or load saved setups. You may use ”Factory setting” to load the ex-factory settings as delivered. You may even copy settings from one amplifier to another. Password Save/Load Data acquisition Volatile memory (8h) Interface Print Language RAM save Factory setting Time load EPROM Save/Load setup save load Factory setting Internal EEPROM (8 parameter sets) Permanent save Copy OK Load parameter Channel Param.set CP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 1 1 1 Automatically from disk 1 OK Cancel Save parameter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 Channel Param.set 1 1 1 CP 1 OK Cancel MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 System ➝ Save/Load H-10 Save parameter 1. Use the shift key to go to setup mode 2. Press 3. Select ”Save/Load” from the pull-up menu and confirm with . This takes you to the ”Save/Load setup” set-up window. 4. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use button and confirm with to choose the ”save” . 5. In the ”Param.set” check box, specify the channel number of the parameter set under which you want your settings to be saved and confirm with . 6. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use symbol ”OK” and confirm with . To return to measuring mode, press the shift key security prompt with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . to select the key and confirm the System ➝ Save/Load H-11 Load parameter 1. Use the shift key System Display Amplifier to return to set-up mode. Options 2. Press 3. Select ”Save/Load” from the pull-up menu and confirm with Password Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language button and confirm with to choose the ”load” . 5. In the ”Param.set” check box, specify under the channel number the parameter set with the settings you want to load and confirm with Save/Load setup save This takes you to the ”Save/Load setup” set-up window. 4. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use Time . load Factory setting . 6. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use Copy symbol ”OK” and confirm with OK to select the key . Load parameter Channel Param.set CP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 To return to measuring mode, press the shift key 1 1 1 and confirm the Automatically from disk 1 OK Cancel security prompt with . Automatically from disk 3 When the MGCplus is powered up or the hard disk is connected, the amplifier settings that are stored on the PCMCIA hard disk (CP42) are automatically loaded into a device that is switched on and standing by. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 System ➝ Save/Load H-12 Factory setting System Display Amplifier Options A new set-up window opens under ”Factory setting”, and you can then define whether all amplifiers or only particular ones are to be set to ex-factory status. You may also load the factory set-ups for the display and control panel (AB) and communications processor (CP). 1. Use the shift key to return to set-up mode. Password Save/Load Data acquisition 2. Press Interface Print Language 3. Select ”Save/Load” from the pull-up menu and confirm with This takes you to the ”Save/Load setup” set-up window. Time 4. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use ”Factory setting” button and confirm with Save/Load setup save load . to choose the . Factory setting to select the required 5. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use channels (or even AB, CP) from control fields 1 to 16 and confirm Copy with labelled (a tick appears in the selection box). With the button All select all the control fields at once. OK 6. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use Load factory setup AB CP symbol ”OK” and confirm with to select the key . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 All OK Cancel To return to measuring mode, press the shift key security prompt with MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 . and confirm the System ➝ Save/Load H-13 Copy setup System Display Amplifier Options Some or all of the settings can be sent as required from one channel to another (or to several). The ”Copy” button is used for this. 1. Use the shift key Password to return to set-up mode. 2. Press Save/Load Data acquisition 3. Select ”Save/Load” from the pull-up menu and confirm with This takes you to the ”Save/Load setup” set-up window. Interface Print Language Time 4. Use . 5. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use to select the number of the channel from which you want to copy the setups and confirm Save/Load setup save to choose the ”Copy” button and confirm with . load Factory setting with . Copy 6. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use to select from control fields 1 to 16 the required channels from which you want to import OK settings and confirm with (a tick appears in the selection box). If you wish to accept settings from all channels, select the ”All” Copy setup Copy from channel: 1↓ button and confirm with . to amplifier channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 All Whole setup Remote contacts Limit switches Peak values Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs OK 7. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use to select from the vertical control fields the channels from which you want to import settings, and confirm with (a tick appears in the selection box). Cancel 8. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use symbol ”OK” and confirm with . To return to measuring mode, press the shift key security prompt with to select the key and confirm the . MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-14 System Ý Data acquisition 3 Recording measurement series With MGCplus, to record measurement series, you can configure and save up to 17 data acquisition programs (16 on the hard disk). PC card harddisk Saved data is stored in the RAM of communications processor CP42, or on its PC card harddisk (optional). The following types of harddisks are supported: CP42 RS 232 CARDBUS • • USB DEVICE • USB HOST ETHERNET Harddisk type ATA standard, Type 2 (narrow design, approx. 5 mm thick) The maximum capacity is in principle not limited. At the moment the PC card harddisks up to 5 GB have been tested. Formatted in FAT-16 or FAT-32 data systems. Other data systems (e.g. NTFS) are not supported. As the data rates of these hard disks are generally limited to 1 MB/s, a maximum of 13 channels of the MGCplus in 4 byte format with a maximum measurement rate of 19.2 kHz can be recorded. YE SLAVE RD ERROR GN MASTER IN CAUTION SYNC CTRL I/O OUT 24V 1 2 GND 1 2 OUT IN Avoid electrostatic discharge! The PCMCIA hard disk might be damaged by static discharge. Touch a grounded object before installation or wear an approved grounding wristband. To set the measurement series parameters, use either display and control panel AB22A/AB32, or the PC software HBM MGCplus Assistant. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-15 System Ý Data acquisition 3.1 Setting the measurement series parameters Select setup window 1. Use the shift key System Display Amplifier to return to set-up mode. Options 2. Press the function key , use the cursor keys to select ”Data acquisition” and confirm with . Data acquisition Measuring rate/interval Required measuring rate (above 1Hz select in Hz) or measuring interval (below 1Hz select in seconds) for all the defined channels. DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS 50Hz ↓ Measuring rate/interval: Values: 1000 ... Periods: 20.00 s... ↓ Time: Number of values to be measured per period. 10 ... Channels/Signals: Trigger: define... Length of the period in seconds, minutes or hours. define... 20.00 % ... Start condition: Immediate ↓ Stop condition: Number of values ↓ NOTE file on HD ↓ MGCP0000.MEA ... File name: change ↓ DAQ comments: 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB ↓ Format: Reduction factor: 480 1 save Values and Time affect each other. If you define the number of values for a given period, the time will be calculated and vice versa. Periods Number of periods. If zero is selected here, once the period is started by an F-key, it will be repeated endlessly. No ↓ Auto start: Param. set: Time Time stamp: Pre trigger: Save to: Values read Example: s min h 50 values 1sec 1000 values t 20sec Period 1 20sec Period 2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-16 System Ý Data acquisition Time stamp System Display Amplifier Options If time stamp is selected ( the files. ), two additional time columns appear in Example: You have selected: Channel 2: Gross; Channel 4: Net, Store1; and Time stamp. Password Save/Recall Data acquisition Interface Print Language File name: Channel2 Gross Time Channel4 Net Channel4 Store1 Time stamp 1 Carry Time stamp DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS Measuring rate/interval: 1: 2400 Hz ↓ Values: 1000 ... Periods: 50Hz ↓ 2: 2400 Hz ↓ 100 Hz ↓ 3: 20.00 s... ↓ Time: 1000 ... Channels/Signals: define... Trigger: define... Time stamp: Pre trigger: 20.00 % ... Start condition: Immediate ↓ Stop condition: Number of values ↓ No ↓ OK Param.set: Cancel save 0 If several ( 2) signals are chosen for a channel (e.g Gross and Net), the maximum measuring rate is reduced to 2400 Hz! all channels read Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 Gross Net Store1 Store2 Comb.PV Remote MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Select channels and signals (Gross, Net Store1, Store2) for the current measurement series. With “all channels”, all channels are activated and deactivated and the signal selection from the first column is retained. NOTE file on HD ↓ Save to: Channel select Auto start: Channels/Signals8 2400Hz H-17 System Ý Data acquisition Trigger function DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS 50Hz ↓ Measuring rate/interval: Values: 1000 ... Periods: 20.00 s... ↓ Time: Three types of trigger are available: 10 ... Channels/Signals: define... Trigger: define... Time stamp: 20.00 % ... Start condition: Immediate ↓ Stop condition: Number of values ↓ 3. Measuring rate trigger (with Start and Stop) A Start or Stop condition (Trigger condition) can be: file on HD ↓ MGCP0000.MEA ... File name: change ↓ DAQ comments: 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB ↓ Format: Reduction factor: Param. set: No ↓ save 1 • a measurement level • a limit switch • a measurement band • an external input signal These Start/Stop conditions can be defined independently and combinated together. The functions AND or OR are available for this (also see page H-19): 480 Auto start: 1. Start trigger (with a maximum of four trigger conditions) 2. Stop trigger (with a maximum of four trigger conditions) Pre trigger: Save to: If you want to use the Trigger function, you must first define the trigger conditions. read Example STARTTr. 1 STARTTr. 2 STARTTr. 3 STARTTr. 4 OR STOP-T r. 1 STOP-T r. 2 STOP-T r. 3 AND STOP-T r. 4 Define Trigger conditions OR combination defines Start trigger AND combination defines event Stop trigger event Setup Measure Pre trigger Time Get DAQ (F-key) Start DAQ Data acquisition of a period Initialise Trigger measurement DAQ= Data acquisition program MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-18 System Ý Data acquisition In the example on page H-17, the Start condition could be defined as: Start-Trigger 1 Start-Trigger 2 Start-Trigger 3 Start-Trigger 4 Stop-Trigger 1 Stop-Trigger 2 Stop-Trigger 3 Stop-Trigger 4 Start-Meas.rate-Trg. Stop-Meas.rate-Trg. start measurement if force higher than 5 kN or if pressure lower than 5 bar or if the temperature is higher than 22oC Start-Trigger 1 Define trigger Trigger: Start-Trigger 1 ↓ Type: Off ↓ Channel: 1↓ Mode: higher ↓ Level: 0.000000% ... Define trigger This is where you define whether data acquisition starts immediately or whether a particular trigger event starts or stops data acquisition. Signal: OK Gross ↓ 0.000000% ... Cancel Trigger You can set up to four different Start and Stop triggers and one ”measuring rate trigger”. Measuring rate trigger The Start-Meas.rate-Trigger changes the measuring rate when the trigger event occurs. Example: Off Measurement level Measurement band Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 External trigger MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 The Trigger event will cause a switch from long-term measurement (e.g. measuring interval = 10000 sec) to dynamic measurement (e.g. measuring rate = 1200 Hz). Setting the trigger functions of the des CP22/CP42 digital inputs via the display and control units AB22A, ABX22A or AB32 is not possible. H-19 System Ý Data acquisition Mode Start-Trigger 1 Start-Trigger 2 Start-Trigger 3 Start-Trigger 4 Stop-Trigger 1 Stop-Trigger 2 Stop-Trigger 3 Stop-Trigger 4 Start-Meas.rate-Trg. Stop-Meas.rate-Trg. Off: Trigger inactive Measurement level: Trigger: Start-Trigger 1 ↓ Type: Off ↓ Channel: 1↓ Mode: higher ↓ Level: 0.000000% ... Trigger condition initiated by measurement signal when over or below level value. Example: Signal: lower higher ↓ Measurement level: Start-Trigger 1 Define trigger OK Configure the Start/Stop conditions. Gross ↓ Level 0.000000% ... Cancel Time Start of the data acquisition program Condition met Example: Off Measurement level Measurement band Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 External trigger Measurement level: higher Level Time Start of the data acquisition program Condition met MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-20 System Ý Data acquisition Measurement band: Start-Trigger 1 Start-Trigger 2 Start-Trigger 3 Start-Trigger 4 Stop-Trigger 1 Stop-Trigger 2 Stop-Trigger 3 Stop-Trigger 4 Start-Meas.rate-Trg. Stop-Meas.rate-Trg. Trigger condition initiated by measurement signal when over or below band limits. The band lies between “Level 1” and “Level 2”. Measurement band: outside ↓ Example: inside Start-Trigger 1 Define trigger Trigger: Start-Trigger 1 ↓ Type: Off ↓ Channel: 1↓ Mode: higher ↓ Level: 0.000000% ... Level 2 Signal: OK Gross ↓ Level 1 Time 0.000000% ... Cancel Start of the data acquisition program Condition met Example: Measurement band: inside Off Measurement level Measurement band Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 External trigger Level 2 Level 1 Time Start of the data acquisition program MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Condition met H-21 System Ý Data acquisition Start-Trigger 1 Start-Trigger 2 Start-Trigger 3 Start-Trigger 4 Stop-Trigger 1 Stop-Trigger 2 Stop-Trigger 3 Stop-Trigger 4 Start-Meas.rate-Trg. Stop-Meas.rate-Trg. Start-Trigger 1 Define trigger Trigger: Start-Trigger 1 ↓ Type: Off ↓ Channel: 1↓ Mode: higher ↓ Level: 0.000000% ... OK Limit1-Limit4: The trigger is initiated by a limit switch (High: LED on, data acquisition program starts; Low: LED off). External trigger: Trigger initiated by an external signal (remote contact 7 on the connection board). Channel Source channel for the trigger definitions. Signal: Gross ↓ 0.000000% ... Signal Source signal for the trigger definitions. Cancel Off Measurement level Measurement band Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 External trigger MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-22 System Ý Data acquisition 1↓ Mode: higher ↓ Level: 0.000000% ... Signal: 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 Cancel high, low; low External trigger high, low; low high; high high; high ↓ Limit switches ↓ inside; outside; outside lower inside; inside low low outside Example: higher The trigger condition is met if the measurement signal is higher than the trigger level. Level 1 ↓ ↓ Measurement band higher; higher 0.000000% ... OK higher lower lower higher Gross ↓ higher; lower; lower ↓ Channel: Mode Measurement level ↓ Off ↓ Type ↓ Type: The trigger type set will determine the different edges you can set: ↓ Trigger: Start-Trigger 1 ↓ Use Mode to define when a trigger condition is met. ↓ Start-Trigger 1 Define trigger Mode ↓ Gross Net Store1 Store2 higher lower Off Measurement level Measurement band Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 External trigger MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Level 2 Level The level determines the difference value, for comparing with the measurement signal. 0, 1 or 2 trigger levels are active, depending on the trigger type set. Type which level is significant?.. Measurement level level 1 only Measurement band level 1 and level 2 Limit switches − External trigger − H-23 System Ý Data acquisition Pre trigger: System Display Amplifier Options The Pre trigger input field establishes how many values are recorded before the trigger event (dividing measurement recording into a Pre trigger range and a Post trigger range). The entry refers to the “Values” input field in the setup dialogue. Example: Password Values: 1200 Save/Recall Data acquisition Pre trigger: 20 % Interface Print Language 120 values are recorded in the Pre trigger range and 1200−120 = 1080 values are recorded in the Post trigger range. Time 4 DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS Values: 1200 ... Periods: Time: 4.0 define... Trigger: define... Start condition: Immediate ↓ Stop condition: Number of values ↓ file on HD ↓ Reduction factor: Immediate: Ignore Start trigger. Data acquisition starts immediately. AND-combined: All Start conditions must be met, to start data acquisition. OR-combined: Data acquisition starts if one of the start conditions is met. MGCP0000.MEA ... change ↓ DAQ comments Format: Time 4 sec Start condition: 20.00 % ... File name: Pre trigger in %: Time stamp: Pre trigger: Save to: s... ↓ 1 ... Channels/Signals: 3.2 sec −0.8 sec 300Hz ↓ Measuring rate/interval: Post trigger 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB ↓ 480 Auto start: No ↓ Number of values Param. set: save 1 Trigger AND-combined Trigger OR-combined read Immediate Trigger AND-combined Trigger OR-combined NOTE If only 1 trigger is on (e.g. Start-Trigger 1), you must select AND/OR (although a combination is not possible). MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-24 System Ý Data acquisition Stop condition: System Display Amplifier Options Password Number of values: Measurement ends, if the given number (entered under “Values”) of values is reached. AND-combined: All Stop conditions must be met, to end data acquisition. OR-combined: Data acquisition ends, if one of the Stop conditions is met. Save/Recall Data acquisition Save to: Interface Print Language file on HD: Time NOTE DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS 300Hz ↓ Measuring rate/interval: Values: 1200 ... Periods: Time: 4.0 define... Trigger: define... Time stamp: Pre trigger: 20.00 % ... Start condition: Immediate ↓ Stop condition: Number of values ↓ Save to: File name: Several files: Save to several files on the hard disk of the MGCplus (max. 999). If you compress the file, only one file will be created Internal RAM: Save to internal RAM of CP42 If you have chosen “Save to file on HD”, allocate the file name here. change ↓ 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB ↓ Reduction factor: Auto start: Re-starting the measurement program does not overwrite the file, instead it increments the counter in the file name (the first four letters are retained, the last four are incremented). File name: file on HD ↓ MGCP0000.MEA ... DAQ comments Format: s... ↓ 1 ... Channels/Signals: Save to one file on the hard disk of MGCplus. Enter the name under “File name”. 480 NOTE No ↓ Param. set: save 1 Number of values Trigger AND−combined Trigger OR−combined read Immediate Trigger AND−combined Trigger OR−combined MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Measurement files larger than 2 GB can not be operated on PCs with the Windows) operating system. The CP42 communication processor closes files with a file size of 2 GB and then continues recording in a new file. H-25 System Ý Data acquisition Data acquisition comment System Display Amplifier Options You may assign any comment you like to a data acquisition. Comments can be viewed when the “Data acquisition” type is showing in the upper left part of the display. Data acquisition comment: Change You may change an existing comment, that is, you may enter new or amended information. Password Save/Recall Data acquisition Data acquisition comment: Select Interface Print Language You can select from the comments stored on the PCMCIA hard disk (see also page G-23, “Load data acquisition comment”). Time Format Subsequent processing of the values determines the data acquisition format. You can select three different formats: 4 Byte INT, 2 Byte INT and 4 Byte FLOAT. DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS 50Hz ↓ Measuring rate/interval: Values: 1000 ... Periods: 20.00 s... ↓ Time: 10 ... Channels/Signals: define... Trigger: define... Time stamp: NOTE Pre trigger: 20.00 % ... Start condition: Immediate ↓ Stop condition: Number of values ↓ file on HD ↓ Save to: MGCP0000.MEA ... File name: change ↓ DAQ comments: 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB ↓ Format: Reduction factor: 480 No ↓ Auto start: Param. set: HBM Software packages such as MGCplus Wizard or catman can automatically detect all three formats and scale the values accordingly. If an accuracy of 32767 parts (i.e. measuring range divided into 32767 parts) is sufficient for your data acquisition, the 2 Byte INT format is advisable, as it only needs half as much storage space as the two other formats. 1 save read MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-26 System Ý Data acquisition Reduction factor System Display Amplifier Options When you activate data reduction ( ), an additional data set is created on the PCMCIA hard disk during data acquisition. This data set does not store all measured values, but only the extreme values (Min/Max) recorded at specified intervals. The interval is determined by the reduction factor in relation to the measuring rate used. Password Save/Recall Data acquisition You may input a reduction factor in the range 480 to 32767. Interface Print Language Example: MEAS. RATE: 2400 Hz Time Reduction factor: 480 2400 Hz 5 Hz ^ 200 ms interval 480 DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS 50Hz ↓ Measuring rate/interval: Values: 1000 ... Periods: 20.00 s... ↓ Time: 10 ... Channels/Signals: define... Trigger: define... Time stamp: NOTE Pre trigger: 20.00 % ... Start condition: Immediate ↓ Stop condition: Number of values ↓ A reduced data set can only be created if only one signal is being acquired per channel (Select Gross/Net/Store1/Store2, see page H-16). file on HD ↓ Save to: MGCP0000.MEA ... File name: change ↓ DAQ comments: 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB ↓ Format: Reduction factor: 480 No ↓ Auto start: Param. set: Extreme values will be recorded at 200 ms intervals (acquisition rate 5 Hz). 1 save MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 read System Ý Data acquisition H-27 . . . format: Reading a CP42 file You must know the internal file format to be able to read and interpret the data in the file. A CP42 file is a binary file, with the following structure: The following header data precedes the actual data area: File ID (4 Byte LONG) // currently = 6001 Channel values (4 Byte LONG) Length of a data row (i.e. one value for all channels/signals) in bytes (4 Byte LONG) Values of data rows (i.e. values/channel) in the file (4 Byte LONG) Data format used to save the values ( 4 Byte LONG) Measuring rate used for recording (4 Byte LONG) Size of the header area in bytes (4 Byte LONG) // currently = 512 Reserved (4 Byte LONG) Followed, for each channel, by: Channel number (4 Byte LONG) Scaling info: measuring range MR (4 Byte FLOAT) Scaling info: Offset (zero offset) OS (4 Byte FLOAT) Unit (4 Byte CHARACTER) Signal mask (4 Byte LONG) The signal mask specifies how many values appear in the data row for each channel: Bit 0 set: GROSS signal Bit 1 set: NET signal Bit 2 set: Peak value 1 Bit 3 set: Peak value 2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-28 System Ý Data acquisition This means that a maximum of 4 successive values may be displayed for each individual channel. This channel block is followed by information on date and time: TimeDate (30 Byte CHARACTER) The subsequent bytes to the end of the header area are reserved for future use and can be omitted. They are followed, data row by data row (in the example, we assume that Bit 0 (Gross) and Bit 2 (Peak value 1) are set), by the values: C1, 1 (Gross) C1: Channel 1 C1, 1 (PV1) C2, 1 (Gross) C2, 1 (PV 1) ________________________________ New data row C1, 2 (Gross) C1, 2 (PV 1) C2, 2 (Gross) C2, 2 (PV 1) Each value (measurement) occupies 4 bytes (data formats 1253=LONG and 1257=FLOAT) or 2 bytes (data format 1255=INT). Integer formats are stored in INTEL (TM) format, i.e. MSB −> LSB. The data format used for recording will determine how the source values are re-scaled for each channel: 1253 (LONG): physical value = (binary source value) / (256*7680000) * MR + OS 1255 (INT): physical value = (binary source value) * 256 / 7680000) * MR + OS 1257 (FLOAT): physical value = (binary source value) MR: measuring range OS: offset NOTE the 1253 LONG format includes status information in the least significant byte. To call this status, you should check this byte, before (!) you scale, as dividing by 256 will cause the least significant byte to be lost. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-29 System Ý Data acquisition The structure of the Status byte is given below: Bit 0: Output of LIV 1 active, if set Bit 1: Output of LIV 2 active, if set Bit 2: Output of LIV 3 active, if set Bit 3: Output of LIV 4 active, if set Bit 4: Gross signal overflow, if set Bit 5: Net signal overflow, if set Bit 6: Calibration error, if set Bit 7: Amplifier settings changed during measurement (e.g. by remote control), if set MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-30 System Ý Data acquisition Auto start: System Display Amplifier Options NOTE You can store and recall all the settings (Start/Stop conditions etc.,) in a data acquisition parameter set. To be able to use the parameter set, you must assign two Function keys: Password Save/Recall Data acquisition a) Assign the function “Recall data acquisition parameters” to one Function key. Press the F-key to recall the parameter set. Interface Print Language Time b) Assign the function “Start/Stop data acquisition” ( ) to a second Function key. Press the F-key to start the data acquisition program. DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS 50Hz ↓ Measuring rate/interval: Values: 1000 ... Periods: 20.00 s... ↓ Time: 10 ... Channels/Signals: define... Trigger: define... Time stamp: Pre trigger: 20.00 % ... Start condition: Immediate ↓ Stop condition: Number of values ↓ file on HD ↓ Save to: MGCP0000.MEA ... File name: 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB ↓ Reduction factor: Param. set: 480 No ↓ Auto start: 1 YES: After the data acquisition parameter set has been recalled data acquisition starts automatically. A second Function key is not needed. NO: After the data acquisition parameter set has been recalled a second Function key must be used to start data acquisition ( ). change ↓ DAQ comments: Format: The Auto start function defines what happens after a data acquisition parameter set has been recalled. save MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 read Param.set: You can enter parameter set numbers between 0 and 16 (0: parameter set is stored in the CP42 Flash-PROM; 1 − 16: parameter set is stored on the MGCplus hard disk). Numbers must first be assigned, for the next highest to be displayed. H-31 System Ý Data acquisition Save Data acquisition parameters are stored in the chosen parameter set. System Display Amplifier Options You can store up to 16 measurement value data acquisition programs on the MGCplus hard disk. Recall Password Save/Recall Data acquisition A data recording configuration, stored under a ParamSetNo., will be imported into the MGCplus. You can then view this data acquisition parameter set, or change it and re-save it, as required. Interface Print Language Time DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS 50Hz ↓ Measuring rate/interval: Values: 1000 ... Periods: 20.00 s... ↓ Time: 10 ... Channels/Signals: define... Trigger: define... Time stamp: Pre trigger: 20.00 % ... Start condition: Immediate ↓ Stop condition: Number of values ↓ file on HD ↓ Save to: MGCP0000.MEA ... File name: change ↓ DAQ comments: 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB ↓ Format: Reduction factor: Param. set: 480 No ↓ Auto start: 1 save read MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-32 System Ý Interface 4 Interface Use the ”Interface (Schnittstelle)” function to set up the characteristics of the interfaces: System Display Amplifier Options S Baud rate S Format (word length, parity, stop bit) S Device address Password The CP42 communication processor provides you with RS232, USB and Ethernet interfaces as standard. Save/Recall Data acquisition Interface Print Language Example 1: RS232 Format: 8N2 (meaning 8 bits, no parity, 2 stop bits) Time Example 2: The IP addresses and the net mask Interface setup 3 RS232 ... Ethernet ... USB ... IEC ... AB locked during computer control RS232 setup Baudrate: 9600 Baud ↓ Format: 8E1 ↓ OK Ethernet cancel MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 An IP address always consists of 4 numbers. Each number must be in the range 1 to 254. Absolute exceptions are the numbers 127.x.x.x and 192.168.x.x. The first of these always designates the local host, i.e. your own machine. The numbers 192.168.x.x refer to special IP addresses which are not forwarded over a router. Thus if a network is numbered 192.168.x.x this automatically ensures that the network cannot be accessed from outside. The net mask can be used to determine and define which nodes form part of the in-house network. This net mask uses a bit pattern to indicate where the network ends and the computers in the network begin. H-33 System Ý Interface Examples: System Display Amplifier Options IP: 192.168.001.001 Mask: 255.255.255.000 This refers to a network with the number 192.168.1 and computer number 1 within that network IP: 206.001.210.124 Mask: 255.255.000.000 Password Save/Recall Data acquisition This refers to a network with the number 206.1 and the computer with the number 210.124 Interface Print Language Time Interface setup RS232 ... Ethernet ... USB ... IEC ... 3 Networks are divided into classes. Net mask 255.000.000.000 designated a Class A network. A total of 16,581,375 different computers can be included in this network. In the case of 255.255.0.0 there are still 65,025. This is called a Class B network. The most usual form of network is known as Class C. This has the net mask 255.255.255.0 and makes up some 99 % of all the commonly encountered networks. Up to 254 computers can be connected together. AB locked during computer control Ethernet setup Adress: 192.168.169.134 SubNetMask: 255.255.255.0 Routeradress: 0.0.0.0 OK cancel MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-34 System Ý Interface Router If data packets are sent via node points, e.g. from the in-house network to the Internet or a WAN/LAN, a router is needed. This distributes data packets in different directions on the basis of their addresses. Routers are computers that have been specially designed for this purpose, and have their own operating system. It is their task to analyze millions of IP packets, read their headers and then forward them in the right direction. IP address Subnet mask Router A address Computer Computer Ethernet Router A Worldwide Computer Computer Ethernet MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Computer Router B H-35 System Ý Interface If you use a router to access an MGCplus measuring amplifier system from your PC, the address of its router must be specified in the MGC. System Display Amplifier Options Direct Ethernet connection between a PC and MGCplus Cross cable Password Save/Recall Data acquisition Computer Interface Print Language MGCplus Time This is by far the most common type of connection. It requires a ”crossed patch cable”, also known as a ”cross cable” for short. Interface setup RS232 ... Ethernet ... USB ... IEC ... 3 AB locked during computer control When connecting an MGCplus to a PC through a hub, you need to use a patch cable. As delivered, the Ethernet interface for your CP42 is configured as follows: Ethernet setup Adress: 192.168.169.134 SubNetMask: 255.255.255.0 Routeradress: 0.0.0.0 OK If your computer has an IP address of, say, 172.34.24.13, your MGCplus should have the IP address 172.34.24.x (x≠13, x≠255) if you are using a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. cancel IP address = 192.168.169.134 Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0 Router = 0.0.0.0 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-36 System Ý Interface IEEE 488 − Settings Adress: 4 card type: NI PCMCIA − GPIB OK IEC Settings for the IEC−bus connection with a PCMCIA−GPIB−card (PCMCIA−GPIB, NI−488.2). cancel Display and control panel in computer operating mode The display and control panel may be disabled whilst the computer is operating (factory setting) or can be active. In disabled mode only status information and measured values are updated. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-37 System Ý Print 5 Print System Display Amplifier Options Use the ”Print” function to print out the settings for the AB22A/AB32 or the amplifier module and measured values. You can specify the required channels and signals for printing out the measured values under ”Selection”. 1. Use the shift key to switch to the settings mode. Password 2. Print Save/load Recording 3. In the Pull-Up-menu select ”Print” and confirm with Interface Print Language You will then be in the ”Print” settings window. 4. In the selection field, select ”Print via:” the required interface and Time confirm with . . A new settings window is opened under ”Format...”, where the print format can be set. PRINT Print settings via: USB ↓ AB Amplifier Format... . A new settings window is opened under ”Selection...”. Selection... 6. Use OK Gross Net SPW 1 SPW 2 SPW 12 GW Status to select the device with which the settings should be printed out (AB or amplifier) and confirm with Settings for signals to be printed SIGNAL PRINTING SELECTION 5. Use Channel 3 OK to select the buttons whose settings are to be printed out. Confirm with 7. Use (nappears in the selection field). to select the button ”OK” and confirm with . Abort All signals MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-38 System Ý Language 6 Language Use this function to select the language for the display, the menus and the Help texts. System Display Amplifier Password Save/Recall Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time LANGUAGE Language: English↓ English Deutsch Francais MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Options H-39 System Ý Time 7 Time Use this function to set the date, the day and the time. System Display Amplifier Options Password Save/Recall Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time DATE/TIME SET-UP Date: Day ... Day: Friday ↓ Time Hour ... Month ↓ Min ... Year ... Sec ... MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 H-40 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 System Ý Time I-1 I Menu structure MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 I-2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 I-3 Menu structure The menu structure shown below is intended to help you find the set-up menus you are looking for more quickly. At the same time the necessary sequence of keys is specified for you. Structural components F-key assignment in measuring mode (output status) This key takes you to the first selection menu Selection bar or A The lines in the pull-up menu are displayed in tiled format. If a menu does not fit on a page, it is divided. The letters in circles guide you to the next page. Set-up window ↓ Selection field MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 I-4 Menu structure Symbols mV/V ↓ Selection field 0.000000... Edit field measure measure... Button (starts action) Button (opens new set-up window) Activation fields Cursor keys Arrows show the direction in which the keys work MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 I-5 Menu structure Measure System Display Amplifier Options or A Password Password new... User: Password: delete... change... set... Access: Authorisation of the operator Off ↓ Password protection System Display Amplifier Options Password Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time Display format F-keys Channel names Yes No No No No No No No No No Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch Remote contacts Limit switches Combine LIV Peak value stores Version No No No No No No No No No No OK Add user Change password User: New password: OK Delete user Password: Cancel Access: OK Operator Cancel User1: Miller delete User2: Morgan delete delete User3: Operator System OK Cancel Cancel MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 I-6 Menu structure Measure System Display Amplifier Options or or A B Save/Load Save/Load setup Save... Load... Factory setup... Copy OK Load parameter Channel Param.set CP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 1 1 1 Automatically from disk 1 OK Cancel Copy setup Load factory setup Copy from channel: 1↓ AB CP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 to amplifier channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 All Whole setup Remote contacts Limit switches Peak values Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs OK Save parameter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 Channel Param.set 1 1 1 CP 1 OK MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Cancel Cancel All OK Cancel I-7 Menu structure Measure System Display Amplifier Options or or B C Data acquisition Data acquisition parameters Measuring rate/interval: 1: 2400 Hz ↓ 2: 2400 Hz ↓ 3: 100 Hz ↓ 20.00 s... ↓ Values: 1000 ... Time: Periods: 10 ... Channels/Signals: define... Trigger: Time stamp: define... s min h 1Hz 150Hz 10000s 2Hz 160Hz 5000s 3Hz 200Hz 2000s 4Hz 240Hz 1000s 5Hz 300Hz 500s 6Hz 400Hz 200s 8Hz 480Hz 100s Pre trigger: Start condition: 20.00 % ... Immediate ↓ 10Hz 600Hz 50s 15Hz 1200Hz 20s Stop condition: Number of values ↓ 20Hz 2400Hz 10s file on HD ↓ 25Hz 4800Hz 5s 30Hz 9600Hz 2s Save to: MGCP0000.MEA ... File name: change ↓ Acq. comment: 48Hz 50Hz 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB ↓ Format: Reduction factor: 1 save 60Hz 75Hz No ↓ Auto start: Param. set: 480 80Hz load 100Hz 120Hz Channel select OK Cancel all channels Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 Gross Net Store1 Store2 Comb.PV 2400Hz 4 Byte Integer MSB .. LSB 4 Byte Integer LSB..MSB 2 Byte Integer MSB..LSB 2 Byte Integer LSB..MSB 4 Byte Float MSB..LSB 4 Byte Float LSB..MSB Immediate Trigger AND-combined Trigger OR-combined Number of values Trigger AND-combined Trigger OR-combined Remote MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 I-8 Menu structure Measure System Display Amplifier Options or or C D Data acquisition Data acquisition parameters Measuring rate/interval: 1: 2400 Hz ↓ 2: 2400 Hz ↓ 20.00 s... ↓ Values: 1000 ... Time: Periods: 10 ... Channels/Signals: define... Trigger: 3: 100 Hz ↓ Time stamp: define... Pre trigger: Start condition: 20.00 % ... Immediate ↓ Stop condition: Number of values ↓ file on HD ↓ Save to: change ↓ Acq. comment: 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB ↓ Format: Reduction factor: 480 No ↓ Auto start: Param. set: Define trigger Trigger: save 1 No Yes load Start-Trigger 1 Start-Trigger 1 ↓ Off ↓ 1↓ Signal: Gross ↓ higher ↓ ↓ ↓ higher lower lower higher file on HD internal RAM MGCP0000.MEA ... File name: 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 higher lower MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 s min h 0.000000% ... OK 0.000000% ... Cancel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Off Measurement level Measurement band LIV1 LIV2 LIV3 LIV4 External trigger Start-Trigger 1 Start-Trigger 2 Start-Trigger 3 Start-Trigger 4 Stop-Trigger 1 Stop-Trigger 2 Stop-Trigger 3 Stop-Trigger 4 Start-Meas.rate-Trg. Stop-Meas.rate-Trg. I-9 Menu structure Measure System Display Amplifier Options or or D E Interface Interface setup RS232... Ethernet... USB... 3 AB locked during computer control OK Ethernet-setup OK USB-setup Address: CP42p 00002 OK Cancel Address: 172.20.14.182 SubNetMask: 255.255.0.0 Router address: 0.0.0.0 OK Cancel RS232-setup Baud rate: 9600 Baud ↓ Format: 8E1 ↓ OK Cancel 8N1 801 8E1 8N2 802 8E2 300 Baud 600 Baud 1200 Baud 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19200 Baud 38400 Baud 57600 Baud MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 I-10 Menu structure Measure System Display Amplifier Options or E Print RS232 ↓ Print setup through : or AB Language Date/Time setup Language: English ↓ Date: Amplifier Setup of the signals to be printed Select... English Deutsch Francaise OK Select signals for printout Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 LIV-Status Channel 3 OK Cancel All signals MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Time Language Print RS232 RS485 Printer Day ... Day: Friday ↓ Time Hour ... Month ↓ Min ... Year ... Sec ... I-11 Menu structure Measure System Display Amplifier Options or or Display format Display Format one value 0 ... one value ↓ Screen No: Type: Channels/Signals: all ↓ Off ↓ Status line define... Off On all Selection Select channel/signal OK Channel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 LIV1 LIV2 LIV3 LIV4 Cancel All channels Channel names F-keys All signals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 0...9 free one value 3 values 6 values YT-Diagram XY-Diagram Status limit switch Data acquisition F-keys setup Level Level 1 1 ... F1: Tare ↓ F2: Zero/Cal/Measure↓ One channel F3: Autocal ↓ One channel One channel ↓ F4: ...F-level not assigned Tare Zeroing Clear stores Zero/Cal/Measure Autocal LED Status/Level LIV level Remote/Local Shunt On/Off Start/Stop display Print display Print values Print setup Load from XM001 Load next P-set Load previous P-set Switch display unit Start/Stop integration Start/Stop data acquis. Load DAQ param. set Load DAQ comments Linearisation on/off Ident Channel Name Channel 1 Channel name: 2−ML55B 1 2 3 One channel All channels MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 I-12 Menu structure Measure System Display Amplifier Options or or Transducer Conditioning Transducer Type SG full bridge Excitation 5V↓ kg ↓ Unit: mV/V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Zero pt.: 50.0000 ... 2.0000 ... Nom. val.: measure... K-Factor: Conditioning Channel1 Zero reference: Zero offset: Tare: Disable zeroing: Low pass 100 ↓ High pass Off ↓ measure Adjust amplifier 3 Display Channel1 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... V −>0<− V V −>T<− Disable taring: 3 Bessel ↓V 0.0000 ... 3 Hz Display Channel1 V↓ Unit 3 Abs Decimal places 3 ... Display range from −10.000 V 10.000 V to Step 100 ↓ mV/V V % 0.0000 ... Bessel Butterworth OK 1V 2.5V 5V Two point calibration 1st pt.: 2nd pt.: kg 0.0000 0.0000 OK mV/V Shunt off 0.0000 Measure 0.0000 Measure Cancel MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 V g kg t kt tons lbs N kN bar mbar Pa pas . . Off On 100 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 F 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 I-13 Menu structure Measure Display System F Amplifier Options or Analogue outputs Analogue outputs Switch Channel1 Switch Output Vo1: Gross ↓ Output Vo2: Net ↓ Output characteristics ppm V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 1: 100.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 2: Gross Net Store1 Store2 Comb. PV Channel 1 −>T<− Off 5 Min once −>0<− Autocal Off ↓ Param.set 1−intern. ↓ Ampl. Input Zero ↓ Zero Cal Measure Remote LED display 1−intern. 2−intern. 3−intern. 4−intern. 5−intern. 6−intern. 7−intern. 8−intern. Status Level Off ↓ Status ↓ Off On MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 I-14 Menu structure Measure System Display Amplifier Options or or Remote contacts Remote contacts Remote Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Limit switches G Combine LIV Channel 1 On ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ↓ no function ACAL−autocal TARA−tare CPV1−clear store1 HLD1−hold store 1 CPV2−clear store2 HLD2−hold store 2 ZERO−zero balance SHNT−Shunt ON/OFF PRNT−select for printing CAL−input to cal. signal NULL−input to zero signal INV−change sign PSEL1−select line param. set 1 PSEL2−select line param. set 2 PSEL4−select line param. set 4 REMT−Remote ON/OFF INT−Start/Stop Integration Off On Limit switch 1 Limit switches Name 1-LIV1 ... Enable Input signal No ↓ Level Hysteresis 100.000 ... % 1.000 ... % Direction Output logic Over limit ↓ Delay LIV output: Comb.: Input 1: Input 2: Input 3: Input 4: Gross ↓ Channel1 −−− ↓ AND ↓ LIV 1 ↓ LIV 2 ↓ LIV 3 ↓ LIV 4 ↓ Positive logic ↓ define... Input Message when ON Message when OFF −−−− LIV 4 LIV 4 inverted Remote contact 4 Remote contact 4 inverted free ↓ 1-LIV1 ON... 1-LIV1 OFF... Normal ↓ Normal ↓ free disabled Positive logic Negative logic Over limit Below limit No Yes Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 LIV-Delay 12 3 4 LIV-On Delay time LIV-Off 0ms OK OK MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Combine LIV Channel 1 1 .... Cancel OK Normal Inverse AND OR EXOR NAND NOR NEXOR −−− 1 2 3 4 I-15 Menu structure Measure System G Display Amplifier Options or or Peak value stores Peak value stores (PVS) Store 1 Function Store 1 Envelope curve Store 2 Function Store 2 Envelope curve Comb. PVS 1-2 Channel 1 Version Version KANAL 1 Maximum gross ↓ Off ↓ 0.000... s Maximum gross Off ↓ 0.000... s −−− Identification: Comments: HBM, RD002−ML50B, P4.0A ... Serial and revisionnumber Off On −−− Difference PVS1, PVS2 Mean PVS1,PVS2 Integrate gross Integrate net Maximum gross Maximum net Minimum gross Minimum net MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 I-16 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Menu structure J-1 J Specifications MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 J-2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-3 1 Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules 1.1 General data Width Maximum sampling rate without linearisation mm Measured values/s 20.3 (4 divs)1) 19200 Limit switches Number Reference level Reference value (freely adjustable) Hysteresis factory setting Adjustment accuracy % % % Response time ms 4 Gross, net, peak values −100 to +100 of the range 1 of the range 0.0033 of the range 1.0 with Butterworth filter > 5Hz and Bessel filter > 1.25 Hz Peak value stores 2 Maximum; Minimum Peak-to-peak; Mean Number Function Tie Update rate µs Clearing the peak value stores (switching to current measured value) inside 1ms, through remote contacts Recording of the current value/peak value Time constant for envelope function 30 with Butterworth filter > 250Hz and Bessel filter > 100 Hz inside 1ms, through remote contacts s 0.01 ... 10000 V V V V kΩ −0.5 to +5.5 min. +4.0 max. +0.7 > 1.1 100 V V kΩ > 4.0 < 0.7 1 Remotes (HCMOS) Inputs (8 lines, connectable as desired) Permissible input voltage HIGH level LOW level Schmitt trigger, hysteresis Pull up resistances (internal) Outputs (Limit switches, Error) HIGH level with max. 1mA LOW level with max. 0.7mA Internal resistance 1) For the ML38B: 40.6mm (8divs) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-4 Nominal (rated) temperature range Service temperature range Storage temperature range °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] Operating voltages V Card format (Euro) Weight mm g Connection plug 14.6...17.0; (< 120mA) 7.7...8.3; (< 120mA)2) +4.9...5.1; (< 150mA) 100 x 160 300 IEC 603-2 indirectly Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2 V kΩ Ω 10V (asymmetrical) >5 <5 Amplifier output with zero balance Output staggered by the tare value Peak value store 1 output (maximum or minimum) Peak value store 2 output (maximum or minimum) Peak value store 3 output (peak combine of 1 and 2) Monitor output for Vo1 via BNC plug on front panel Nominal (rated) voltage Permissible load resistance Internal resistance V kΩ kΩ 10 (asymmetrical) > 1000 1 Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature (effect additional to digital value) on the outputs Vo1 and Vo2: sensitivity zero point % mV < 0.08, typ. 0.04 < 3 typ. 2 Nominal (rated) voltage Permissible load resistance Internal resistance The two output voltages can be used to display the five signal voltages. 2) −20 ...+60 [−4 ... +140] −20 ...+60 [−4 ... +140] −25 ...+70 [−13 ... +158] also connectable to 16V MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules 1.2 J-5 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML01B Accuracy class 0.03 DC amplifier Input for voltage measurement Input signal range (selectable) Measuring range (digitally adjustable) Zero offset Measurement frequency range Internal resistance of the signal voltage source Input for thermocouple measurement Measuring range (digitally adjustable) Linearisation error (with AP09 connection board) Linearisation range NiCr-Ni (K) Fe-CuNi (J) Cu-CuNi (T) NiCr-CuNi (E) NiCrSi-NiSi (N) Pt10Rh-Pt (S) Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh (B) Pt13Rh−Pt(R) Max. internal resistance Temperature range for cold junction 2) Max. permissible common-mode voltage symmetrical V V V Hz 1) 2) −0.0765 ...+0.0765 0.002 ... 0.0765 0.075 0 ... 250 −1dB 1.3 kΩ oC, [°F] oC oC oC oC oC oC oC oC oC oC < 0.06 10 ... 3275, [50 ... 5927] < 0.25 (K, J, T, E, N) < 0.6 (S, B, R) −158 ... +1414 −167 ... +1192 −210 ... +393 −161 ... +1005 −186 ... +1300 +181 ... +1755 +570 ... +1814 +178 ... +1769 −191 ... +1414 −190 ... +1192 −237 ... +393 −205 ... +1005 −219 ... +1300 −50 ... +1755 +160 ... +1814 −50 ... +1769 kΩ 1.3 °C, [°F] −20 ...+ 60, [−4 ...+140] V Input for current measurement Input signal range Measuring range (digitally adjustable) Max. measuring frequency range Zero offset, adjustable (”living” zero point) −10.2 ...+10.2 0.4 ... 10.2 10 0 ... 2400 -1dB 1) 62 asymmetrical (to an internal 50Ω standard resistor) mA mA Hz mA −50 ...+50 4 ... 50 0 ... 2400 -1dB 0 ...50 With VI > 2.5 Vpp, note limited measuring frequencies Cold junction included in AP09 connection board MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-6 Measuring frequency range Butterworth low pass Nom. val. fc (Hz) 2400 3) 2000 3) 1000 4) 500 250 80 40 20 10 5 −1dB (Hz) 2400 2050 1050 500 246 79 37.5 19 8.9 4.5 −3dB (Hz) 3250 2350 1190 588 291 99 49.5 25.5 12.4 6.2 Phase del. (ms) 0.28 0.40 0.66 0.90 1.45 3.65 6.0 11 20 42 Rise time (ms) 0.105 0.170 0.336 0.64 1.3 3.8 7.0 13.3 26 50 Overshoot % 5.2 12 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 Bessel low pass Nom. val. fc (Hz) 11004) 400 200 100* 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 −1dB (Hz) 1100 445 235 117 38.5 22.0 10.5 5.1 2.6 1.35 0.7 0.17 0.08 0.043 −3dB (Hz) 1780 805 410 210 68 37.5 19.0 9.6 4.8 2.4 1.2 0.3 0.15 0.075 Phase del. (ms) 0.45 0.7 1.1 1.8 4.3 7.4 12 22 50 100 200 650 1400 3000 Rise time (ms) 0.23 0.45 0.86 1.7 5.1 9.4 19.0 35.5 70 135 280 1100 2200 4600 Overshoot % 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 High-pass5) from 0.2Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 2.5Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 20Hz Be; 40Hz Bu Hz Hz Hz 0.1 1.0 10 Absolute calibration deviation % 0.16) Linearity deviation % < 0.02 typ. 0.01 % of full scale 7) Hz 1.25 100 3 40 75 120 Noise rel. to input with filter setting MR: 75mV MR: 10V Thermocouples Type K, J, T, E, N Type S, B, R µVPP µVPP K K *) Factory setting 3) Valid for Vipp < 2.5V with Range = 10V (corresp. to 25% modulation of range) 4) Valid for V pp < 5V with Range = 10V (corresp. to 50% modulation of range) I 5) In the case of resistance thermometers and thermocouples: no function 6) 0.2 % during current measurement 7) For measuring ranges > 3V or > 25mV or > 10mA; otherwise < 0.1% of full scale MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 typ. 0.1 typ. 1 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-7 Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off) Meas. range 75 mV Meas. range 10V Thermocouples (Autocalibration on / off) Type J, T Type E, K, N Type S, B, R Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on the digital signals S1 and S2 with autocalibration on / off Sensitivity Zero point 10V range 75mV range 20mA range Thermocouples Type J, T Type E, K, N Type S, B, R µV mV 5 / 10 0.5 / 1 K K K 0.25 / 0.5 0.5 / 1 1/2 % < 0.02 typ. 0.01 / < 0.2 typ.0.1 mV µV µA < 0.2 / < 6 < 5 / < 50 < 4 / < 120 K K K 0.25 / 2.5 0.5 / 5 1 / 10 Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2 Residual carrier voltage (38.4 kHz) Long-term drift (over 48h) mVPP mV < 12 <3 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-8 1.3 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML10B Accuracy class Excitation voltage ( 5%) Transducer SG full and half bridge, potentiometer, piezoresistive transducer 0.03 V 10 Ω 220...5000 2.5 1 110...5000 60...5000 30...5000 SG quarter bridge In conjunction with AP14 connection board Piezoelectric transducer In conjunction with AP08 connection board Current-fed piezoelectric transducers (e.g. DeltatronR from Brüel&Kjaer) In conjunction with AP18i connection board Perm. cable length between transducer and amplifier DC amplifier Measuring ranges Strain gages (Low) potentiometer, piezoresistive transducer (High) max. 5001) m mV/V mV/V 0.10...3.06 10...306 Bridge balance range Strain gages (Low) potentiometer, piezoresistive transducer (High) Charge amplifier mV/V mV/V 3.06 306 0.40...12.2 4 40...1224 6.12 612 1.0...30.6 100...3060 Factory setting 100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS module For a max. of 25% modulation (UAPPmax=5V) 12.24 1224 30.6 3060 2.5V V Measuring frequency range Butterworth low pass MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 0.20...6.12 20...612 Voltage input with max. 2.5V amplitude Charge amplifier *) 1) 2) 5 *) (Hz) 10000 3000 2000 1000 500 250 80 40 20 10 5 (Hz) 8900 2920 2160 1010 500 246 79 37.5 19 8.9 4.5 (Hz) 9900 3480 2500 1165 588 291 99 49.9 25.5 12.4 6.2 (ms) 0.13 0.16 0.24 0.66 0.9 1.45 3.65 6 11 20 42 (ms) 0.05 0.116 0.15 0.35 0.64 1.3 3.8 7 13.3 26 50 % 19 1) 13 12 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-9 Measurement frequency range Bessel low pass Nom.val. fc −1dB (Hz) 100000 100000 50000 Analog output only (Digital Interface 5000 Hz Butterworth) 1000 400 200 100*) 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 High-pass (Hz) 111000 188000 0.0027 104000 145000 0.0027 49000 84000 0.0044 900 400 230 117 38.5 22 10.5 5.1 2.6 1.35 0.7 0.17 0.08 0.043 1800 800 405 210 68 37.5 19 9.6 4.8 2.4 1.2 0.3 0.15 0.075 0.27 0.47 0.82 1.58 4.21 7.2 13.9 25 50 100 200 650 1400 3000 Overshoot % 0.0025 0.0025 0.004 10.8 10.8 6.6 0.2 0.44 0.96 1.8 5.4 9.3 19 37 75 155 300 1200 2300 4600 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 from 0.2Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 2.5Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 20Hz Be; 40Hz Bu Hz Hz Hz 0.1 1.0 10 Max. permissible common-mode voltage V 6 dB dB % µV/V >120 (DC) > 95 (DC) < 0.03 typ. 0.02 full scale < 0.1/0.2 Strain gage Potentiometer (0.2...6.12mV/V) (20...612mV/V) Common-mode-rejection Strain gages Potentiometers Linearity deviation Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on/off) Interference voltages at the output Noise related to the input with Bessel low pass *) 3) −3dB Phase Rise time del. (Hz) (ms) (ms) 1000 00Hz 50 000Hz 10 000Hz 1000Hz 100Hz µV/Vpp 4 3 3) 3 1.3 0.35 (High) (Low) 300 300 300 100 35 Factory setting For half bridge 20µV/V. We recommend that you measure only up to a cut-off frequency of 10kHz. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-10 Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on digital signals S1 and S2 SG (Low): Sensitivity Zero point Potentiometer (High): Sensitivity Zero point Long-term drift (over 48 h) SG (Low): Potentiometer (High): µV/V When autocalibration on: <0.03 <0.6 <0.03 <30 When autocalibration off: <0.2 <10 <0.2 <500 µV/V µV/V <0.25 <20 <5 <400 % µV/V % Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2 Residual carrier voltage mVPP <5 Max. deviation of the analogue outputs from the digital value mV <10 Long-term drift (over 48 h) mV <3 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules 1.4 J-11 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML30B Accuracy class 0.03 600.15 0.06 (synchronised) 600.00 0.04 (unsynchronised) Carrier frequency Hz Excitation voltage ( 5%) V Transducer SG full bridge Ω 110...5000 (VB= 5V) 60...5000 (VB= 2.5V) 30...5000 (VB= 1V) In conjunction with AP14 connection board m 500 max. Measuring ranges mV/V 0.1000 ... 3.0600 (VB = 5V) 0.2000 ... 6.1200 (VB = 2.5V) 0.5000 ... 15.3000 (VB = 1V) Bridge balance range mV/V 3.06 (VB = 5V) 6.12 (VB = 2.5V) 15.3 (VB = 1V) 5*) SG quarter bridge Permis. cable length between transducer and amplifier 2.5 1 Carrier frequency amplifier Measuring frequency range Butterworth low pass Nom. val. fc −1dB (Hz) (Hz) 200 80 40 20 10 5 Bessel low pass Nom. val. fc −1dB (Hz) (Hz) 100* 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 High-pass *) from 0.2Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 2.5Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 20Hz Be; 40Hz Bu 235 88 43 22 10.6 5.3 Hz Hz Hz 99 40 20 9.8 4.4 2.35 1.2 0.6 0.17 0.087 0.042 −3dB (Hz) Phase del. Rise time Over(ms) (ms) shoot % 277 103 51 26 12.7 6.3 2.5 4.6 8.2 14 27 52 −3dB (Hz) Phase del. Rise time Over(ms) (ms) shoot % 180 72 35.5 18 8.6 4.4 2.15 1.15 0.31 0.155 0.08 2.7 5.2 9.8 18 35 65 125 220 640 1400 3000 1.4 3.8 7.4 14 30 56 2 4.8 10 20 40 80 160 300 1100 2200 4600 10 9 7 6 5 4 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.1 1.0 10 Factory settings MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-12 Max. permissible common−mode voltage V 6V Common−mode rejection dB > 50 (0 ... 600Hz) Max. differential voltage DC V 0.1 µV/VPP < 0.3 1) Residual carrier voltage (600Hz) Noise voltage Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net): with autocalibration on Sensitivity Zero point with autocalibration off: Sensitivity Zero point Linearity deviation Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off) µV/VPP < 0.3 (0...200Hz) < 0.03 (0...1.25Hz) % µV/V < 0.01 typically 0.005% < 0.1 % µV/V < 0.2 <2 % < 0.02, typically 0.01 of full scale 2) µV/V <0.1/2 mVPP mV <3 <3 Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2 Residual carrier voltage Long−term drift (over 48 h) 1) 2) Measured with UB = 5V and input signal 2mV/V For ranges > 1mV/V (UB = 5V); otherwise <0.2% MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules 1.5 J-13 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML35B Accuracy class 0.03 Carrier frequency Hz 75 Transducer Resistors Resistance thermometers Ω 0...5000 Pt10, Pt100, Pt1000 m 2001) to 5000 Ω, PT1000 5001) to 500 Ω, PT10, PT100 Ω 20 ... 500; 200 ... 5000 Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier Carrier frequency amplifier Measuring ranges Supply current mAeff Measurement frequency range Butterworth low pass 1; 0.1 Nom.val. fc −1dB (Hz) 15 10 5 Bessel low pass from 0.2Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 2.5Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 20Hz Be; 40Hz Bu Linearity variation 0...500 Ω 0...5000 Ω Pt10 Pt100 Pt1000 1) 2) Rise time −3dB Phase del. (Hz) (Hz) (ms) 15 27 18 9.8 18 24 4.4 8.6 35 2.35 4.4 65 1.2 2.15 125 0.6 1.15 220 0.17 0.31 640 0.087 0.155 1400 0.042 0.08 2700 Rise time (Hz) 16 8.6 5.3 Nom.val. fc −1dB (Hz) 15 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 High-pass2) −3dB Phase del. (Hz) (ms) 23 22 12.2 30 6.3 52 Hz Hz Hz 0.1 1.0 10 Ω Ω K K K 0.1 1 2.5 0.25 0.25 (ms) 16 30 56 (ms) 15 20 40 80 160 300 1100 2200 3700 Overshoot % 7 5 4 Overshoot % 1.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS module No function available with resistance thermometers and thermocouples MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-14 Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on the digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net): with autocalibration on: sensitivity zero point with autocalibration off: sensitivity zero point Long-term drift (over 48 h) (Autocalibration on) % mΩ mΩ < 0.015 typ. 0.0075 % < 10 (Measuring range 500 Ω) < 100 (Measuring range 5000 Ω) % Ω Ω < 0.2 < 0.5 (Measuring range 500 Ω) < 5 (Measuring range 5000 Ω) mΩ < 10 (Measuring range 500 Ω) < 100 (Measuring range 5000 Ω) mVpp mV <3 <3 Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2 Residual carrier voltage Long-term drift (over 48 h) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules 1.6 J-15 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML38B 0.00251) Accuracy class Accuracy % % Carrier frequency Hz Excitation voltage (5%) V Transducer SG full bridge Ω Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier m (0.0025 of measured value + 0.0025 of full−scale value) 225.05 0.02 5*) 2.5 30...4000; typ.350 500 max. Carrier frequency amplifier Measuring ranges mV/V 0.2 ... 5.1 (VB = 5V) 0.4 ... 10.2 (VB = 2.5V) Bridge balance range mV/V 5.1 (VB = 5V) 10.2 (VB = 2.5V) Measurement frequency range Butterworth low pass Filter levels Nominal (rated) value Hz f1 1.0 f2 1.5 f3 2.5 f4 3 f5 5 f6 6 f7 9 f8 10 f (−3dB) Hz 1.1 1.6 2.3 3.2 4.6 6.3 8.3 10 f (attenuation=1000) Hz 18.9 21.6 24.5 27.4 30.5 33.8 37.3 41 f (attenuation=1 000 000) Hz 50 54 57 61 65 68 70 72 Settling time to 99% s 1 0.7 0.5 0.37 0.26 0.2 0.16 0.13 Settling time to 99.999% s 2.3 1.6 1.14 0.82 0.58 0.42 0.30 0.23 Nominal (rated) value Hz f1 0.03 f2 0.05 f3 0.1 f4 0.2 f5 0.5 f6 0.9 f7 1.5 f (−3dB) Hz 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.22 0.45 0.9 1.7 f (attenuation=1000) Hz 0.125 0.25 0.5 1 2 4 8 f (attenuation=1000000) Bessel low pass Hz 0.2 0.4 0.8 1.7 3.5 7 14 Settling time to 99% s 32 16 8 4 2 1 0.5 Settling time to 99.999% s 48 24 12 6 3 1.5 0.75 digit 1 000 000 Common−mode rejection dB > 100 Input resistance MΩ 1000 Display resolution *) 1) Filter levels Factory setting In the event of irradiation, in accordance with EN 61326, table 1 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-16 Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net): Sensitivity Zero point (related to full scale value) % % < 0.002 of measured value < 0.001 of full−scale value Linearity variation % < 0.002 Long−term drift (over 24 h) ppm max. 20, typ. 8 Short−term drift over 5 min, from 2 h after switch−on ppm Measuring rate 1/s max. 10, typ. 3 1.18 / 2.34 / 4.69 / 9.38 / 18.75 / 37.5 / 75 Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2 Residual carrier voltage Long−term drift (over 48 h) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 mVPP mV <3 <3 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules 1.7 J-17 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML50B Accuracy class 0.03 4801.2 0.48 (synchronised) 4800.0 0.32 (not synchronised) Carrier frequency Hz Excitation voltage (5%) V Transducer Inductive half and full bridge mH 2.5 ... 30 (VB= 2.5V) 1 ... 30 (VB= 1V)1) m 500 max. Measuring ranges mV/V 6.00 ... 183.60 (VB = 2.5V) 15.00 ... 459.00 (VB = 1V) Bridge balance range mV/V 183.6 (VB = 2.5V) 459 (VB = 1V) Perm. cable length between transducer and amplifier 2.5*) 1 Carrier frequency amplifier Measurement frequency range Butterworth low pass Nom.val. fc −1dB (Hz) 1500 1000 500 250 80 40 20 10*) 5 Bessel low pass Nom.val. fc −1dB (Hz) 900 400 200 100*) 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 *) 1) −3dB Phase del. (Hz) (Hz) (ms) 1600 2180 0.32 1010 1165 0.66 500 588 0.9 246 291 1.45 79 99 3.65 37.5 49.5 6 19 25.5 11 8.9 12.4 20 4.5 6.2 42 (Hz) 900 445 235 117 38.5 22 10.5 5.1 2.6 1.35 0.7 0.17 0.08 0.043 −3dB Phase del. (Hz) (ms) 1550 0.47 805 0.7 410 1.1 210 1.8 68 4.3 37.5 7.4 19 12 9.6 22 4.8 50 2.4 100 1.2 200 0.3 650 0.15 1400 0.075 3000 Rise time (ms) 0.17 0.35 0.64 1.3 3.8 7 13.3 26 50 Rise time (ms) 0.25 0.45 0.86 1.7 5.1 9.4 19 35.5 70 135 280 1100 2200 4600 Overshoot. % 7 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 Overshoot. % 4.1 1.3 1.3 1.3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Factory setting with Zener barriers only VB = 1V MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-18 High-pass from 0.2Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 2.5Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 20Hz Be; 40Hz Bu Hz Hz Hz 0.1 1.0 10 Max. permissible common−mode voltage V 6V Common−mode rejection dB > 50 (0 ... 4800Hz) Max. differential voltage DC V 1 Linearity variation % < 0.02, typ. 0.01 of full scale 2) Residual carrier voltage (4800Hz) Noise voltage Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off) Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on the digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net): with autocalibration on: sensitivity zero point with autocalibration off: sensitivity zero point µV/VPP µV/VPP < 0.33) < 100 (0...1500Hz) < 50 (0...100Hz) < 5 (0...1.25 Hz) µV/V < 20 / 60 % µV/V < 0.03 typ.0.002% < 20 % µV/V < 0.2 < 120 mVPP mV <5 <3 Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2 Residual carrier voltage (38.4kHz) Long−term drift (over 48 h) 2) 3) for measuring ranges > 60mV/V (VB = 2.5V); otherwise < 0.2% measured with VB = 2.5V and input signal 80mV/V MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules 1.8 J-19 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML55B Accuracy class 0.03 Carrier frequency Hz 4801.2 0.48 (synchronised) 4800.0 0.32 (not synchronised) Excitation voltage (5%) V 5*) Transducers Strain-gage half and full bridge Ω Inductive half and full bridge mH S.G. quarter bridge Perm. cable length between transducer and amplifier 2.5 1 110 ... 5000 (VB=5V) 60 ... 5000 (VB= 2.5V) 30 ...5000 (VB= 1V) 2.5 ... 30 (VB= 2.5V) 1 ... 30 (VB= 1V) In conjunction with AP14 connection board m 5001) max. Carrier frequency amplifier Measuring ranges Strain gage mV/V Inductive Bridge balance range Strain gage mV/V Inductive *) 1) 0.1000 ... 3.0600 0.2000 ... 6.1200 0.5000 ... 15.3000 (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V) 1.5000 ... 45.9000 3.0000 ... 91.8000 7.500 ... 229.500 (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V) 3.0600 6.1200 15.3000 (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V) 45.900 91.8000 229.500 (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V) Factory setting 100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS module MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-20 Measuring frequency Butterworth/Bessel low pass High-pass from 0.2Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 2.5Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 20Hz Be; 40Hz Bu see technical data ML50B Hz Hz Hz 0.1 1.0 10 Max. permissible common−mode voltage V 6V Common−mode rejection dB > 50 (0 ... 4800Hz) Max. differential voltage DC V 1 Linearity deviation % < 0.02 typ. 0.01 2) Noise Long−term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off) Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on digital signals S1 and S2 with autocalibration on Sensitivity Zero point with autocalibration off Sensitivity Zero point µV/VPP µV/V Strain gage < 2 (0...1500Hz) < 1 (0... 100Hz) < 0.2 (0...1.25 Hz) Inductive < 100 (0...1500Hz) < 50 (0..100Hz) < 5 (0...1.25Hz) < 0.2 / 4 < 20 / 60 Strain gage Inductive < 0.02 % µV/V 0.2 % µV/V 4 <4 < 0.2 60 Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2 Residual carrier voltage Long−term drift (over 48h) 2) mVPP mV for measuring ranges > 1mV/V strain gage (VB = 5V) or > 30mV/V inductive; otherwise < 0,2% MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 <5 <3 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules 1.9 J-21 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML55BS6 Accuracy class 0.03 Carrier frequency Hz 9602.4 0.96 (synchronised) 9600.0 0.32 (not synchronised) Excitation voltage (5%) V 5*) Transducer Strain gage half and full bridge Ω 2.5 1 110 ... 5000 (VB=5V) 60 ... 5000 (VB= 2.5V) 30 ...5000 (VB= 1V) 2.5 ... 20 (VB= 2.5V) 6 ... 19 (VB= 1V) Inductive half and full bridge mH Absolute calibration accuracy % better than 0.5 Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier m 5001) max. Carrier frequency amplifier Measuring ranges Strain gage mV/V Inductive Bridge balance range Strain gage mV/V Inductive *) 1) 0.1000 ... 3.0600 0.2000 ... 6.1200 0.5000 ... 15.3000 (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V) 1.5000 ... 45.9000 3.0000 ... 91.8000 7.500 ... 229.500 (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V) 3.0600 6.1200 15.3000 (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB= 1V) 45.900 91.8000 229.500 (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB= 1V) Factory setting 100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS module MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-22 Measurement frequency range Butterworth low pass Nom.val. fc −1dB Bessel low pass Nom.val. fc −1dB (Hz) 3000 1000 500 250 80 40 20 10 5 (Hz) 900 400 200 100*) 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 High-pass *) from 0.2Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 2.5Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 20Hz Be; 40Hz Bu Factory setting MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Hz Hz Hz −3dB Phase del. (Hz) (ms) 3600 0.33 1165 0.66 588 0.9 291 1.45 99 3.65 49.5 6 25.5 11 12.4 20 6.2 42 Rise time −3dB Phase del. (Hz) (Hz) (ms) 900 1550 0.47 445 805 0.7 235 410 1.1 117 210 1.8 38.5 68 4.3 22 37.5 7.4 10.5 19 12 5.1 9.6 22 2.6 4.8 50 1.35 2.4 100 0.7 1.2 200 0.17 0.3 650 0.08 0.15 1400 0.043 0.075 3000 Rise time (Hz) 3100 1010 500 246 79 37.5 19 8.9 4.5 0.1 1.0 10 (ms) 0.13 0.35 0.64 1.3 3.8 7 13.3 26 50 (ms) 0.25 0.45 0.86 1.7 5.1 9.4 19 35.5 70 135 280 1100 2200 4600 Overshoot. % 16 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 Overshoot % 4.1 1.3 1.3 1.3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-23 Max. permissible common−mode voltage V 6V Common−mode rejection dB > 77 (0 ... 9600Hz) Max. differential voltage DC V 1 Linearity variation % < 0.02, typically 0.01 2) Strain gage Noise Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off) Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on the digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net): with autocalibration on Sensitivity Zero point with autocalibration off Sensitivity Zero point µV/VPP Inductive < 2 (0...1500Hz) < 1 (0... 100Hz) < 0.2 (0... 1.25 Hz) µV/V < 100 (0...1500Hz) < 50 (0..100Hz) < 5 (0...1.25Hz) < 0.2 / 0.4 < 20 / 60 Strain gage Inductive < 0.02 % µV/V 0.2 % µV/V 4 < 20 < 0.2 60 Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2 Residual carrier voltage Long−term drift (over 48 h) 2) mVPP mV <6 <3 For measuring ranges > 1mV/V SG (VB = 5V) or > 30mV/V inductive; otherwise < 0.2% MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-24 1.10 Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML60B Accuracy class 0.01 Input signal Frequency F1 Direction of rotation F2 Zero index Transducer error (with AP01i only) Transducers that can be connected HBM torque transducers with AP07/1 with AP17 Frequency signal sources with square wave or sinusoidal voltage, incremental transducers Inputlevel 0.1 .. 30 Vp (with control amplifier) or CMOS−level 0.1 .. 30 Vp (with control amplifier) or CMOS−level CMOS−level CMOS−level T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1 T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2 kHz 0.0001 ... 1000 m 70 Input level 5V set-up 100mV set-up (automat. gain control) VPP VPP 5...30 0.1...30 Input impedance kΩ typ. 20 Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier Detection of the direction of rotation via additional frequency signal (phase-shifted by 90°) Ranges Frequency measurement Impulse counting Maximum impulse counting when pulse counting Zero point balance range Ranges to 2kHz Ranges to 20kHz Ranges to 200kHz Ranges to 1 MHz Noise (10 kHz input signal) Filter Off 1 kHz LP−Filter, Butterworth 100 Hz LP−Filter, Bessel Input filter MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Hz Pulses 100...2000 1 000 ... 20 000 10 000... 200 000 100 000 ... 1 000 000 100 ... 1 000 000 Imp./s 1 000 000 Hz Hz Hz Hz −2000 ...+2000 −20 000... +20 000 −200 000 ... +200 000 −1 000 000 ... +1 000 000 Hz Hz Hz 3 1 0.2 disconnectable Glitch filter Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-25 Measuring frequency range Nom.val. fc −1dB (Hz) − 2000 1000 500 250 80 40 20 10 5 Without filter Butterworth low pass Bessel low pass from 0.2Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 2.5Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 20Hz Be; 40Hz Bu 2500 2000 1000 470 246 79 37.5 19 8.9 4.5 3100 2400 1200 570 291 99 49.5 25.5 12.4 6.2 Rise time (ms) 0.4 0.5 0.8 0.9 1.45 3.65 6 11 20 42 Nom.val. fc −1dB (Hz) 900 400 200 100*) 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 High-pass −3dB Phase del. (Hz) (Hz) (ms) −3dB Phase del. (Hz) (Hz) (ms) 900 1800 0.6 400 800 0.8 235 410 1.1 117 210 1.8 38.5 68 4.3 22 37.5 7.4 10.5 19 12 5.1 9.6 22 2.6 4.8 50 1.35 2.4 100 0.7 1.2 200 0.17 0.3 650 0.08 0.15 1400 0.043 0.075 3000 Hz Hz Hz 0.1 1.0 10 Absolute calibration accuracy % 0.005 Long-term drift over 90d % <0.005 Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on the digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net): % 0.005 mVPP mV <5 <3 0.12 0.18 0.35 0.70 1.3 3.8 7 13.3 26 50 Rise time (ms) 0.35 0.52 0.86 1.7 5.1 9.4 19 35.5 70 135 280 1100 2200 4600 Over− shoot % 8 10 8 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 Over− shoot % 0 1.0 1.3 1.3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2 Residual carrier voltage (38.4kHz) Long-term drift (over 48 h) *) Factory setting MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Connection boards J-26 2 AP01i Connection boards for one-channel amplifiers AP 02 AP01i (connection board with D-female receptacle) Width mm 20.3 (4 divs) Transducer connection D15 female receptacle, DA-15P 1) Output-signal connection D25 female receptacle, DB-25P 2) Option 2x EM001; 2x RM001 with AP02 Weight, approx. kg 0.3 mm 20.3 (4 divs) AP02 (connection board for 2 relay modules) Width 37-pin D-Sub male connector, DC-37P 3) Output-signal connection Option Weight, approx. 2x RM001 kg 0.3 AP03i AP03i (connection board with MS-female device receptacle) Width mm D25 female receptacle, DB-25P 2) Output-signal connection Option Weight, approx. 1) 2) 3) 4) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 HBM-order number 3-3312.0182 HBM-order number 2-9278.0293 HBM-order number 2-9278.0294 HBM-order number 1-MS3106 PEMV 40.6 (8 divs) 7-pin MS−female receptacle, MS3106A 16S-1P 4) Transducer connection 2x EM001, 2x RM001 with AP02 kg 0.3 Specifications ➝ Connection boards AP07/1 J-27 AP07/1 for connection of T3..FNA and T10.. torque transducers Width mm 40.6 (8 divs) Supply during measurement Supply for calibration Frequency VPP VPP kHz 54 81 15 ... 20 7-pin MS−female receptacle, MS3106A 16S-1P 4) Transducer connection D25 female receptacle, DB-25P 2) Output-signal connection Option Weight, approx. 2) 4) EM001; RM001 kg 0.5 HBM-order number 2-9278.0293 HBM-order number 1-MS3106 PEMV MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Connection boards J-28 AP08 AP08 for piezoelectric transducers Width mm 20.3 (4 divs) Connections Transducer*) Range capacitors Cg Measuring ranges Accuracy Measuring range ≤ 100 pC Measuring range≥ 100 pC Measuring frequency range ≤ 1000 pC/Cg=100 pF, 1 nF 10000 pC/Cg=10 nF 100000 pC/Cg=100 nF Linearity deviation BNC-female receptacle, isolated D25 female receptacle nF pC 0.1 30...100 1 50...1000 10 500...10 000 100 5000...100 000 % % ≤ 2.5 ≤ 1 kHz kHz kHz % 100 (−1dB) 15 (−1dB) 1.5 (−1dB) 0.25 full scale Low pass filter − according to the data sheets of ML01B and ML10B Option − 1xEM001; 2xRM001 with AP02 − s s − 10...10 000 0.1...100 m m 100 200 pC pC/s < 1 0.1 % % °C [°F] 0.2 full scale 0.1 full scale −20...+60 [−4...+140] Low pass filter − according to the data sheets of ML01B and ML10B Weight, approx. kg 0.3 Time constant ( t = Cg ⋅ Rg) Long Medium (Rg=100GΩ) Short (Rg=1GΩ) Maximum cable length Range capacitor Cg=100 pF Range capacitor Cg ≥1 nF Zero offset (during zero/measure changeover) Drift (at 20°C) Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on the sensitivity on the zero point Operating temperature range *) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Please note the advices on page B-55, if the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms. Specifications ➝ Connection boards AP09 AP11i J-29 AP09 for connection of thermocouples Width mm 20.3 (4 divs) Accuracy with 25°C with 20 ... 60°C °C °C 0.3 1 Terminal screws (0.5...1.5mm2) Transducer connection Temperature cold junction Reference-point measuring range Semiconductor temperature-sensor at the terminal screw °C [°F] Option Weight, approx. −20...+60 [−4...+140] 2x EM001; 2x RM001 with AP02 kg 0.3 AP11i (connection board with LemoR-female device receptacle) Width mm D25 female receptacle, DB-25P 2) Output-signal connection Option Weight, approx. 1) 2) 20.3 (4 divs) 6-pin LemoR FGG.1B.306 1) Transducer connection 2x EM001; 2xRM001 with AP02 kg 0.3 HBM-order number 3-3312.0126 HBM-order number 2-9278.0293 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Connection boards J-30 AP13i AP13i for PLC I/O cards; all inputs and outputs are electrically isolated by optical couplers Width mm 20.3 (4 divs) Outputs (short-circuit proof; protective circuit for inductive loads) Values Separate grounding systems Nominal (rated) voltage (ext. supply) Permitted voltage range Output current Short-circuit current Permissible short-circuit period Switching frequency on resistive load V V A A Hz Input/Output 5 2 24 6 ... 48 max. 0.5 0.8 unlimited max. 500 D-female receptacle 15/25-pin Option 1x EM001 Inputs Values Separate grounding systems Input voltage for Low level High-level Input current at 24V Current consumption internal 5V external 24V Maximum power loss Permissible short-circuit period 8 4 V V mA mA mA W <5 > 10 12 13 7.5 (without load) 10.5 unlimited Permissible lead length m approx. 1000 Weight, approx. kg 0.3 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Connection boards AP14 J-31 AP14 for Single SG Width Options Accuracy class Full bridge Half bridge Quarter bridge mm − 20.3 (4 divs) 1 EM001 output stage module, 2xRM001 with AP02 % % % 0.1 0.5 0.5 Connectable transducer Half and full bridges, single strain gage in 3-wire or 4-wire technology to use with following amplifier plug-in modules Connections Transducer Analogue output, control signals Internal completion resistors ML10B, ML30B, ML55B D15 female receptacle, DB25P D25 female receptacle, DB25P Ω 120, 350, 700 Max. permissible cable length between transducer and connection board m 500 Linearity deviation % 0.05 kHz 0...50 Measurement frequency range Effect of 10K change of ambient temperature on zero point on measurement sensitivity Operating temperature range Weight, approx. % % Full bridge Quarter bridge, half bridge 0.05 0.05 0.5 0.1 °C [°F] −20...+60[−4...+140] kg 0.3 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Connection boards J-32 AP17 AP17 for connecting torque flanges T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2 and frequency signals to ML60B Width mm 20.3 (4 divs) Transducer connection D15 female receptacle, DA-15P 1) Analogue output/remotes D25 female receptacle, DB-25P 2) Nominal (rated) temperature range °C [°F] Option Weight, approx. −20 ...+ 60 [−4 ... +140] 1x EM001, 2x RM001 with AP02 kg 0.3 V (DC) V (DC) V (DC) V (DC) +16 (max. 500mA)3) −16 (max. 500mA)3) +5 (max. 300mA)3) approx. 5 (max. 100mA) VPP VPP 10 5 VPP V0P V kHz 0.3 / 14 3 / 20 −5 ...+ 4 1000 (with ML60B max. 200) Outputs Transducer supply Release of calibration signal Inputs Nominal (rated) input voltage symmetrical asymmetrical Minimum/maximum voltage swing symmetrical asymmetrical Common-mode voltage range Maximum input frequency 1) 2) 3) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 HBM order number 3-3312.0182 HBM order number 2-9278.0293 The specified current values are the maximum permissible permanent currents for AP17. The number of con nection boards per housing is not limited, however, a maximum of four connection boards can be used for the transducer supply (5V/16V e.g. for T10F−SF1 torque flange). Specifications ➝ Connection boards AP18i J-33 AP18i for current-fed piezoresistive transducers Accuracy class % 1 Width mm 20.3 (4 divs) Transducer excitation*) mA 2.5...20 (adjustable); 4 (factory setting) Current source dynamic impedance kΩ 30 typ. Input voltage range V 12 9 (3...21V) Load resistance kΩ >5 Input sensitivity V 0.1; 1V; 10V ( 0.05 dB ) Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz 0.18...15 000 0.10...25 000 0.18...17 000 0.10...31 000 0.18...22 000 0.10...43 000 % 0.04 of full scale µVms µVms µVms 30 30 75 dB dB −70 (typically) −60 (typically) Frequency response Input sensitivity 0.1V Input sensitivity 1V Input sensitivity 10V for −1 dB for −3 dB for −1 dB for −3 dB for −1 dB for −3 dB Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature Noise referred to the input (2Hz...22.4kHz) Input sensitivity 0.1V Input sensitivity 1V Input sensitivity 10 V Distortion at 1kHz at 8 kHz Option Weight, approx. *) Current output stage kg 0.3 Please note the advices on page B-55, if the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-34 3 Multi-channel amplifier module ML455 ML455 + Connection board AP455i/AP455iS6 Accuracy class 0.1 Accuracy % (0.1 of measured value+0.1 of full−scale value) Carrier frequency Hz 4801.20.48 Bridge excitation voltage (5%) V 2.5 Connectable transducers*) in 6- (5) wire technique Permissible cable length between transducer and connection board1) Strain-gage half- or full bridge Inductive half- or full bridge LVDT m 100 Measuring ranges Strain-gage mV/V 4 Inductive mV/V 100 LVDT mV/V 1000 W 120 ... 1000 mH 4 ... 330 Transducer impedance Strain-gage half- or full bridge Inductive half- or full bridge, LVDT Noise at 25°C [77°F] Butterworth/Bessel 1000 Hz/40 Hz 80 Hz/200 Hz 20 Hz/5 Hz 5 Hz/1.25 Hz Linearity deviation mV/V mV/V mV/V mV/V Operating temperature range % % °C [°F] Transducer connection AP455i AP455iS6 Width *) 1) 2) 3) 4) LVDT < 140 < 28 < 14 < 6 < 0.02 Autocal on Autocal off < 0.01 < 0.005 < 0.03 < 0.01 −20...+60 [−4 ... +140] 4x15-pin Sub-D 6-pin LemoR FGG.1B.3064) mm The transducer type can be selected separately for each of the four subchannels Use cable twisted and shielded in pairs with outer shield (e.g. HBM-no. 4−3301.0071) Of measured value Of full−scale value HBM-order number 3-3312.0126 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Inductive < 30 < 3 < 1.5 < 0.5 % Effect of a 10K−change of the ambient temperature on sensitivity2) on zero point3) Strain-gage < 3 < 0.5 < 0.2 < 0.1 20.3 (4 divs) Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-35 Multi−channel amplifier module ML455 and connection board AP455i ML455 ML 455 AP455i AP455iS6 AP455iS6 Subchannel 1 Subchannel 2 Subchannel 3 Subchannel 4 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-36 4 Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML460 ML460 + connection board Accuracy class Connectable transducers HBM torque transducers2) Frequency signal sources with square-wave or sine-wave voltage, incremental transducers Inductive rotation speed measuring devices (T-R coils) using input filtering Measuring ranges Frequency measurement Accuracy, related to full−scale value Pulse counting Maximum impulse rate when pulse counting Precision PWM carrier frequency Precision Pulse duration Precision Input frequency range Mechanical Nominal (rated) temperature range Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Operating voltages Max. number of amplifier modules per 19” housing with battery operation (NT011T) Card format Width Connections Designation of suitable male connector (Manufacturer LemoR) 1) 2) % AP460i 0.011) kHz T4WA-S3, T3...FN/FNA, T10F...−KF1, T10F...−SF1, T10F...− SU2 0.0001...500 kHz 0.5...200 kHz % 0 ... 2 0... 20 0 ... 200 0 ... 500 0.01 Pulses PPS Kimp 100 ... 1 000 000 500 000 0.001 Hz % ms ms Hz 1 ... 10 000 0.05 0 ... 2500 0.001 0.25 ...10 000 _C _C _C V −20 ...+ 60 −20 ...+ 60 −25 ... +70 +5 (<240 mA) +16 (<100 mA) +8 (<10 mA) −8 (<10 mA) − mm mm 10 Europe 100 x 160 20.3 (4 divs) LemoR 1B 10−pin EXG.1B.310.HLN Fixed plug (1st letter in model desig.) : F Key (3rd letter in model desig.) : G Series: 1B Type: 310 Example: FGG.1B.310.CLAD62 (Bold characters must be selected) 0.05 in the case of PWM These torque transducers are not supplied via the connection plate AP460i MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-37 Channel properties Number of subchannels 4 Class accuracy 0.01 Signals per subchannel F1 F2 Zero index Electrical separation of all inputs from one another and from MGC ground Input frequency range Frequency, pulse or PWM signal ±90° phase shift relative to F1 (direction detection) For detection of zero position in pulse counting V Typically 500V kHz 0...500 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-38 Input signals Direct inputs, difference signals Input voltage range VPP 0.4 ... 30 VPP 0.4 ... 30 V ms 5...30 3 Direct inputs, bipolar Input voltage range Direct inputs, unipolar Input voltage range Minimum pulse width Input for inductive transducer, filtered (F1 signals only) Required minimum input voltage (peak-to-peak) 500 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 25 kH 50 kHz 75 kHz 100 kHz 125 kHz 150 kHz 175 kHz 200 kHz Maximum input voltage Input resistance F1 signal 50 mV 100 mV 750 mV 1V 1.5V 2V 2.5V 3V 4V 5V 7V V 30 kΩ approx. 6 Transducer excitation Maximum current per module 5V 8V 16V MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 16 modules/device 10mA 62.5mA 62.5mA 1 module/device 160mA 1A 1A Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules Measuring frequency range J-39 Nom. val. fc –1dB (Hz) Without filter Low−Pass with Butterworth–Characteristic Low−Pass with Bessel–Characteristic –3dB Phase del. Rise time (Hz) (Hz) − 740 1750 1 <0.6 0 500 250 80 40 20 10 5 450 250 83 41 20 9 5 550 290 99 49.5 25.5 12.4 6.5 1.5 2.5 5 7.5 12 25 46 1 2.1 6.2 13 24 50 100 9.4 12 8.5 7.8 7 4.7 4.7 Nom. val. fc –1dB (Hz) 400 200 100*) 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 (Hz) 380 235 125 43 24 11 4 2.6 1.35 0.7 0.17 0.08 0.04 (ms) (ms) Over shoot % –3dB Phase del. Rise time (Hz) 650 380 210 70 40 18 10 4.8 2.4 1.2 0.3 0.15 0.075 (ms) 1.4 1.5 2.6 5.2 7.4 15.7 27 53 104 195 730 1480 3000 (ms) 1 1.75 3 7.5 15 31 55 125 210 450 2000 3700 7500 Over shoot % 1 1 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-40 ML460 multi-channel amplifier module and AP460i connection board ML460 ML460 ERROR O V E RL O A D AP460i AP460i CHAN 1 2 Subchannel 1 3 4 1 S I GN A L 2 3 Subchannel 2 4 Subchannel 3 Subchannel 4 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules 5 J-41 Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML801B AP8011) ML801B + connection board Accuracy class AP8092) Width Thermocouples Type K, J, T, E, N, S, B, R mm Maximum sampling rate per channel 0.05 4 8 Thermocouples Type K, J, T, E, N, S, B, R, Individual inputs electrically isolated Pt100 4−wire circuit 20.3 (4divs) values/s 2400 Measuring frequency range kHz 0 ... 1 Effective resolution Bit Max. permissible input voltage and common-mode voltage V Absolute calibration deviation % with cold junction 2) 3) 4) 0.2 8 10V symmetrical Transducers 1) AP8354) 0.05 Number of measuring points Filter AP4093) K 20 50 10 50 − 0.05 − Butterworth low pass 0.5 − Nom. val fc fg max −1dB −3dB (Hz) 1000 500 250 200 80 1000 500 250 200 80 250 200 80 40 20 10 5 (Hz) 1189 523 253 203 78 1206 613 255 203 78 312 226 82 41 21 10 5.3 (Hz) 1518 691 322 265 103 1516 816 327 264 102 413 300 109 54 27 13 7 Internal sampling rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 4800 4800 4800 4800 4800 2400 2400 2400 1200 600 300 150 Connection plug on customer side: e. g. Phoenix Contact MC1.5/3-ST-3.5; Art. No. 1840379 (Connection plug for AP801S6: LemoR FFA0B.304 CLAD52) No line break recognition Two AP409 can be operated with one ML801B Connection plug on customer side: LemoR FFA.0S.304.CLA MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 J-42 ML801B + connection board Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules AP801 Low pass Bessel AP409 Nom. val fc fg max −1dB −3dB (Hz) 200 100 40 20 10 5 2.5 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 (Hz) 259 102 41 20 10 5 2.5 1 0.5 0.21 0.1 0.051 (Hz) 448 184 75 36 18 9 4.5 1.8 0.9 0.38 0.19 0.094 Nom. val fc fg max −1dB −3dB (Hz) 1000 500 250 200 80 40 20 10 5 (Hz) 1076 596 279 214 78.9 38.7 19.5 9.36 4.37 (Hz) 1282 798 345 266 103 51.8 27.2 13.2 6.4 Low pass Butterworth compatible MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 AP809 AP835 Internal sampling rate 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 600 300 150 75 37.5 18.7 Internal sampling rate 4800 4800 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-43 ML801B + connection board AP801 AP809 AP409 Nom. val fc fg max −1dB −3dB (Hz) 200 100 40 20 10 5 2.5 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 (Hz) 322 125 41 21 11 5.5 2.7 1.36 0.68 0.186 0.093 0.047 (Hz) 571 216 70 37 19 9.6 4.8 2.4 1.2 0.186 0.158 0.079 Low pass Bessel compatible AP835 Internal sampling rate 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 600 300 75 37.5 18.7 Input for voltage measurement Input range Zero offset V mV −10.5...+10.5 V mV −10.5...+10.5 − −80...+80 −80...+80 −80...+80 −80...+80 − Internal resistance of the voltage source kΩ Input resistance symmetric/asymmetric kΩ 500/250 2000/1000 1000 mVSS < 50 < 0.5 <2 − mV 0.8/1.5 0.01/0.02 0.02/0.05 − % <0.03; typ. 0.01 <0.03; typ. 0.01 <0.06; typ. 0.03 − V mA 8/16 50 − − − − − − Noise voltage rel. to input at 1.25 Hz filter Long−term drift over 48 hours with/without autocalibration Linearity deviation Transducer excitation5) (only AP801S6) Supply voltage for transducers (can only be selected collectively for all channels) Max. output current for external transducers < 1.0 − 5) A total of max. 2 A for transducers supply may be withdrawn from the MGC MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-44 ML801B + connection board AP801 AP809 AP409 AP835 °C − < 0.06 < 0.25 (K, J, T, E, N) − °C − < 0.6 (S, B, R) − NiCr−Ni (K) °C − −158...+1414 −191...+1414 − Fe−CuNi (J) °C − −167...+1192 −190...+1192 − Cu−CuNi (T) °C − −210...+393 −237...+393 − NiCr−CuNi (E) °C − −161...+1005 −205...+1005 − NiCrSi−NiSi (N) °C − −186...+1300 −219...+1300 − Pt10Rh−Pt (S) °C − +181...+1755 −50...+1755 − Pt30Rh−Pt6Rh (B) °C − +570...+1814 +160...+1814 − Pt13Rh−Pt (R) °C − +178...+1769 −50...+1769 °C − Type K, J, T, E, N K − 0.2/0.4 0.5/1 − Type S, B, R K − 1.0/2.0 2/3 − Type K, J, T, E, N K − < 0.1 < 0.1 − Type S, B, R K − < 0.3 < 0.3 − Measuring range Ω − − − 500 Linearisation error °C − − − < 0.02 Input for thermocouples Linearisation error Linearisation range Temperature range of cold junction −20...+60 − − Long−term drift over 48 h with/without autocalibration Noise with 1.25Hz filter Input for Pt100 Linearisation range Noise voltage with 1.25Hz filter Measuring current °C − − − −200 ... +848 mΩpp − − − 2 mA − − − 0.5 Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier m − − − 3006) Linearity deviation K − − − 0.1 mΩ − − − < 30 Long−term drift over 48h with autocalibration 6) 100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS module MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-45 ML801B + Connection board AP401 Accuracy class % 0.1 Measuring range V 10 Max. common mode input voltage (to housing/ground) V 45 V 70 MW 20 Max. differential input voltage Input impedance Common−mode rejection (with 50 Hz, 20 VPP) (with DC 10 V) typ. 75 min. 100 Measurement frequency range Hz 1000 (−1 dB) Linearity deviation % 0.03 % % max. 0.02 max. 0.05 % % max. 0.02 max. 0.05 ESD resistance channel to housing/ground V (DC) 400 ESD resistance channel to channel V (DC) 400 Effect of a 10K−change of the ambient temperature on zero point (related to full scale) Autocal on Autocal off on sensitivity Autocal on Autocal off 4−pole female connector, compatible to LemoR Serie S, Size 0, contact arragement 304, fitting connector: e.g. FFA 05 304 CLAC52 (LemoR) Transducer connection Width Operating temperature range mm 20.3 (4 divs) °C [°F] −20...+60 [−4...+140] MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-46 ML801B + Connection board Accuracy class AP418i % Connectable transducers*) 1 4 current−fed piezoelectric transducer (e.g. Deltatront) Transducer identification Transducer excitation T-ID and TEDS compatible mA 4 Input voltage range V 2 ... 20 Measuring ranges V 0.05; 0.5; 5 Measurement frequency range Hz 1000 (−1 dB) Lower limit frequency (−3 dB) Hz 0.72 Linearity deviation % 0.05 VPP VPP VPP 5 Hz Bessel/500 Hz Butterworth < 25 m/< 60 m < 25 m/< 0.35 m < 100 m/< 3.5 m Noise Filter characteristics Measuring range 0.05 V Measuring range 0.5 V Measuring range 5 V Measuring range 0.05 V Measuring range 0.5 V und 5 V 0.1 0.03 Effect of a 10K−change of the ambient temperature on zero point (related to full scale) Width Operating temperature range *) % mm 20.3 (4 TE) °C [°F] −20...+60 [−4...+140] If the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms, please regard the advices on page B-55. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-47 ML801B + Connection board Accuracy class AP810 % 0.1 Transducers that can be connected 8 S.G. half or full bridges Excitation voltage (DC) V Transducer resistance at UB Rmin (full bridge) Rmax Ω Ω 10; 5; 2.5; 0.5 10V 330 5V 160 2.5V 120 0.5V 120 4000 Measuring ranges mV/V 4 (VB=10V) 8 (VB=5V) 16 (VB=2.5V) 80 (VB=0.5V) Control signal (Shunt) mV/V approx. 1 (with 350 Ω S.G. full bridge) approx. 0.5 (with 350 Ω S.G. half bridge) Noise at 350 W Filter characteristics Filter frequency UB=10V UB=5V UB=2.5V UB=0.5V Hz mm/m mm/m mm/m mm/m Transducer connection Permissible cable length between transducer and connection board 1.25/5 <0.025 <0.05 <0.1 <0.4 Bessel/Butterworth 40/80 <0.15 <0.3 <0.6 <3 D25 female receptacle m 200 mm 20.3 (4 divs) Linearity deviation % 0.05 Measurement frequency range Hz 500 (−1dB) Effect of a 10K−change of the ambient temperature on zero point (related to full scale) on sensitivity % % 0.05 0.1 °C [°F] −20...+60 [−4...+140] Width Operating temperature range 200/500 <1.8 <3.5 <7 − MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-48 ML801B + connection board Accuracy class AP814Bi Transducers that can be connected Internal completion resistors Excitation voltage (DC) 0.1 7) % 8 S.G. quarter bridges in three wire technique Ω 120, 350, 700, 1000 8) V 5; 2.5; 1; 0.5 Measuring ranges mV/V 8 (UB=5V) 16 (UB=2.5V) 40 (UB=1V) 80 (UB=0.5V) Control signal (shunt) mV/V approx. 1 (at 350 Ω) Noise at 350 W Filter characteristics Filter frequency UB=5V UB=2.5V UB=1V UB=0.5V Hz mm/m mm/m mm/m mm/m Transducer connection Permissible cable length between transducer and connection board Width 1.25/5 <0.05 <0.1 <0.25 <0.45 Bessel/Butterworth 40/80 <0.3 <0.65 <1.5 <3.5 D25 female receptable m 2009)10) mm 20.3 (4 divs) Linearity variation % 0.05 Measurement frequency range Hz 500 (−1dB) Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on the zero point (related to the full−scale value) on sensitivity % 0.1 0.1 % Operating temperature range 7) °C The error influence caused by asymmetrical cable resistances, is not included in the accuracy class. 8) Option 9) Use connection cable with wire cross section 0.25 mm2! 10) 100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS modul MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 −20...+60 200/500 <2.5 <6.5 <13 − Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-49 ML801B + Connection board Accuracy class AP815i Transducers that can be connected 8 S.G. full bridges in six wire technique or 8 S.G. half bridges in six wire technique or 8 S.G. half bridges in five wire technique or 8 S.G. quarter bridges in four wire technique or 2 S.G. rosettes Internal completion resistors Ω 120, 350, 700, (optional 1000) Excitation voltage (DC) V 5; 2.5; 1; 0.5 Measuring ranges mV/V 8 (VB=5V) 16 (VB=2.5V) 40 (VB=1V) 80 (VB=0.5V) Control signal (Shunt) mV/V 1.0078 0.1% (at 350Ω) Noise at 350 W Filter characteristics Filter frequency VB=5V VB=2.5V VB=1V VB=0.5V Hz mm/m mm/m mm/m mm/m Transducer connection Permissible cable length between transducer and connection board Width 11) 12) 13) 0.111)12) % 1.25/5 <0.1 <0.2 <0.5 <1 Bessel/Butterworth 40/80 <0.6 <1.2 <3 <6 200/500 <4 <8 <20 <40 2 D25 female receptacle m 20013) mm 20.3 (4 divs) Linearity deviation % 0.05 Measurement frequency range Hz 500 (−1dB) Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on zero point (related to full scale) on sensitivity % % 0.112) 0.1 Operating temperature range °C −20...+60 0.2 with irradiation according to EN 6100−4−3:1996 + A1:1998 0.2 with 5 V−excitation 100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS modul MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-50 ML801B + Connection board Accuracy class AP836 % 0.1 Transducers that can be connected 8 potentiometric Transducers Excitation voltage (DC) V 5 Transducer resistance Rmin Rmax Ω Ω 190 5000 Measuring range Noise Filter characteristics Filter frequency mV/V 500 Hz mV/V Bessel/Butterworth 40/80 <0.05 Transducer connection Permissible cable length between transducer and connection board Width 1.25/5 <0.01 D25 female receptacle m 200 (100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS modul) mm 20.3 (4 divs) Linearity deviation % 0.05 Measuring frequency range Hz 500 (−1dB) Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on zero point (related to full scale) on sensitivity % % 0.05 0.1 Operating temperature range °C −20...+60 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 200/500 <0.5 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-51 Multi−channel amplifier connection boards AP801 for 8 DC voltage sources AP801S6 AP809 for 8 voltage sources for 8 thermocouples with voltage supply 8V/16V AP801S6 AP409 AP835 AP836 for 4 thermocouples for 8 RTD Pt100 for 8 potentiometric Transducers 1 13 1 13 14 25 14 25 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-52 Multi−channel amplifier connection boards AP810 AP814Bi AP815i for 8 S.G. half or full bridges for 8 S.G. quarter bridges in three wire technique for 8 S.G. quarter, halfor full bridges 1 13 1 13 14 25 1 13 14 25 13 1 14 25 13 AP401 AP418i for 4 DC−voltage supplies (electrically isolated) for 4 current−fed piezoelectric transducers (compatible with T-ID and TEDS) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 1 14 25 14 25 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules 6 J-53 Programmable plug−in module ML70B Analogue outputs Max. number of analog outputs 2 (10 with AP78) Analogue outputs update rate Hz 2400 Nominal (rated) voltage V 10V asymmetrical kΩ >5 Permissible load resistance Ω <5 mVPP < 12 Long-term drift (over 48h) mV <3 Effect of ambient temperature at 10_K: Sensitivity Zero point % mV < 0.08 typically 0.04 < 3 typically 2 Internal resistance Residual carrier voltage (76.6 kHz) Programming Programming language IEC61131−3 Data program memory (volatile) kByte 224 Data program memory (non-volatile) kByte 16 Code program memory (volatile) (2 x available for online change) kByte 2 x 160 Code program memory (non-volatile) kByte 160 Memory for project sources (non-volatile) kByte 192 Hz 2400, synchronized with MGCplus measured-value processing Call frequency of the IEC program Number of subchannels Effective computer output 1...128 (set by user) 75,000 float operations/s or 300,000 integer operations/s MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-54 Mechanical Nominal (rated) temperature range _C [°F] −20 ...+ 60 [−4 ...+140] Operating temperature range _C [°F] −20 ...+ 60 [−4 ...+140] Storage temperature range _C [°F] −25 ... +70 [−13 ...+158] V +14.6 ... +17.0 (<90 mA) −14.6 ... –17.0 (<100 mA) −7 ... −9 (<10 mA) Card format mm Europe 100 x 160 Width mm 20.3 (4 divs) Operating voltages Connector DIN 41612 indirectly Supported connection boards Number of controllable connection boards 0, 1 or 2 Supported connection board types AP71 (2 CAN interfaces) AP72 (2 serial interfaces) AP75 (8 Digital-In, 8 Digital-Out, 24V level) AP78 (8 analog outputs) AP72 Connection board Interfaces Baudrate Electrical isolation kBaud V Connector 9.6; 19.2; 38.4; 57.6; 115.2 Typ. 500 9−pol.Sub−D female receptacle Mechanics Nominal (rated) temperature range _C −20 ... +60 Operating temperature range _C −20 ... +60 Storage temperature range _C −25 ... +70 V +5 ... (< 100 mA) Nominal (rated) voltages Card dimensions mm 102 x 112 Width mm 20.3 (4 division units) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-55 ML70B Programmable module and AP72 Connection board ML70B AP72 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-56 7 Communication module ML71B/ML71BS6 with AP71 Connection board (CANbus) CAN interface Number of CAN interfaces 2 Protocol CAN 2.0B Baud rate Baud Line length m 10k 20k 50k 125k 250k 500k 1M 1000 1000 1000 500 250 100 25 Hardware bus link individually selectable for each CAN interface Standard High Speed ISO 11898−24V Fault Tolerant Low Speed Connection technique 2x 9-pin DSUB, individual potential separation of supply and ground Measurement recording max. 128 each CAN−port1) Signals per second Number of recordable signals Max. number of signals (16-bit-signals with 4 signals per message Database with parameter information on the CAN signals Size of databases 50 100 400 1200 128 72 36 8 2) 1 ... 83) 2 (one database per CAN interface) 2x 100k Database storage Mechanical values Nominal (rated) temperature range _C [°F] −20 ... +60 [−4 ...+140] Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Operating voltage _C [°F] _C [°F] V −20 ... +60 [−4 ...+140] −25 ... +70 [−13 ...+158] +14.6 ... +17.0 (< 90 mA) −14.6 ... –17.0 (< 100 mA) −7 ... −9 (< 10 mA) mm mm Europe 100 x 160 20.3 (4 divs) Card format Width Receptacle 1) 2) 3) Byte 25 Maximum 256 channels per CP42 For operation with more than 8 subchannels For 8−channel operation MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 non-volatile in ML71B flash memory DIN 41612 indirectly Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-57 Type ML71B/ML71BS6 Analogue output The analogue output can display one of the max. 128 input signals at a time V 10V asymmetrical Permissible load resistance kΩ >5 Internal resistance Ω <5 Non−linearity % < 0.05 % < 0.08 typ. 0.04 Nominal (rated) voltage Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on the sensitivity Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on zero point mV 3 typ. 2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-58 8 Communication module ML74 with AP74 connection board (CANHEAD)1) CANinterface Connection board Protocol Baud rate Line length AP74 CAN 2.0B kBaud m 250 250 Hardware bus link individually selectable for each CAN interface Maximum bus length (without branches) 2) No. of CANHEAD 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Measurement recording Max. number of CANHEAD modules Number of sub−channels CANHEAD power supply Cut off current Cut−off upon current to earth Mechanical values Nominal (rated) temperature range Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Card format Width 1) 2) 3) 120 Ohm; 2.5 V P=1.8W/CANHEAD m 90 100 110 120 135 155 180 220 250 140 155 170 190 215 250 12 10 ... 120 3) A 2 A 0.1 _C −20 ... +60 _C _C mm mm −20 ... +60 −25 ... +70 Only with CP22 or CP42 (not with CP32B). The housing must be of type B or C. Thin Media Cable (0.38 mm2) at ambient temperature of 45 °C Max. 256 channels each CP42 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 ISO 11898 350 Ohm; 2.5 V P=1.15W/CANHEAD Europa 100 x 160 20.3 (4 TE) 700 Ohm; 2.5 V 1000 Ohm; 2.5 V P=1.0W/CANHEAD 165 180 200 220 250 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules 9 J-59 Communication module ML77B with AP77 Connection board (Profibus DP)1) Protocol Baud rate Profibus DP slave as per DIN 19245−3 Baud Profibus ID number Potential separation 9.6k ... 12M 04A9 (hexadecimal) V Connection technique typ. 500 9−pin DSUB Measurement transmission Supported formats Transmission rate at Profibus Float; 24 signals Float; 48 signals Integer 32 bit; 32 signals Integer 16 bit; 48 signals Integer 16 bit; 88 signals Integer 16 bit; 120 signals 4 Byte Integer 2 Byte Integer 4 Byte Float (IEEE) 4 Byte Float (Siemens) 4 Byte raw values 2 Byte raw values Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz 2400 1200 2400 2400 1200 800 Nominal (rated) temperature range _C [°F] −20 ... +60 [−4...+140] Service temperature range _C [°F] −20 ... +60 [−4...+140] Storage temperature range _C [°F] −25 ... +70 [−13...+158] Operating voltages V +14.6 ... +17.0 (< 200 mA) −14.6 ... –17.0 (< 200 mA) +7 ... +9 (<10 mA) Card format (Euro) mm 100 x 160 Width mm 20.3 (4 divs) Mechanical values Connector Weight 1) DIN 41612 indirectly kg approx. 0.3 Only in systems with CP42 or in systems without a communications processor. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-60 10 Multi-channel I/O amplifier module ML78B ML78B + connection board AP78 AP75 10 (2 filterable outputs, 1 of which is also accessible via the front panel on the ML78B) 2 (both outputs filterable 1 also accessible via the front panel on the ML78B) Analogue outputs Max. number of analogue outputs Electrical isolation V Analogue outputs update rate Hz D/A conversion resolution bit V − 2400 16 22) Grounding systems Nominal (rated) voltage Typically 2001) 1, isolated from dig. grounding systems 10 asymmetrical Permissible load resistance kΩ ≥5 Internal resistance Ω <5 Residual carrier voltage (76.6 kHz) mVPP < 12 Long-term drift (over 48h) mV <3 Effect of change in ambient temperature of 10K % mV < 0.08; typically 0.04 < 3, typically 2 Digital inputs 8 (16)3) Max. number of digital inputs Input voltage range V 0 ... 30 (nom. 0 ... 24V) Electrical isolation V Typically 500 Low potential V <5 High potential V Grounding systems Control functions for MGCplus channel groups 1) 2) 3) >10 1, isolated from the digital output Autocalibration on/off; Reset; Tare; Peak value clear/hold; Synchronisation of internal curve generator The filterable digital outputs are not electrically isolated! 1 grounding system for 2 digital filterable analogue outputs and 1 grounding system for the remaining 8 analogue outputs When using 2 AP75 connection boards: 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-61 Digital outputs 8 (16)4) Max. number of digital outputs Output voltage range V 0 ... 30 (nom. 0 ... 24V) Output current A 0.5 Short-circuit current A 1.5 Electrical isolation V Typically 500 ms <4 Response time Grounding systems Excitation 1, isolated from the digital inputs V 18 ... 30 (nom. 24); external • Possible function assignment for the outputs • • • Combine Limit Value for up to 120 MGCplus channels Acknowledgement signal for input Settings by means of an external software command Overflow message for groups of measurement channels Curve generator Max. number of curves Update rate (each channel adjustable) 10 Hz 1; 2; 5; 10; 20; 50; 100; 200; 600; 1200; 2400 ≤ 128000, permanently storable in flash memory Max. number of curve points Mechanical Nominal (rated) temperature range °C [°F] Operating temperature range °C [°F] −20 ...+ 60 [−4 ... +140] Storage temperature range °C [°F] −25 ...+ 70 [−13 ... +158] Operating voltages V +14.6 ... +17.0 (< 100 mA)/ −17.0 ... −14.6 (< 90 mA)/ −9.0 ... −7.0 (< 10 mA) Card format / width mm Connection technique Permissible connection board configurations 4) 5) −20 ...+ 60 [−4 ... +140] Euro 160 x 100 / 20.3 (4divs) 25−pin Sub−D Plug-in screw terminals 1 x AP78 / 1 x AP75 / 1 x AP78 and 1 x AP75 / 2 x AP755) When using 2 AP75 connection boards: 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs Analogue outputs VO1 and VO2 are both available on both connection boards MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules J-62 Connection boards for ML78B AP75 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 AP78 J-63 Specifications Ý System devices 11 System devices System devices MGCplus*) Mains supply Supply voltage Max. input nominal (rated) current Start-up current V AC A A 115V/230V −25+15% 2.2/1.3 <20 Battery supply Battery voltage Max. input nominal (rated) current Start-up current V DC A A 12V/24V −25+15% 11.5/5.5 <30 Max. power consumption W Nominal (rated) temperature range °C [°F] Type of protection 150 1...16 slots, desktop housing −10 ... +55 [14 ... 131] 19” rack frame −10 ... +55 [14 ... 131] desktop housing IP20 19” rack frame IP20 *) MGCplus − COMPLIANCE OF STANDARDS: The MGCplus system is tested according to the harmonized European standards EN61326 and EN61010 Therefore it achieves the protection aims of EEC directive 89/336EEC in the field of electromagnetic compatibility and EEC directive 73/23/EEC in the field of electrical safety of low voltage equipment. Mechanical stress is tested according to European Standard EN60068−2−6 for vibrations and EN60068−2−27 for shock. The equipment is exposed to an acceleration of 25 m/s2 within the frequency range of 5...65 Hz in all 3 axes. Duration of this vibration test: 30min per axis. The shock test is performed with a rated value of 200 m/s2 acceleration during 11 ms, half sine pulse shape, with 3 shocks in each of the 6 possible directions. System devices MGCsplit Power supply 1−NT650 Input voltage (nominal/rated) V 12, 24 and 42, on−board network (9 V to 58 V) Ride−through during start−up V 3 (0.1 s); 6 ... 9 (10 s) Output voltage V 28 10 % Output current (continuous load) A > 3.5 Protection against operating errors − Protection against sustained short−circuit and false polarity Permissible relative humidity % 100 (with dew point transition) Degree of protection − IP65 Connections − Voltage supply: ODU Minisnap, Series B, Type S3, Size 2, 4 pole, 60° encoded, (matching connector e. g. S32BFC-T04LPH0-6000) CAN and On/Off control signal: ODU Minisnap, Series B, Type S3, Size 2, 6 pole, 30° encoded, (matching connector e. g. S32BAC-T06MPH0-6000) Split-Line: ODU Minisnap, Series B, Type S3, Size 2, 16 pole, 0° encoded, (matching connector e. g. S32B0C-T16PFG0-7500) Start−up from standby mode − CAN, digital control line Status exchange with CPxx − I2C (load currents, errors) Control elements Contactor (push button) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 J-64 Specifications Ý System devices System devices MGCsplit (continued) Modules *) 1−SH400 Function Degree of protection *) 1−SH650 Enclosure for one MLxx amplifier and max. two connection boards (each 4 divs wide) Operating temperature range °C [°F] Nominal (rated) temperature range °C [°F] Permissible relative humidity % Supply voltage V Connections − 1−SH400CP Enclosure for the communication processor IP40 IP65 IP40 −30 ... +70 [−22 ... +158] −30 ... +70 [−22 ... +158] −20 ... +60 [−4 ... +140] −20 ... +60 [−4 ... +140] 95 at 40 °C [104 °F] 100 S Split−Line Input/Output S As on the resp. connection boards S Split−Line Input/Output S ODU connectors (LemoR compatible) 95 at 40 °C [104 °F] 18 ...32 Weight without amplifier and connection board, approx. kg 1.6 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 104 x 146 x 205 S Connection for ABX22A S With CP22 and CP42: 100 Mbit-Ethernet; USB; RS-232-C See MGCplus system specifications for measurement properties of amplifier modules. Split-Line Total length m 25 (from 1−SH400CP through last module) Max. number of measurement modules − 16 Meas./s 307,200; 4−byte format (like MGCplus) − Connected automatically Baud rate Bus termination MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 J-65 Specifications Ý System devices CP42 Communication processor Width mm Interfaces RS-232-C USB1) (master/slave) Ethernet Data transfer rate Ethernet (128 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz) USB (32 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz) PC card harddisk approx. 109 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz 128 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz Measured values/s Measured values/s Measured values/s Measured values/s 60.9 (12 divs) Potential separation Connection technique Baud rate typ. 500V 9-pin D−sub female connector 115.2 kBaud No USB female connector 12 MBaud (fastmode) typ. 500V RJ45 100 MBaud 307 200 (4−byte format) 76 800 (4−byte format) 262144 (4−byte format) 307200 (2−byte format) Nominal (rated) temperature range °C [°F] −10 ... +55 [+14 ... +131] Operating temperature range °C [°F] −10 ... +55 [+14 ... +131] Storage temperature range °C [°F] −25 ... +70[−13 ... +158] kg approx. 0.6 Weight Extension (optional) PC card harddisk, up to 5 GByte, ATA standard I/O contacts Potential separation V DC Connection technique 2 x In, 2 x Out, 24 V, GND Screw terminals (line less than 30 meters long) Input voltage level LOW V 0 ... 5 Input voltage range HIGH V 10 ... 24 Input current, typically, high level = 24 V mA 12 Input current, typically, high level = 10 V mA Output level active high at 0 A 3 Level supply minus 0.7 V Output level active high at 0.5 A Level supply minus 3 V Power supply (external) V 24 (11 V ... 30 V) Output current, max. A 0.5 Short-circuit current, typically A Short-circuit period 1) 500 0.8 unlimited Cable length 5 m; Cable extensions are not permissible. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 J-66 Specifications Ý System devices CP22 Communication processor Width Interfaces mm Potential separation 40.6 (8 divs) Connection technique Baud rate RS-232-C No 9-pin D−sub female connector 38.4 kBaud USB2) (master/slave) No USB female connector 12 MBaud (fast mode) Ethernet Yes RJ45 10/100 MBaud Data transfer rate Ethernet (64 channels/4−byte measured values/sampling rate 2400 Hz) Measured values/s 153 600 Measured values/s 57 600 Nominal (rated) temperature range °C [°F] −20 ... +65 [−4 ... +149] Operating temperature range °C [°F] −20 ... +65 [−4 ... +149] Storage temperature range °C [°F] −25 ... +70 [−13 ... +158] kg approx. 0.6 USB (24 channels/4−byte measured values/sampling rate 2400 Hz) Weight I/O contacts Potential separation V DC Connection technique 1 x In, 1 x Out, 24 V, GND Input voltage level LOW Input voltage range HIGH V 0 ... 5 V 10 ... 24 Input current, typically, high level = 24 V mA 12 Input current, typically, high level = 10 V mA 3 Output level active high at 0 A Level supply minus 0.7 V Output level active high at 0.5 A Level supply minus 3 V Power supply (external) V 24 (11 V ... 30 V) Output current, max. A 0.5 Short-circuit current, typically A 0.8 Short-circuit period 2) 500 Screw terminals (line less than 30 meters long) Cable length 5 m; Cable extensions are not permissible. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 unlimited J-67 Specifications Ý System devices RM001 Relay module Input voltage V 0/5 Resistance kΩ 12 Response time ms maximum 5 Release time ms maximum 25 V A VA 42 1 30 V +8; −8 Relay breaking capacity max. voltage max current max. power Operating voltage Power consumption mA 34 Switching cycles Switching cycles 50 x 106 100 x 103 kg 0.1 Input voltage V −10 ... +10 Input resistance kΩ 12.5 Relay-module life mechanical electrical (at nominal (rated) load) Weight, approx EM001 Output stage module Input Output Impressed voltage V Impressed current mA 20 / 4 ... 20 Ω maximum 500 Load resistance Measuring frequency range −10 ... +10 minimum 0 kHz 10 V +16; −16 Power consumption mA 35 Weight, approx kg 0.1 Operating voltage MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 J-68 Specifications Ý System devices Mobile display and control unit ABX22A Illuminated display No Front width mm Current consumption (8V) mA 20 m 1.5 Length of cable (6-wire) Connector type 111.8 (22 divs) Linkage connector, in accordance with DIN 45326, Series 723, 8-pin, No.09-0171-15-08 Display and control panel AB22A/AB32 Display AB22A Backlit LCD display, resolution 192x64 pixels AB32 Vacuum-fluorescent display (VFD), resolution 192x64 pixels Key panel Keypad (alphanumeric), 4 function keys, cursor keys and 5 dialogue keys. All keys are touch-sensitive with real keys beneath. Password There is a facility for protecting certain operating levels with a password. Dialogue Menu languages: German/English/French Display formats Weight, approx MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 1, 3, 6 values; ty graph, xy graph; Status limit switch kg 0.5 K-1 K Index MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 K-2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32 K-3 Index A B AB22A, control elements, D-3 battery connection, desktop housing, B-4 AB22A/AB32 display, measuring mode, D-6 first display, D-5 menus, D-13 save set−up, D-17 selection menus, D-18 set−up mode, D-11 battery operation, B-4 AB32, control elements, D-4 absolute/relativ to base, G-8 ABX22A, J-68 connecting, B-8 blank plate, B-8 bridge resistance, B-49 button, D-19 , D-22 , I-4 C calling up menus, D-13 CANHEAD, connecting, B-96 channel names, G-27 activation fields, D-19 , I-4 channel number, D-9 adaptation to the transducer current and voltage measurement, E-52–E-55 inductive transducer, E-31 piezoelectric transducer, E-66–E-69 piezoresistive transducer, E-78–E-81 potentiometric transducer, E-83–E-86 resistance temperature detector, E-55–E-57 resistors, E-58–E-61 rotation speed, E-45–E-49 SG transducer, E-20 thermocouples, E-49–E-51 channel selection in measuring mode, D-15 channel selection in set−up mode, D-16 Combine limit switches, F-12 commissioning, C-3 Communication module ML71B/ML71BS6, J-56 Communication module ML74, J-58 Communication module ML77, J-59 Communications processor CP22/CP42, insert, A-17 amplifier first measurement, E-18 setting up, E-4 compensating resistor, B-19 , E-21 , E-29 angle of rotation measurement, B-38 computer, connecting, B-99 AP74 connection board, B-98 conditioning, E-13 auto start, H-30 conditions on site, A-35 Completion resistor, B-20 autocal, F-24 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 K-4 Conformity, L-1 Index D connecting, A-1 , B-1 , C-1 , D-1 , E-1 , F-1 , G-1 , H-1 , J-1 data acquisition, D-7 , G-3 , G-22 Connecting separate TEDS modules, B-13 data acquisition comment, G-22 , H-25–H-29 Connecting transducer, LVDT, B-17 data acquisition parameter, H-15 , H-17 , H-23 , H-24 , H-25 , H-26 , H-30 , H-31 , I-8 connecting transducers, B-12 DC power source, B-48 DC voltage sources, B-44 frequency generator, B-51 , B-52 impulse transducer, B-53 inductive full bridge, B-14 , B-15 , B-18 , E-6 inductive half bridge, B-16 piezoelectric transducers, B-55 piezoresistive transducers, B-56 potentiometric transducers, B-57 resistors, Pt10,100, 1000, B-49 SG full bridge, B-14 , B-15 , B-18 , E-6 SG half bridge, B-16 shunt resistor, B-100 single strain gage, B-19–B-21 thermocouples, B-42 torque flange, T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2, B-26 torque measurement shaft, T4WA−S3, B-38 torque transducer T1A, T4A/WA−S3, T5, TB1A, B-37 T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1, B-33 data acquisition parameter set, H-30 data acquisition program, H-17 , H-19 data storage, D-17 DC power source, connecting, B-48 DC voltage source, connecting, B-44 define trigger, H-18 device structure, A-15 dialogue boxes, D-19 direct input, D-15 display channel names, G-27 display format, G-3 F−keys, G-23 display format, G-3 distributor board VT810/815i, connect, B-60 Connection board, AP460i, Pin assignment, B-28 Distributor board VT814i, connecting, B-59 connection board AP02, B-111 AP07/1, B-113 AP74, B-98 AP77, B-119 documentation, A-8 connection boards, J-26 AP01i... AP18i, connecting, B-105 connector pin assignment, AP17, B-109 current value, F-20 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Rotation speed measurement, T10FS−SF1, T10FS−SU2 (symmetrical signals), B-31 E earthing switch, B-3 , B-4 , B-5 edit field, D-19 , D-21 , I-4 envelope curve, F-21 K-5 Index error messages, D-10 Greenline, B-11 Evaluate F2 signal, E-64 guidelines, A-9 Extended functions, E-64 H external trigger, H-21 External triggering, B-108 F F−keys, G-23 housing, MGCplus desktop housing, A-13 hysteresis, F-8 I factory settings, of remotes, AP01i...AP14, B-108 impulse counting, B-53 feedback circuits, B-37 impulse transducer, connecting, B-53 file name, G-22 , H-24 inductive full bridge, connecting, B-14 filter high pass, E-15 low pass, E-15 inductive half bridge, connecting, B-16 final stage module, B-115 AP01i and AP03i, B-120 AP07/1, B-121 AP08/14/17/18i, B-122 AP09 and AP11i, B-124 AP13i, B-116 format, H-25–H-29 four−wire connection, B-12 , B-21 , B-37 , B-49 frequency generator, connecting, B-51 , B-52 frequency measurement, without direction of rotation signal, B-51 , B-52 input, letters and numbers, D-21 Inputs and outputs, CP22/CP42, B-101 , B-104 integration, F-4 , F-18 L language, H-38 desktop device, C-6 level, H-22 limit switch delay time, F-9 setting up, F-8 Frequency quadrupling, E-64 limit switches, F-7 , F-11 setting up, F-6 fuse, B-4 , B-5 LVDT, connecting, B-17 G M Glitch filter, E-44 , E-48 , E-64 mains connection, desktop housing, B-3 graphic display, G-17 maintenance and cleaning, A-36 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 K-6 Measurement, Torque transducer, E-37 measurement band, H-20 measurement of, impulses/frequencies, E-61–E-64 Index AP17, B-88 AP401, B-78 AP409, B-77 AP460i, B-80 AP815i, B-79 measurement with, piezoresistive transducers, E-75–E-78 ML38B, Extended functions, E-7 measuring rate trigger, H-17 , H-18 ML74 communication module, B-97 measuring with, inductive transducer, E-31–E-35 mode, H-19 , H-22 menu, pull−up menu, D-13 menu structure, I-1 , I-3 Multi−channel amplifier connection boards, J-51 , J-52 menus, exiting, D-14 Multi−channel amplifier module ML455, J-34 MGC Compact, C-5 Multi−channel amplifier plug−in module ML460, J-36 MGCsplit CAN bus connection, AP71, B-89 Connecting, B-62 , B-75 Connecting to MGCplus systems, A-27 Enclosure dimensions, A-32 Enclosure versions, A-20 Inputs/outputs AP13i, B-81 , B-82 , B-83 AP17, B-85 , B-86 , B-87 AP75, B-93 , B-94 , B-95 AP78, B-90 , B-91 , B-92 ML/AP module, B-76 LED display, A-24 ADDRESS, A-26 ERROR, A-24 LINK, A-24 Rx/Tx, A-24 SYNC, A-24 Measurement module IP40, A-21 Measurement module IP65, A-22 Power supply units NT650/NT651, B-63 Processor module, A-23 Transducer connection AP13i, B-84 Multi−channel amplifier plug−in module ML70B, J-53 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Multi−channel amplifier plug−in module ML801B, J-41 Multi−channel I/O module ML78, J-60 multi−channel module, D-9 multiplier, B-115 N number, G-6 O one−channel amplifier plug−in modules, general data, J-3 one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML01B, J-5 one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML10B, J-8 one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML30B, J-11 one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML35B, J-13 K-7 Index one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML38, J-15 potentiometric transducer, connecting, B-57 one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML50B, J-17 potentiometric transducers, E-83 connecting, B-58 one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML55B, J-19 one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML55BS6, J-21 Pre trigger, H-23 one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML60B, J-24 printer, connecting, B-99 one−channel module, D-9 P print, H-37 R recording measurement series, H-14 parameter set, F-24 reduction factor, H-26 password, H-3 relay contacts, AP01i...AP14, B-111 peak value, F-19 relay module, B-111 peak value stores, F-15 combine, F-16 controlling, F-18 switch off, F-15 , F-22 remote, F-3 periods, G-22 , H-15 piezoelectric transducer, connecting, B-55 piezoelectric transducers, E-66 piezoresistive transducer, E-75 piezoresistive transducers, E-78 connecting, B-56 pin assignment AP01i...AP14, B-107 AP01i/03i/08/09/11i/14/17/18i, B-106 AP02, B-111 AP07/1, B-113 AP13i, B-116 , B-119 PLC, connecting, B-99 remote contacts, F-3 , F-4 AP13i, B-118 remotes, B-101 assignment AP01i...AP14, B-108 factory setting, B-108 function, F-3 resistors, E-58 PT10, 100, 1000, connecting, B-49 RM001, B-111 rotation speed and angle of rotation measurement, T4WA−S3, B-38 rotation speed measurement T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2 (symmetrical signals), B-29 T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1 (asymmetrical signals), B-35 Polynomial curve, cubic, E-7 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 K-8 Index Rotation speed measurement with inductive transducers, B-41 S safety instructions, A-3 remaining dangers, A-3 save, H-9 security prompt, D-17 selection field, D-19 , I-4 selection fields, D-20 selection levels, D-18 serial interfaces, B-99 set−up window, D-19 stop condition, H-24 stop trigger, H-17 switch, F-24 synchronization, CP22, B-6 system language, H-38 password, H-3 print, H-37 save, H-9 time, H-39 system description, A-10 system devices, J-63 T setting up, basic parameters, E-3 TEDS, Connection, B-13 setup menu, G-4 TEDS transducer, E-9 SG full bridge, connecting, B-14 , B-15 , B-18 , E-6 half bridge, connecting, B-16 single strain gauge, connecting, B-19 transducer, connecting, B-12 thermocouples, E-49 connecting, B-42 shielding design, B-11 time stamp, H-16 shunt resistor, connecting, B-100 torque flange T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2, B-26 single strain gauge, connecting, B-19–B-21 torque measurement T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2, B-26 T1A, T4A/WA−S3, T5, TB1A (slip ring or direct cable connection), B-37 T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1 (square−wave excitation voltage), B-33 slot number, D-9 start condition, H-23 start trigger, H-17 status data acquisition, G-22 status limit switch, G-21 Status line, D-8 status line, G-7 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 three−wire connection, B-49 time, H-39 Torque transducer, E-37 torque transducers (T1A, T4A/WA−S3, T5, TB1A), connecting, B-37 K-9 Index torque transducers (T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1), B-33 transducer connection distributor board VT814i, B-59 potentiometric transducers, B-58 , B-60 Transducer error input active, E-64 trigger, external, H-21 trigger condition, H-17 , H-22 trigger function, H-17 trigger level, H-22 type, G-6 V version, F-23 voltage drop, B-5 Y YT−Diagram, G-17 Z Zero index input active, E-64 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 K-10 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32 Index xxx Modifications reserved. All details describe our products in general form only. They are not to be understood as express warranty and do not constitute any liability whatsoever. B0534-18.0 en Hottinger Baldwin Messtechnik GmbH Postfach 10 01 51, D-64201 Darmstadt Im Tiefen See 45, D-64293 Darmstadt Tel.: +49/61 51/8 03-0; Fax: +49/61 51/ 8039100 E−mail: [email protected] www.hbm.com